55246 7


BV




11 17
L~B~AXPEFNINSUAS
- - -------




z"z ',',,,al
fI:








':I
~:::;~ I~1;: ~: ~:
~~ Y. I:~
I,::::' ~:: ~ ': ~~.::
~: h:.i ~i
ss;~: r i 1.. ~~~
" ~ ~'
i
r r~ I;
~:: ~::~!:~~
~"~:~;
''
~,i*:::::';
~~.~:~ ~: ~::~~. ~~:~. ~ ~ ~~::~: ~:
CI':?1;: ~
jl~~,;:




!'ii 'I::~"`';::c::rc" ~1:1:'~~'~::';':~ I~~:"; ` " ~ ~:
'
~~ 1:: I
I I
I' i (;;I:". i:~:'~: ~~
i.:~i:~
I:;i~5:: i ~i.::I:
1 r I.~~:r::;:~:. ~~~
"'' j~/:::~:~:I::: ~::
~:::
~
~::: i I;
:~~
:::: :;::::i ~ I::i:~




7bV"~
/    r~~6
o H.11I6~,




I




MISSIONARY RECORDS.




LONDON:
JhIn Hill, Printer, Black Horse Coual
Fleet Street.




MISSIONARY RECORDS.


SANDWICH ISLANDS,
LONDON:
THlE RELIGIOUS, TRACT SOCIETY;
Instituted 1799.
DEPOSITORY, 56, PATERNOSTER ROW, AND 65,
ST. PAUL S CHURCHYAR D; AND SOLD BY
THE BOOKSELLERS.
1839.




1
- -j    -,i?  -; -           -Ai
-.I          1,  I
_9;,
-,.7       i  -  -,




CONTENTS.


PAGE
CHAPTER L...                        1
Important effects of the first intercourse between
civilized and uncivilized men-General notice of the
Sandwich Islands-Geographical extent and physical
peculiarities of Hawaii-Elevation of the principal
mountains-Portion of the soil capable of cultivationSituation and extent of Maui-Tahaurawe-MorokiniRanai-Morokai, and Oahu-Celebrated pass in the
mountains of Oahu-Gods of the precipice-The town
of Honoruru-Situation, extent, etc. of Tauai, Nihau,
and Taura-Climate, temperature, soil-Physical character and number of the islanders-Natural historyBirds-Reptiles-Fish-Vegetables-Fruits-Early intercourse between the natives and foreigners-Discovery
of the island by Captain Cook-Effects produced among
the natives by the arrival of the vessels-The impressions received by the voyagers corrected by the residence
of missionaries among the people.
CHAPTER II...... 27
Arrival of British ships in Kearakekua Bay-Impressions produced by the event on the minds of Captain
Cook and his companions-First intercourse with the
natives-Captain Cook declared to be one of their gods
by a priest-Captain Cook arrayed in the sacred cloth,
b




CONTENTS.


and a sacrifice offered to him on board his ship-The
natives prostrate themselves before him as he is con.
ducted to the temple on shore-Captain Cook seated
amidst the idols of Hawaii-A sacrifice and prayer offered by the heathen priest-A Christian sabbath-The
encampment on shore rendered sacred, or prohibitedArrival of the king of the island-His visits to the ships
-Presents to the captain-Ceremonies at the interment
of one of the seamen-Abundant supply of provisions
furnished by the natives-Departure of the ships —Their
return in consequence of damage in a storm-Thefts
committed by the natives-Attempt of Captain Cook to
convey the king and queen on board-A chief killed
by one of the ship's officers-Attack upon the party on
shore-Death of Captain Cook-Manner of disposing
of his body-Feelings of the natives-Divine honours
paid to the remains of Captain Cook-Present state of
the inhabitants of Kearakekua Bay-Subsequent intercourse between the natives and foreigners.
CHAPTER III...55
Conquest of Maui and Oahu, by Tarnehameha-Frequent visits of shipping to the islands-Notices of Obukahaia, and George Taumuarii, son of the king of Tauai
-Appointment of a mission to the Sandwich IslandsState of the islands on the arrival of the mission-Difficulties removed by the previous abolition of the tabu
system and idol worship-First view of the islandsAppearance of the country —Intercourse with the people
— First sabbath among the islands-Visit to the ruins of
a temple-Introduction to the king and chiefs-Native
amusements-Landing of part of the missionaries on
Hawaii-Establishment of the mission at Oahu-De2




CONTENTS.


'Vii


scription of native houses-Mission premises-Domestic
accommodations-Return of Prince George to his father
-The king's reception of his son-Appointment of a
mission to Taui-First letter from the missionaries to the
Missionary Society-Letters from the king and queen
of Tauai-General state of the mission at the time the
first communications were forwarded to America.
CHAPTER IV......                       94
Account of the general state of the people, from the
time of their discovery, to the abolition of idolatry, and
the arrival of the first missionaries from America-Government of the Sandwich Islands-Monarchy absolute
-Rank and offices hereditary-Political divisions of
the country-The king sole proprietor of all landTenures by which land is held-Mode of levying taxes
-Punishment of offences-Description of their cities
of refuge-Courts of justice-General effects of the
former system of government in the islands.
CHAPTER      V......   111
Idols formerly worshipped by the Sandwich Islanders
-Description of the images of Keoroeva-Mode of
presenting offerings-Privileges of the sacred hogsMooarii, king of lizards-Karaipahoa-Tradition of the
origin of this idol-Its supposed power over human life
-P6le, the goddess of volcanoes-Account of her appearing to the chief Kahavari-Imagined effects of her
anger-Universal dread of the gods of the volcanoesA visit to the great volcano-Native account of the god
by whom it was supposed the crater was inhabited



CONTENTS.


Interview of the missionaries with a priestess of the
volcano at Hawaii-Visit of Kapiolani, a chief woman,
professing the Christian faith, to the volcano-Her descent to the crater-Engaging in the worship of the
true God-Description of the visit of a priestess to the
chiefs-Notice of the ruins of some of the heathen temples-House of Keave-Practice of sorcery-Methods
employed by sorcerers.
CHAPTER       VI.....                139
Former frequency of war in the Sandwich Islands —
Preliminary arrangements-Employment of diviners to
ascertain the will of the gods-Offering of human sacrifices-Ancient arms, weapons, feather helmets, cloaks,
and other war dresses-Tairi, the Hawaiian god of war
-Idols carried before the armies going to battle-Conduct of the priests of the god of war-Notice of the last
war in Hawaii, occasioned by the abolition of idolatryDeath of the idolatrous chief and his wife, on the field
of battle-Treatment of the vanquished-Intimate connexion between the wars and superstition of the people
-Usages observed at the death of chiefs-Cutting off
the hair, knocking out the teeth, cutting the ears, and
tatauing the tongue-Elegiac ballads-Introduction of
the rites of Christian burial-Belief in a future statePrevalence of infanticide-Reasons for the commission
of the crime.
CHAPTER       VII..... 159
First establishment of schools-Meetings for religious
conversation and prayer-Study of the native language




CONTENTS.


ix


-Fitting up a place for public worship-Arrival of the
king at Oahu-Description of missionaries requiredLetter from the governor of the Russian settlement of
Kamtschatka-Injurious reports respecting the objects
of the mission, circulated by foreigners-Proposed voyage to the Society Islands-Visit of Rihoriho to Tauai
-Public interview between the two kings-Establishment of the printing press-First printing in OahuVisit of the deputation from the London Missionary
Society, with native Christians, to the islands-Detention of Auna, a native teacher-Invitation to Mr. Ellis
to join the mission-Departure of the deputation-Return of Mr. Ellis and family-Fraternal correspondence
between the missionaries-Religious service, in connexion with the public commemoration of the death of
Tamehameha, and the accession of Rihoriho to the
throne.
CHAPTER      VIII......   190
Appointment of a reinforcement of missionaries for
the Sandwich Islands-Services connected with their
embarkation-Beneficial effects of their labours during
the voyage-Approach to the islands-Description of
Hawaii-Appointment of a mission to Maui-Embarkation-Attention of the king to his mother-First sabbath
at Lahaina-Retrospect of the first week-Reflections
of the missionaries-A deputation from the missionaries
explore the island of Hawaii-State of the peopleCharacter of their idolatry-Amount of populationEligible stations for missionary efforts-Illness of Keopuolani-Her baptism  and death-Observances connected with her interment-Notice of her character
and deportment.




CONTENTS.


CHAPTER       IX.....                e    218
Recommencement of the mission at Kairua-Population of the station and neighbourhood-Favourable appearances among the natives-Proposal of Rihoriho to
visit England and America-Council of the chiefsEmbarkation of the king and queen-Their attendants
-Objects of the voyage-Their arrival in EnglandAttentions paid them by the government and nobilityVisits to places of public resort-Illness of the king
and queen-Death of the queen-Death of the king
-Interview of the survivors with his majesty George
iv.-Character of Rihoriho-Character and disposition
of the queen-Affecting circumstances attending her
departure for her native islands-Appointment of the
Blonde frigate to convey their bodies to the islandsFirst intelligence of their death received by the natives
-Commendable conduct of the regent on the occasion
-Political state of the islands-Arrival of the Blonde
-Landing of the survivors-Interview of Lord Byron
and suite with the king and regent-Landing of the
bodies-Funeral ceremonies at Oahu-National council-Departure of the Blonde.
CHAPTER      X....                248
Introduction of the rite of Christian marriage among
the people-Commencement of a station at Byron's Bay
and Kaavaroa-Death of Keeraumoku, the governor of
Maui-Removal of his remains to Kairua-Illness of
Taumarii —His experience of the supporting influence of
the gospel-General lamentations among the peopleInsurrection in the island of Tauai-Preservation of the




CONTENTS.


mission family and Karaimoku-Removal of the missionaries to Oahu —Fearful out-breaking of immorality
-Defeat of the insurgents-Clemency of the Christian
chiefs towards the vanquished-Letter of LanuiMurderous treachery of one of the idolatrous warriors
-Revival of religion after the war-Admission of native chieftains to the church at Oahu and Lahaina-Account of Buaiti, a blind man-Progress of educationLetters from the regent and the prime minister of the
government to the secretary of the American Missionary Society-Hostility and violence of foreigners against
the missionaries-Progress of improvement among the
people-Departure of Mr. Loomis and Dr. Blatchley
for America-Enactment of laws by the chiefs.
CHAPTER XI...... 284
Prosperous state of the missionary stations in Hawaii
-Visit of the regent Kaahumanu to Kairua-Her tour
of part of the island-Recollections of TamehamehaEmbarkation of missionaries for the islands, on board
the Parthian-The cordial welcome of the king and
chiefs on landing-Visits to the islands of Ranai, Morokai, and Kahaurawe-State of the schools, and numbers under instruction-Efforts in favour of temperance
-— Death of Mrs. Bishop-Notice of the first convert at
Kairua-Attempts of Roman Catholic missionaries to
introduce popery among the people-Visit of the Rev.
C. T. Stewart to the islands-Religious state of the
people at Byron's Bay-Native residence of the kingCommunications and presents from the American government to the king and chiefs-Judicious advice of
Captain Finch-Proclamation of the king, in favour
of morals and the observance of the sabbath.-Extent of




XI1                 CONTENTS.
education-State of the schools-Meetings for religious
improvement-Celebration of the ordinance of the
Lord's supper-The station at Kaavaroa-Operations
of the press-Arrival of additional missionaries-Improved system of education.
CHAPTER       XII.... 327
Enlarged preparations for printing the Holy Scriptures-Enactments of the chiefs in favour of temperance
-Conversion of the priestess of the volcano-Improvement of the social condition of the people-Laxity of
parental discipline among the people-Progress of temperance-Discontinuance of the use of tobacco among
the native Christians at Lahaina-Attention to religion
among the seamen-Increase of native churchesDeath of the regent Kaahumanu —Sketch of her character-Important effects of her death upon the nation
-Establishment of normal schools-Brief mission to
the Marquesas-First newspaper in the Sandwich
Islands-Comprehensive view of the state of the mission in 1836-Congregations, churches, schools, and
printing.








...
HHHHHM-..............  MIIHHH--... ..




MISSIONARY RECORDS.


SANDWICH ISLANDS.
CHAPTER L.!mportant effects of the first intercourse between civilized and uncivilized men- General notice of the
Sandwich Islands- Geograp hical extent and physical peculiarities of Hawaii-Elevation qf the
principal mountains-Portion of the soil capable
of cultivation-Situation and extent of Maui* Thauaw  -Mroini-Raai- Jiirokiand
Oahu- Celebrated pass in the mountains o~ Oahu
-- Gods of the preecipice- The town q/ Honoruru-,Situation, extent, etc. of Tauai —Ni hau, anid Taura
— Climate, tee peratrec, soil-Physical character
and num ber oj the i. lan ders-Natural history-Birds-P 'eptiles - Fish - Vegetables - FruitsE~arly intercourse between the natives andjforeiqners-Discovery of the island by Captain C~ookB fects3 produced among the natives by the arrival
of the vessels - The rnprcssions received by the
voyagers corretetd by tie residence of missionaries
amsong the people.
IN ti e historj of every nation there are periods
which, as beinsg oreo than usually marked with
events affecting the character and cirecu stances
of the comrn isnty, are, regarded with deep arid
deserv ed intecrest through smcce cdinggc~encrations.
The comparativ importance of the changes'which
L.




2           MISSIONARY RECORDS.     [CHAP. I.
a nation may undergo, must depend very much
on the rank it holds in the scale of general civilization and intelligence, and its relative position
towards other nations; but in the annals of every
people, seasons in which ancient and venerated
institutions are insensibly superseded, in which
the opinions and manners of the society are in a
state of rapid transition, but especially in which
its religious doctrines and usages sustain essential alterations, must ever merit an attentive regard.   The history of the Sandwich Islands,
towards the close of the last, and the commencement of the present century, is, on these acco unts,
fraught with peculiar interest. It will be in the
recollection of many, that, to a large proportion
of existing political communities, the era referred
to was an era unusually eventful; but it may
be fairly questioned, whether among any people
its progress was marked by changes more striking
and important, than those which occurred within
the interval to the Sandwich Islanders.
All opinions respecting the time when the
Sandwich and other islands of the Pacific were
first peopled, rest upon mere conjecture; yet,
from the extended genealogies of the reigning families, preserved by tradition among the islanders, as well as from other evidence to the same
effect, there are strong reasons for believing that
the present race have inhabited the Sandwich
Islands from a remote period, perhaps for several
centuries. Whatever may be the opinion, however, entertained on this subject, it is certain that
both the islands and their inhabitants were unknown to the civilized world till discovered by
3




cXAP. I.]   SANDWICH ISLANDS.


3


Captain Cook, in 1778. They had indeed been
seen by Spanish ships traversing the Pacific, between Acapulco in South America, and Manilla
in the Philippine Islands, and had been visited
once, at least, by foreigners; but, until the period
under review, no account of their existence had
been given to the world.
The period of their discovery was the commencement of a new era, in the annals of geography and nautical science in our country; and
the peculiarities of their state and circumstances
gave rise to new speculations among the literati
of Europe, respecting the perfection of what
was called the savage state.  By all the intelligent and inquisitive, they were regarded as
constituting valuable additions to our knowledge
of mankind   It would be interesting could we
form, in return, any correct idea of the strong
emotions of wonder, and awe, and mysterious apprehension, which attended their first intercourse
with civilized man. There can be no doubt,
that, in general, the islanders at first regarded
their visitors as superior beings. This impression was not weakened by the fatal experience of
the new and terrible powers of destruction which
the strangers brought with them; and which,
on more than a single occasion, they most wantonly and murderously exercised. The possession of such powers could not fail to inspire their
minds with emotions of superstitious dread; while
the abundance of iron, clothing, etc. with which
the ships and their crews were supplied, was
fitted to act no less powerfully on their desires
and hopes.   It was only when the strangers,
impelled by unbridled and vicious propensities,




4           MISSIONARY RECORDS.     [CHAP. I.
reduced themselves, in seeking new gratifications,
to the level of the savage, that the islanders
changed their opinion of them, and found that
however superior they might be in some respects,
in others they were their equals, and even their
inferiors.
Whether intercourse of a kind such as now
described, would have yielded the natives of the
islands any benefits, at all commensurate with
the certain evils they derived from it, is a questionable problem. But in the wise arrangements
of the Supreme Ruler, by whora the course of
nations, as well as that of individuals is directed
and controlled, the visits of the first discoverers
of the islands, and other subsequent navigators,
were preparing the way for the arrival of visitors
of another order, and actuated by motives of a
very different kind; men who were influenced
by the most sublime benevolence, who sought to
ameliorate, and not increase, the sufferings of the
ignorant tribes they were introduced to, and to
lead them to the only true source of happiness in
this world and the next. It will be easily perceived that reference is here mdade to the arrival
of the missionary band which, in recent years,
proceeded to the islands; and whose pious, judicious, and persevering efforts have, under the
Divine blessing, been attended with a measure
of success scarcely equalled in any scene of similar labour.  To preserve a memorial, to the honour of Divine faithfilness and mercy, and encourage the people of God in other efforts, of
which the good effects may be longer delayed,
the following record of the progress of truth
among the Sandwich islanders; of its effects




:CHiAP. I.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.              5
ulpon their character, pursuits, and prospects, has
been prepared.  But, before proceeding to this,
sorme account of the geographical position and
extent, and chief physical peculiarities of the
islands; of the circumstances of their discovery;
and of the general state of the people prior to
the arrival of the missionaries, will, it is presumed, not be unacceptable.
Although ten in number, only eight of the
Sandwich Islands are inhabited; the other two
being barren rocks, principally resorted to by
fishermen.
IIa-wai-i, (Owhyee,) the principal island of the
group, resembles in shape an equilateral triangle,
and is somewhat less than three hundred miles
in circumference; being about ninety-seven miles
in length, and seventy-eight in breadth, covering
a surface of four thousand square miles. It is the
most southern of the whole group, and, on account
of its great elevation, is usually the first land
seen by vessels approaching the islands.   Its
broad base and regular form render its outline
different from that of any other island in the
Pacific. The mountains of Hawaii, unlike the
Peak of Teneriffe, in the Atlantic, or the mountains of Eimeo and other islands of the Pacific,
do not pierce the clouds like obelisks or spires,
but rise comparatively unbroken from  the sea
beach to the loftiest elevation.  The whole appearance of Hawaii is less beautiful and picturesque than that of Tahiti, the principal of the
Society Islands, but is, at the same time, more
stupendous and sublime. On approaching the
islands, the mountains of the interior are often
B3 2




6           MISSIONARY RECORDS.     [CHAP. I.
seen, long before the coast, or any of the usual
indications of land are visible. On these occasions the elevated summits of Mouna Kea, or
Mouna Roa, appear above the mass of clouds
that usually skirt the horizon, like some stately
pyramid or silvered dome, distinguished from
the clouds beneath only by their well defined
outline, unchanging position, and the intensity
of brilliancy occasioned by the reflection of the
solar rays from the surface of the snow.
The height of these mountains has been computed, by some navigators who have visited the
Sandwich Islands, at twelve thousand, and by
others at eighteen thousand feet.
Their base lies at the distance of a few miles
from the seashore, and is covered with trees;
higher up, their sides are clothed with bushes,
ferns, and Alpine plants; but their summits,
which are formed of lava, though this is partly
decomposed, are yet destitute of every kind of
verdure.
The greatest part of the land capable of cultivation is found near the seashore, along which
the towns and villages of the natives are thickly
scattered. There are a few inland settlements on
the east and north-west parts of the island, but,
in general, the interior is an uninhabited wilderness.  The heart of Hawaii, forming a vast central valley between Mouna Roa, Mouna Kea,
and Mouna Huararia, is almost unknown: no
road leads across it; but it is reported by the natives who have entered it, either to be " bristled
by forests of ohia," or to exhibit vast tracts of
sterile and indurated lava.




CHAP..]   SANDWICHI ISLANDS.


7


Hawaii is by far the largest and most important island of the group.  Its population is about
eighty-five thousand.  Until within a few years,
it was the usual residence of the king, and the
frequent resort of every chief of distinction in
the other islands. Foreigners, however, having
found the harbours of some of the leeward islands
more secure and convenient than those of Hawaii, have been induced to visit them in preference, and this has led the king and principal
chiefs to forsake, in a great degree, the favourite
residence of their ancestors, and, excepting
the governor and the chiefs of Kaavaroa, to
spend the greater part of their time in the other
islands.
Separated from the northern shore of Hawaii
by a strait, about twenty-four miles across, the
island Mau-i (Mowee) is situated, in lat. 200. N.
and long. 157~. w     This island is forty-eight
miles in length, in the widest part twenty-nine
miles across, about one hundred and forty miles
in circumference, and covers about six hundred
square miles. At a distance, it appears like two
distinct islands; but, on nearer approach, a low
isthmus, about nine miles across, is seen uniting
the two peninsulas.  The whole island, which is
entirely volcanic, was probably produced by the
action of two adjacent volcanoes. The appearance
of Maui resembles Tahiti more than the neighbouring island of Hawaii. The southern peninsula
is the largest of the two, and the mountains in it
are lofty; but though their summits are often seen
above the clouds, they are never covered with
snow. The high land is steep and rugged, and
*        I




8           MISSIONARY RECORDS.      [CHAP. IL
frequently marked with extinct craters, or indurated streams of lava; yet, wherever the volcanic matter has ndergone any degree of decomposition, the sides of the mountains, as well as
the ravines by which they are intersected, are
covered with shrubs and trees.
In the northern peninsula there are several
extensive tracts of level and well watered land,
in a high state of cultivation; and, although this
part of the island is evidently of volcanic formation, the marks of recent eruptions, so frequent
in the southern peninsula, are seldom seen here.
The population of Maui has been estimated at
eighteen or twenty thousand; and the real number of its inhabitants does not probably fall far
short of that amount.;
To the south of Maui, and only a few miles
distant from  its southern peninsula, is situated
the small island of Ta-hau-ra-we, about eleven
miles in length, and eight across. It is low, and
destitute of every kind of shrub or verdure, except a species of coarse grass. There are but
few settled residents on the island, and these are
considered as under the authority of the governor of Maui.
MJ-o-roki-ni, a barren rock, which lies between
these two islands, would render the navigation
of the strait exceedingly dangerous, were it not
so much elevated above the sea, as to be at all
times visible from  vessels passing between the
islands.  Morokini is only visited by fishermen,
who on its barren surface spread their nets to
dry, and for this purpose it may be considered a
convenient appendage to the adjacent islands.




CHAP. i.]   SANDWICH ISLANDS.               9
Ra-nai, a compact island, seventeen miles in
length, and nine in breadth, lies north-west of
Tahaurawe, and west of Lahaina, in Maui;
from which it is separated by a channel not more
than nine or ten miles across.   Though the
centre of the island is more elevated than Tahaurawe, it is neither so high nor broken as any of
the other islands: great part of it is barren, and
the island in general suffers much fiom the long
droughts which prevail; the ravines and glens,
notwithstanding, are filled with the roots of
small trees, and to these many of the inhabitants of Mani repair, for the purpose of cutting
posts and rafters for their small houses. The
island is volcanic, the soil shallow, and by no
means fertile; the shores, however, abound with
shell fish, and some species of medustc and cuttlefish.  The inhabitants are but few, probably not
exceeing two thousand.
3llgr,2 a- is a long irregular island, apparently
formed by a chain of volcanic mountains, forty
miles in length, and not more than seven miles
broad; the mountains are nearly equal in elevation to those of Maui, and are broken by numerous deep ravines and watercourses, the sides of
which are frequently clothed with verdure, and
ornamented with shrubs and trees. The population is greater than that of Ranai, though it does
not probably exceed three thousand persons.
O-a-hu, the most romantic and fertile of the
Sandwich Islands, resembling, in the varied features of its natural scenery, several of the Society Islands, lies nearly north-west of Morokai,
from which it is between twenty and thirty miles
distant. This beautiful island is about forty-six




10          MISSIONARY RECORDS.    [CHAP. I.
miles long, and twenty-three wide; its appearance from the roads off Honoruru, or Waititi, is
remarkably picturesque. A chain of lofty mountains rises near the centre of the eastern part of
the island, and, extending perhaps twenty miles,
reaches the plain of Eva, which divides it from
the distant and elevated mountains that rise in a
line parallel with the north-west shore.
The plain of  hnri6iiu 'exhibits, in a singular
manner, the extent and effects of volcanic agency.
It is not less than nine or ten miles in length;
and, in some parts, two miles from the sea to
the foot of the mountains. The whole plain is
covered with a rich alluvial soil, frequently two
or three feet deep; beneath this, a layer of fine
volcanic ashes and cinders extends to the depth
of fourteen or sixteen feet; these ashes lie upon
a stratum of solid rock, not volcanic, but calcareous, and apparently a kind of sediment deposited by the sea, in which branches of white
coral, bones of fish and animals, and several
varieties of shells are found. The base of the
mountains which bound the plain of the interior, appears to have formed the original line of
coast on this side of the island; but probably, in
some very remote period, an eruption took place
from  two broad-based, truncated mountains,
called  by  foreigners,  Diamond   Hill and
Punchbowl Hill, evidently extinguished craters;
when the ashes and cinders thrown out, and
wafted by the trade winds in a westerly direction, filled up the sea, and formed the present
extensive plain; the soil of its surface having
been subsequently produced either by the decomposition of lava, or by the mould and decayed




CHAP. I.]   SANDWICH ISLANDS.              11
vegetable matter washed down from the mountains during the rainy season of the year.
Across this plain, immediately opposite the
harbour of Honoruru, lies the valley of Anuanu,
leading to a pass in the mountains, called by the
natives Ka Pari, "the precipice."  The mouth
of the valley, which opens immediately behind
the town of Honoruru, is a complete garden, carefully kept, by its respective proprietors, in a state
of high cultivation, and remarkably productive.
The valley rises with a gradual ascent from the
shore to the precipice, which is seven or eight
miles from the town. After journeying through
varied scenery, all exceedingly rich and beautiful, for about this distance, the valley becomes
gradually narrower, and the mountains rise more
steep on either side. The scenery is romantic
and delightful: the bottom of the vailay is gently
undulated; a rapid stream takes its serpentine
way from one side of the valley to the other,
sometimes meandering along with an unruffled
surface, and at other times rushing down a fall of
several feet, or dashing and foaming among
rocks which interrupt its progress. The sides
of the hills are clothed with verdure; even the
rocks that project from amongst the bushes are
ornamented with pendulous or creeping plants of
various kinds; and, in several places, beautiful
cascades roll their silvery streams down the steep
mountain's side into flowing rivulets beneath.
The beauty of the scenery around increases, until,
at length, after walking some time oh a rising
ground, more steep than usual, and through
a thicket of hills, the traveller suddenlv emerges
into an open space, and, turning round a small




1'2         MISSIONARY RECORDS.     [CHAP. 1
pile of volcanic rocks, the Pari all at once
bursts upon him with an almost overwheAming
effect. Immen.sc masses of blac 1and ferruginous rock, many hundred feet in nearly perpendicualar heights, are piled up on hoth sides;
while, immediately before him, he looks down
the fearful steep several hundred feet, and beholds hills and valleys, trees and cottages,,streams and paths, cultivated plantations and
untrodden thickets; in short, a varied landscape,
many miles in extent, bounded by lofty mountains on the one side, and the wihite-crested
waves of the ocean o n the other.  From this,
howver level the ascent is at first gradual and
easy, but, as the highest edge is approached, becomnes more formidable, especially in two plaees,
where the volcanic rocks appear to rise perpendicularly, and present an even arid app'arently
prqjeeting front, which it seems impossible to
surmount.   The elevation of the upper ridge,
over which the path leads, is from fbir to five
hundred feet bov-e the lansd below.  Still the
native~s not ornly pass and repas witho ut sin h
diffiealty hit often ca rry heavy busdens front
one side to the, other.
Withisis a fbw yarsd of the upper edge, of the
pass, unudes ti e I ade of srr~ounding hr hes and
trees, two rde an d shapeless stone idols were
formerly fixed, one o il aeh s ide of the path.,
whi h the saivese 1 cile Alma no ha iPari,  godo
of the prec~ipce."  They wese usnaily covered
with pieces of white tapa, (native cloths,) and
eve~ry r tivc who pas sed by the preeipije, if he
intended to dIescend idha a gecu bouglis bcfore
tIesee idols eniced them    vith a gpziallad of




CHAP. I.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


13


flowers, or wrapped a piece of tapa round them,
to render them propitious to his descent; while
all who ascended from the opposite side, made
a similar acknowledgment for the supposed protection they had experienced. On this subject,
one of the missionaries, writing within recent
years, remarks:-"This practice appears universal, for, in our travels among the islands, we have
seldom passed any steep or dangerous paths, at
the commencement or termination of which we
have not seen these images, with heaps of offerings lying before them.  Until very recently, it
is evident the influence of superstition was strong
in the minds of the great mass of the people; for,
although the natives who accompanied us on our
excursions, either from a conviction of the absurdity of the notions of their countrymen, or from
mere wantonness, usually overturned the idols,
battered them with stones, or rolled them down
the precipice, or passage, which they had been
supposed to defend; yet, on passing the same
paths, only a very short time afterwards, we have
invariably found them  replaced, or, if broken,
their places supplied by fresh ones. This conduct
of our native companions was never the consequence of our directions, and seldom received
our approbation; for we were not ambitious to
become iconoclasts. Our object was rather to
enlighten the minds of the people, to convince
them of the absurdity and evil of idolatry, and
to lead them to the exercise of a better worship
and faith; well assured that if, under the blessing of God, we sueeeeded in this, they themselves would, wTith the adoption of the Christian
C




14          MISSIONARY RECORDS.     [CHAP. I.
system, not only remove idolatry, but abolish
the observances by which it was upheld."
Immediately south of the valley of Anuanu, are
situated the town and harbour of Honoruru.
The harbour is the best, and indeed the only
secure one at all seasons, in the Sandwich
Islands, and is more frequented by foreign vessels than any otherx; seldom having less than
three or four, and sometimes upwards of thirty
lying within it at the saime time. The town has,
also, since the number of shipping has increased,
become populous. It is one of the largest in
the islands, usually containing six or seven thousand inhabitants. It is the frequent residence of
the king and principal chiefs, who are much engaged in traffic with foreigners visiting the
islands, or residing on shore for purposes of tradee
There are twelve or fourteen merchants, principally Americans, who have established warehouses on shore for foreign goods, principally
piece goods, hardware, crockery, hats and shoes,
naval stores, etc. which they retail to the natives
for Spanish dollars, or sandal wood. On the eastern side of the basin is a strong fort, one hundred
yards square, mounting sixty gans.  It was begun by some Russians, who were, however, expelled, and the fort finished by the natives, from
an apprehension that these foreigners were in connexion with the Russian settlements on the northwest coast of America, and were about to take possession of the island. Here also, in the month of
April, 1820, an American mission was commenced, which, under God, has been the means
of producing a most happy moral and domestic




cHAP. I.]   SANDWICH ISLANDS,             15
change in the character of many of the people,
whose advancement in the arts of civilized life,
as well as in Christian knowledge, is truly gratifying to witness.
About six miles to the west of Honoruru, and
nearly as far from the village of Eva, on the Pearl
River, there is a singular natural curiosity-a
small circular lake, situated at a short distance
from the seashore, so impregnated with salt,
that twice in the year the natives take out between two and three hundred barrels of fine,
clear, hard, crystalized salt.  This lake is not
only an interesting natural curiosity, but an important appendage to the island. It belongs to
the king, and is not only useful in curing large
quantities of fish, but furnishes a valuable article of commerce. The population of Oahu is
estimated at about twenty thousand.
North-west of Oahu, and distant from it about
seventy-five miles, is situated the island of Tauai,
which is mountainous, and exceedingly romantic
in its appearance, but not so fertile as Oahu, or
the greater part of Maui.  It is forty-six miles
in length, and twenty-three in breadth, and
covers a surface of a hundred and fifty square
miles.  The population probably amounts to
nearly ten thousand. The principal settlements
are in the neighbourhood of Waimea River, the
roads at the entrance of which are the usual resort of vessels touching at Tauai. Near the
mouth of the river is a strong fort, in excellent
repair, mounting twenty-two guns.     It was
erected several years since, and is well adapted
for defence. This, and the neighbouring island
of Nihau, were not invaded by Tamehameha, by




16          MISSIONARY RECORDS.    [CHAP. I.
whom all the other islands of the group were
subdued.   Taumarii, the late king, however,
rendered a tacit acknowledgment of dependence
on that ambitious prince, and paid annually a
nominal tribute both to him and to his son, the
late Rihoriho; and shortly before his death,
which took place in 1824, he formally ceded the
islands which he had governed to Karaimoku,
the regent of the Sandwich Islands, for the king,
who was then absent on a visit to Great Britain.
The son of the late king and several old warriors,
dissatisfied with the conduct of their sovereign,
took up arms, to rescue the islands from the dominion of the chiefs of the windward islands;
but, being defeated in a battle fought in a valley
near Waimea, the island is now under the authority of the young king, Kauikeouli, the successor of Rihoriho, and the present sovereign of
the whole of the Sandwich Islands.
The inhabitants are, in general, a hardy and
industrious race. It is remarkable, that in their
language they employ the t in all those words
in which the A would be used by the natives of
the other islands.
Ni'hau, a small island, twenty miles in length,
and seven miles wide, politically connected with
Tauai, lies in a westerly direction, about fifteen
miles distant. The inhabitants are not numerous,
and in the general features of their character
they resemble those of Tauai. These two islands
are celebrated throughout the whole group, for
the manufacture of the finely painted or variegated mats, so much admired by foreigners, and
which the chiefs in all the islands prefer for the
purpose of sleeping 6n to every other kind.




CHAP. I.]   SANDWICH ISLANDS.


17


These mats are sometimes very large, measuring
eighteen or twenty yards in length, and three or
four yards in breadth; yet they are woven by the
hand, without any loom or frame, with surprising regularity and exactness.  They are made
of a fine kind of rush, part of which they stain
of a red colour, with vegetable dyes, and form
their beautiful patterns by weaving them  into
the mat at its first fabrication, or working them
in after it is finished.
The natives of these islands are also distinguished for the cultivation of the yam, which
grows very large, both at Tauai and Nihau, and
contributes essentially to the support of the inhabitants. As the yam is not cultivated to any
extent in the other islands, many ships are induced to visit these, principally for the purpose
of procuring a supply of it.  It is not only an
excellent root, but will keep a long time at sea
without deterioration.
Taura is another small island belonging to
the group, lying in a south-western direction
from Tauai; but it is only a barren rock, the resort of vast numbers of aquatic birds, for the
purpose of procuring which it is occasionally visited by the natives of the windward islands.
Adjacent to the shores of most of the islands,
small reefs of white coral, common throughout
the Pacific, are occasionally found; but they
are not so varied in their kind, so frequently
met with, nor so extensive, as in the southern
islands.
The climate, though warm    and debilitating
to an European constitution, is et salubrious'
c 2




18          MISSIONARY RECORDS.   [CHAP. I.
there is no winter, and the principal variation in
the uniformity of the seasons is occasioned by
the frequent and heavy rains, which usually fall
between December and March, and the prevalence of southerly and variable winds during this
season. The tabular account, on the opposite
page, taken from a meteorological journal, kept
by the American missionaries, will show more
fully the state of the weather for a year, from
August, 1821, to July, 1822: the thermometer
was noted at eight A. M., three P. r., and eight
P. M.
Rain falls but seldom on the western shores of
any of the islands, excepting in the season above
mentioned; though showers are frequent on the
eastern or windward side, and in the mountains
they occur almost daily.
The soil is rich in those parts which have long
been free from volcanic eruptions; but the general appearance of the country is scarcely so inviting as when first discovered; many parts,
then under cultivation, now lying waste.
The natives are, in general, rather above the
middle stature, well formed, with fine muscular
limbs, open countenances, and features frequently
resembling those of Europeans. Their gait is
graceful, and sometimes stately. The chiefs, in
particular, are tall and stout, and their personal
appearance is so much superior to that of the
common people, that some have imagined them
to be a distinct race. This, however, is not the
fact; the great care taken of them in childhood,
and their better living, have probably occasioned
the difference. Their hair is black or brown,




- -.


I  iI  I


ri7
A
z
12
rpr


Months.
August.
September
October..
November.
December.
January,
February
March.
April....
May...
June....
July...


deg.
88
87
86
82
80
80
77
78
81
81
84
84


2
deg.
74
74
73
71
62
59
61
66
62
72
71
74


deg.
14
13
13
11
18
21
16
12
19
9
13
10


deg. deg.
75 to 85
76 -84
76 - 83
75 -80
70 - 78
68 -76
68 -75
71-75
72 -78
75 -80
76-81
76 - 83


aPdeg.
79
78
78
76
72
70
71
72
73
76
78
78


9 -N. E.
N. E.
N. E.
IN. E.
N.& N.E.
Variable
N. E.
N. E,
Variable
N.E.
N. E.
N. E.


General state of the weather.




--


Clear; rain but once
Rained on 5 da3s
Clear; rain but once
Clear; rain but once
Clear; rain twice
Rain 1 day; 7 others cloudy
Rain 4 days; 10 others cloudy
Rain 5 days; 8 others cloudy
Rain 5 days; 12 others cloudy
Rain 4 days; 3 others cloudy
Cloudy 6 days
Rain 4 days; 7 others cloudy




-
-      I Resul
the
1;-14 -4
spl~!


It for
rear


88  61   27  70 to 80 -75


N.E.


Rain on 40 days; generally
clear at other times.


s  --- —------— t ---- I --------------------




20          MISSIONARY RECORDS.    [CHAP. I.
strong, and frequently curly; their complexion
is neither yellow, like the Malays, nor red, like
the American Indians, but a kind of olive, and
sometimes reddish brown.    Their arms and
other parts of the body are tatooed; but, except
in one of the islands, this is not so common as in
many parts of the Southern Sea.
Compared with those of other islands, the inhabitants may be termed numerous. They were
estimated by their discoverers at four hundred
thousand. There is reason to believe this was
greatly above the actual population at that time;
though traces of deserted villages, and numerous
enclosures, formerly cultivated, but now abandoned, are everywhere to be met with. At present it
does not exceed a hundred and thirty thousand,
or a hundred and fifty thousand, of which
eighty-five thousand inhabit the island of Hawaii.
The rapid depopulation, which has most certainly
taken place within the last fifty years, is to be
attributed to the frequent and desolating wars
which marked the early part of Tamehameha's
reign; the ravages of a pestilence, brought in
the first instance by foreign vessels, which has
twice, during the above period, swept through
the islands; the awful prevalence of infanticide; and the melancholy increase of depravity
and vice, particularly of the ruinous habit of
spirit drinking.
The natural history of the islands, as it regards
the animal kingdom, is exceedingly circumscribed. The only quadrupeds originally found
inhabiting them, were a small species of hogs,
with long heads and small erect ears; dogs,




MIAP. I.]    SANDWICH ISLANDS.            21:lizards, and an animal larger than a mouse, but
smaller than a rat. There were no beasts of
prey, nor any ferocious animals, except the hogs,
wIhich were found wild in the mountains. There
are now large herds of cattle in Hawaii, and
some tame ones in most of the islands, together
with flocks of goats, and a few horses and sheep,
which have been taken thither at different times,
principally from the adjacent continent of America.  Horses, cattle, and goats thrive well;,
but the climate appears too warm for sheep, unless they are kept on the mountains; which, in
consequence of the keenness of the air, are seldom inhabited by the natives.
Birds, with the exception of those which are
aquatic, and a species of owl that preys upon
mice, are seldom seen near the shores.  In the
mountains they are numerous; and the notes of
one kind, whose colour is brown and yellow
speckled, are exceedingly sweet, resembling those
of the English thrush.  Several are remarkably
beautiful; among which may be reckoned a small
kind of paroquet of a glossy purple; and a species of red, yellow, and green woodpecker, with
whosesfeathers the gods were wont to be dressed,
and the helmets and handsome cloaks of the
chiefs ornamented. But the feathered tribes of
Hawaii are not, in general, distinguished by the
variety of their plumage, or the melody of their
notes. There are wild geese in the mountains,
and ducks near the lagoons, or ponds, in the vicinity of the seashore: the domestic fowl was
found there by the first discoverers, and, though
now seldom used as an article of food, many are
raised for the supply of shipping.




22


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. I.


In common with the other islands of the eastern part of the Pacific, they are entirely free from
every noxious and poisonous reptile, excepting
centipedes, which are neither large nor numerous.
Fish are not so abundant on these shores as
around many of the other islands; they have,
however, several varieties, and the inhabitants
procure a tolerable supply.
The vegetable productions, though less valuable and abundant than in some of the islands
both to the west and the south, are found in no
small variety; and the most serviceable are raised with facility. The natives subsist principally
on the roots of the arum esculentium, or taro,
on the convolvolus batatus, or sweet potatoe,
called by them  udra, and uhi, or yam. The
principal indigenous fruits, are the uru, or breadfruit; the niu, or cocoa nut; the maia, or plaintain; the ohia, a species of eugenia; and the
strawberry and raspberry. Oranges, limes, citrons, grapes, pine apples, papaw apples, cucumbers, and water melons, have been introduced,
and, with the exception of pine apples, thrive
well.   French beans, onions, pumpkins, and
cabbages, have also been added to their vegetables; and, though not esteemed by the natives,
are cultivated to some extent, for the purpose of
supplying the shipping. Sugar-cane is indigenous, and grows to a large size, though it is not
much cultivated.  Large tracts of fertile land lie
waste in most of the islands; while sugar-cane,
together with cotton, coffee, and other valuable
inter-tropical productions, might be easily raised
in considerable quantities.  This will probably




';HAP. I.]   SANDWICH ISLANDS.           23!be the case when the natives become more indusatrious and civilized.
The local situation of the Sandwich Islands is
4important, and highly advantageous for purposes
of commerce, etc. On the north are the Russian settlements of Kamtschatka, and the neighbouring coast; to the north-west, the islands of
Japan; due west, the Marian Islands, Manilla,
in the Philippines, and Canton, in China; and
in the east, the coast of California and Mexico.
Hence they are so frequently resorted to by vessels navigating the Northern Pacific. The establishment of the independent states of South
America has greatly increased their importance,
as they lie in the track of vessels passing from
thence to China, or Calcutta and other parts of
India; and are not only visited by these, but by
such as trade for skins, etc. with the natives of
the north-west coast of America.
The period of the discovery of the Sandwich
Islands was, as we have said, the year 1778.
Whilst pursuing his third voyage of discovery
in the Pacific, Captain Cook, on the 18th of
January, in that year, first descried the islands.
In honour of the Earl of Sandwich, then first
lord of the Admiralty, and patron of the undertaking in which he was embarked, the captain
bestowed on the group the name which they
now bear. The following is our navigator's own
account of the circumstances and events of his
first visit to them.
'On Monday, the 19th of January, the ships
approached an island, which was found to be
named Atooi, (Tauai,) and some natives coming
off in canoes, our people were agreeably surprised




24         MISSIONARY RECORDS.    [CHAP. I.
to find that their language was, with very little
variation, that of Otaheite.  They readily exchanged fish, potatoes, and pigs, for nails. It
is a remarkable fact, and very greatly in their
favour, that they cared not for beads, but set a
great value on iron, which they asked for by the
name of toi. At the same time, their great
astonishment at the sight of the ships, and the
things on board, was a proof that no European
had visited them before. Some of them repeated
a long prayer before coming on board, aid were
at first afraid of giving offence; but afterwards
they attempted to seize every thing they came
near, and one man made off with the butcher's
cleaver, and gained the shore with his prize.
At one place, where Lieutenant Williamson, who
had been sent out with three armed boats, attempted to land, the natives crowded upon him,
attempting to seize oars, muskets, and whatever
else they could reach. It is to be regretted, that
in attempting to repel this violence, the natives
were fired on, and one man unfortunately
killed." From the following account of the captain's disembarkation, it will be evident that the
natives regarded him at first as a being more
than mortal.
C On the first landing of the captain, the whole
of the assembled natives fell upon their faces before him, and continued to lie prostrate until he
made signs for them to rise; when they presented to him a number of young pigs and plantain
leaves, with much ceremony and long prayers.
A. friendly trade for hogs and potatoes was then
established, and the watering party filled their
casks at a pool without molestation.  On a




iAP. I.]    SANDWICH ISLANDS.            25
subsequent day, the captain, in company with!lessrs. Anderson and Webber, enjoyed a ram|    into the interior, when they had an opportu4'n ity of observing many of the customs and superstitions of the natives: the graves of some of
he native chiefs were, on this occasion, pointed
it to them, and in every instance the square enlosure which contained the sepulchre, enclosed
i;also the grave of a human victim.  The party!discovered also, with deep regret, that cannibal-:ism was not unknown here: a wooden knife or:!Siaw, armed with shark's teeth, and used for cut-:iing up dead bodies, was amongst the articles?'t|hey purchased; the natives acknowledging the
uise that was made of it, and affirming that human flesh was savoury eating."
|': An event so important and surprising as the!jarrival of the ships and the foreigners, the:i:colour, dress, arms, language, manners, etc. of
the latter, so powerfully affected the minds of the
natives, that the ordinary avocations of life were:ifor a while suspended. The news of such an
event rapidly spread through the islands, and
i multitudes flocked from every quarter to see the
return of Orono, or the motus, (islands,) as they:called the ships.  The whole island was laid
under requisition to supply their wants, or coni: tribute to their satisfaction; hence the immense; quantities of provisions presented, the dances,
etc. with which they were entertained. The effect produced upon the minds of the visitors, by
iwhat they saw during their transient stay among
t:the islands, heightened as it was by the attrac-:tions of novelty, and the complacent feelings of
D




26


MISSIONARY RECORDS.  [CHAP. I.


discoverers, was highly favourable. The almost
primitive simplicity, natural vivacity, and fascinating manners of a people, who had existed for
ages unknown to the rest of the world, the mildness and salubrity of their climate, the spontaneous abundance of delicious fruits, and the varied
and delightful appearance of the scenery were so
enchanting, that many began to imagine they
had discovered a sort of elysium, where the inhabitants, free from the toil and care, the want
and disappointment, which mar the happiness of
civilized communities, spent their lives in unrestrained enjoyment.
Far different were the impressions produced on
the minds of the missionaries, after they had resided many years on the island. They then could
dispassionately testify, that, after having acquired
the language of the people, observed their domestic economy, and become acquainted with the
nature of their government, and their principal
civil and religious usages, they were led to conclusions far less flattering to philosophic speculation; conclusions in painful accordance with the
humbling declarations of Divine revelation. We
shall soon see that events occurred not long subsequent to those above narrated, which tended materially to alter the estimate of the condition of the
islanders, formed even by the first visitors themselves. We allude to the well known catastrophe
which afterwards befell them, in the loss of their
enterprising commander, in the island of Hawaii,
and which has invested that island with so much
of melancholy interest.




iCHAP. II.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


27


CHAPTER II.
Arrival of British ships in Kearakekua Bay-Im.
pressions produced by the event on the minds of
Captain Cook and his companions-First intercourse with the natives-Captain Cook declared
to be one of their gods by a priest- Captain Cook
arrayed in the sacred cloth, and a sacrifice offered
to him on board his ship- The natives prostrate
themselves before him as he is conducted to the
temple on shore —Captain Cook seated amidst the
idols of Hawaii-A sacrifice and prayer offered
by the heathen priest-A Christian sabbath- The
encampment on shore rendered sacred, or prohibited
-Arrival of the king of the island-His visits to
the ships-Presents to the captain- Ceremonies
at the interment of one of the seamen-Abundant
supply of provisions furnished by the natives-Departure of the ships- Their return in consequence
of damage in a storm- Thefts committed by the
natives-Attempt of Captain Cook to convey the
king and queen on board-A chief killed by one of
the ship's officers-Attack upon the party on shore
-Death of Captain Cook-Manner of disposing
of his body-Feelings of the natives-Divine honours paid to the remains of Captain Cook-Present state of the inhabitants of Kearakekua BaySubsequent intercourse between the natives and
foreigners.
IT was on Wednesday, January 6, 1779, that
Captain Cook, after exploring the north-west
coast of America, returned to pay his second visit to the Sandwich Islands.    When both his
ships, the Discovery and the Resolution, had
been supplied with provisions from the natives in
their canoes, they anchored in a bay named




28          MISSIONARY RECORDS.   [CHAP. II.
Kearakekua, where they were visited by not
fewer than a thousand canoes, most of them
crowded with people, well laden with hogs, fruits,
and roots. Into this bay the ships were taken
to refit; and whilst they were at anchor there,
Captain Cook appears to have felt great interest
in surveying the novel assemblage before him.
4 I had nowhere," he says,  in the course of
my voyages, seen so numerous a body of people
assembled at one place; for, besides those who
had come off to us in canoes, all the shore of the
bay was covered with spectators, and many hundreds were swimming round the ships like shoals
of fishes. We could not but be struck with the
singularity of the scene; and, perhaps, there
were few on board who now lamented our having
failed in our endeavours to find a northern passage homeward last summer.    To this disappointment we owed our having it in our power to
revisit the Sandwich Islands, and to enrich our
voyage with a discovery, which, though the last,
seemed in many respects to be the most important which had hitherto been made by Europeans,
throughout the extent of the Pacific Ocean."
Such are the words with which this enterprising man closed his interesting journal; words
that remain an indelible monument of the fallacy of all trust, which reposes merely on the
emotions and appearances of a moment.
There were not, indeed, wanting circumstances, even at this early period of the intercourse of the ships with the natives, which must
have materially modified the feelings of satisfaction with which the latter were regarded. One of
these was the insatiable thirst for plunder, which




CHAP. II.]   SANDWICH ISLANDS.


29: induced the people to crowd around the ships, so::as to retard the transaction of necessary business.
This was partially restrained by the interference
of some chiefs who attached themselves to Captain
Cook, and, at his request, soon cleared the
" vessel of all troublesome intruders, by driving
some into their canoes, and forcing others into
the sea.  The chiefs, however, were not altogether proof against temptation themselves; and
Koa, in particular, a little old chief, would
sometimes introduce common persons as of the
same rank, with a view to get possession of presents made to them.
Koa, who was a priest as well as a warrior,
seems to have been the first who honoured Captain Cook with a kind of divine adoration.
When he was conducted into the cabin of the
Resolution, he approached the captain with great
veneration, threw over his shoulders a piece of
red cloth, the sacred cloth in which the idols of
this country were arrayed; then stepping back a
few paces, he made an offering of a small pig,
which he held in his hand, while he uttered a
prayer of considerable length. After dinner,
when Captain Cook, with Messrs. King and
Bailey, accompanied Koa on shore, four men,
carrying wands tipped with dog's hair, sacred
wands such as were used in tabuing, marched
before him, making loud proclamation respecting
Orono; upon which the whole crowd on the
shore retired, except a few, who fell prostrate on
the ground. The procession went on, as directed
by Koa, to a large moral, on the south side of
a village called Kaka, which stood at the head
D2




30         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. II.
of the bay. Here was a heiau, or temple, a solid pile of stones, about forty yards long, twenty
broad, and fourteen in height, with a flat paved
top surrounded by a wooden rail, on which were
fixed the skulls of the victims sacrificed on the
death of chiefs. In the adjacent area were some
buildings, and on one side were five poles supporting an irregular scaffold. On arriving at
the temple, the party were led towards two
large wooden images, to which Captain Cook was
presented by a tall young man with a long beard,
named Kaireekeera, who, along with Koa, chanted a hymn. They were then led towards the five
poles, at the foot of which were twelve images,
ranged in a semicircle, with a whatta, or altar, in
the middle, on which lay a putrid hog, and under it pieces of fruits and roots. Koa, having
placed the captain close to the whatta, took
down the hog, and held it towards him; then
making a long speech, or prayer, he let it fall to
the ground, and led him to the scaffold, which,
with some difficulty, they mounted together.
And now approached, in solemn procession, ten
men, carrying a live hog and a large piece of red
cloth; on drawing near they fell prostrate, and
Kaireekeera meeting them, received first the
cloth, and then the hog; the former being handed
to Koa, was wrapped round the captain, while
the latter was offered before him. The two
priests now began to chant, sometimes in concert, and sometimes alternately; and, after this
service had continued for some time, Koa let
the hog drop, when he and the captain descended
from the scaffold. He then led him to the range




ECHAP. II.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


31


of images, at which he snapped his fingers, with
some sneering words, as he passed; till, reaching
the central figure, which was covered with red
cloth, he prostrated himself, and kissed it; after
which the captain, at his desire, did the same.
From thence he led his guest to a sunken area
in the morai, where he seated him between two
wooden idols, Koa supporting his right hand,
while Lieutenant King supported his left. At
this time a second procession of natives arrived,
with a baked hog and some fruits; and Kaireekeera, heading the procession, presented the pig
before Captain Cook, with solemn chanting,
to which the rest made responses, closing with
the name Orono. The natives then sat down
fronting the captain and his supporters, and
while some cut up the baked hog and prepared
the vegetables, others engaged in brewing ava:
and when the ava had been handed round and
tasted, morsels of the flesh were also distributed.
A chief named Parea fed Mr. King, and Koa
tried to feed Captain Cook; but the latter, remembering the putrid hog, could not swallow a morsel. This closed the ceremony; and the captain,
after distributing amongst the natives some trifling presents, which pleased them much, returned on board, attended to the beach by the
men with wands, and honoured by the prostrations of all whom he met.
It is easy to see, from  this narrative, that
the natives ranked the navigatori among their
gods; regarding him as the deity whom they
styled Orono, or Rono. This Orono had, according to their tradition, governed Hawaii, or




32          MIESSIONARY RECORDS.   [CHAP. II.
an extensive district in it, during what may, in
its chronology, be called the fabulous age. Having on some account become offended with his
wife, and murdered her, he was afterwards
visited with such poignant remorse for the act, as
to induce a state of mental derangement. In
this state he travelled through all the islands,
boxing and wrestling with every one he met.
He subsequently set sail in a singularly shaped
canoe for Tahiti, or a foreign country. After
his departure he was deified by his countrymen,
and annual games of wrestling and boxing were
instituted to his honour. As soon as Captain
Cook arrived, it was supposed, and reported,
that the god Rono was returned; the priests
clothed him with the sacred cloth worn only by
the gods, conducted him to their temples, sacrificed animals to propitiate his favour, and hence
the people prostrated themselves before him as
he walked through the villages.
It has been well remarked, by the biographer
of Captain Cook, that "it is deeply to be regretted our illustrious countryman should, in this
instance, have allowed his curiosity to overcome
his sense of duty. However eager he might
have been to become acquainted with the religious
rites of this people, he ought not to have allowed
them to offer their idolatrous, though ignorant
worship to him. As a Christian, he was bound
both to refuse adoration to their gods, and to
reject it when offered to himself.  He.acted
honourably at Tahiti, when he condemned the
human sacrifice, which his curiosity induced him
to witness  and now, when he saw plainly that




CHAP. II.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


33


these wretched idolators mistook him for a god,
he ought to have remembered the conduct of
Paul and Barnabas at Lystra, on a similar occasion, and have shuddered at the idea of accepting
divine homage. Even if the strength of his curiosity might be pleaded in extenuation of his
allowing this idolatry once, no such plea can be
advanced to excuse his permitting its repetition,
which took place a few days after at the house or
temple of Orono, with equal, if not greater solemnity; not to speak of the more common tokens of
adoration, almost daily offered him by the priests
or the people. It might possibly be thought
good policy, to encourage this veneration of his
person as a means of ensuring his own safety and
comfort, and that of his men; but if such was
his object, the last page of his history proves
how completely he miscalculated.  On the 17th
of January, he first accepted adoration and sacrifice, and on that day four weeks, he fell a sacrifice himself, and was torn to pieces; while Koa,
Parea, and other natives, who were chief actors
in the idolatrous scenes, bore a principal part in
the bloody tragedy that followed."
It remains to be noticed, as a further subject of
regret, that the day alluded to was the sabbath,
when the officers and crew, instead of participating in the idolatries of the ignorant and superstitious heathen, would, it might be supposed,
have been employed in grateful worship of the
true and living God.
The delusion of the natives, in mistaking Captain Cook for their god Orono, produced in the
first instance advantages to the British. They


O




34          MISSIONARY RECORDS.    [CHAP. EII
were allowed to select a field for erecting their
observatory and tents; and, to prevent intruders
from disturbing them, the field was tabued, or
rendered sacred, by having sacred wands fixed
around the wall that enclosed it. After this
ceremony, no canoes durst land at the spot, no
native would enter the holy ground without special invitation, and no females could be prevailed upon to approach.  When persons were
urged to entice the latter, they invariably replied,
that the Atua and the king would kill them if
they entered. Provisions of every kind, and in
abundance, were, however, daily brought for
their subsistence; while canoes, also loaded with
provisions, were sent as punctually to the ships.
This was done by direction of Kau, the venerable high priest, grandfather to Kaireekeera; and
nothing was asked or expected in return, it being
considered as the payment of a sacred tribute.
The priests, indeed, continued warm friends of
the British during their stay; and, with the exception of old Koa, took no part in pilfering
their property.
While the crews of the vessels under the command of Captain Cook were busily employed in
efhecting necessary repairs, and preparing provisions for their protracted voyage, the navigator
received a visit from King Teraiobu, who had,
till now, been from home. On his arrival, the
whole bay was tabued for more than two days;
no canoe visited the ships but by special licence,
and no female was to be seen. On Monday, the
25th, the king, with his wife and children, paid
a private visit to the ships, and was found to be




HAP. II.]    SANDWICH ISLANDS.           35:the same aged chief, who, when the Resolution
first touched at Maui, had gone on board with
some of his family and attendants; on which
occasion the English were not aware of his
rank.
On Tuesday, the 26th, he came off to the ships
in great state; he and his chiefs dressed in their
rich feathered cloaks and helmets, and armed
with long spears and daggers. The royal party
occupied a large canoe, which was followed by a
second, containing Kau and the other priests,
with their gigantic and hideous idols displayed
on red cloth; and after this came a third canoe,
filled with hogs and vegetables. The priests sung
hymns with great solemnity, while the canoes
paddled round the ships; but, instead of going
on board, the royal and sacerdotal companies
made for the shore, and landed opposite the tents,
where Lieutenant King and the guards were
ready to receive them. Captain Cook arrived
presently, having followed them in the pinnace;
and when the royal party were seated in the telt,
the king rose up, and, in a very graceful manner,
threw his own cloak over the captain's shoulders,
put a feathered helmet on his head, and a curious fan into his hand. He spread also at his
feet five or six other valuable cloaks, and exchanged names with him; at the same time four
large hogs, and a quantity of fruits, were brought
by the attendants. After this, a procession of
priests advanced, followed by a long train of men,
leading hogs and carrying vegetables. Kau,
the chief priest, who headed the proeession, and
had been from home with the king, was now,




36          MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. Ir.
for the first time, introduced to Captain Cook.
He brought a piece of red cloth, and after wrapping it round his shoulders offered a small pig
in the usual form.   Kau being then seated
next the king, Kaireekeera and the other priests
began chanting, while Kau    and the chiefs
joined in the responses.  The king and several
of his retinue then went on board with the captain, who arrayed his majesty in a linen shirt,
and girt his own hanger round him. When the
king went on shore, the tabu was removed at
the captain's request; at least so far as to permit the natives to trade with the ships.
The behaviour of the    natives continuing
friendly and inoffensive, the gentlemen of both
ships carried their confidence so far, that they
took frequent excursions into the country, and
would occasionally remain all night. At these
times the boys and girls, at the different villages,
amused them with songs and dances, and all
whom "they met were ready to serve them. On
one oceasion, when a large party from both ships
went several miles into the country, to examine
its productions, Kau sent provisions after them,
and gave orders to the inhabitants to assist them.
The bounty of Teraiobu, also, continued; and
when Captain Clerke, who had been in ill health,
visited him for the first time, he received him very
honourably, and gave him thirty large hogs, with
a vast quantity of fruits and roots.
On the 20th, the natives entertained the crews
of the ships with a boxing match, and other
athletic exercises, in which however they were
much inferior to the Friendly islanders; they




HAP. II.]   SANDWICH ISLANDS.          37
iwere repeated at different times. Captain Cook,
i his turn, entertained them with a display of
Iireworks; at which they were greatly astonished.
'mongst other proofs of the good undertanding kept up between the natives and the;English, it is related that, on the death of a gunner, who had long stood high in the captain's
esteem, the king desired he might be buried in
the marai. The funeral service was attended by.,;Kau and others, in solemn silence; when the?grave was filling up, they threw in a dead pig,: with some cocoa nuts and plantains; and for.'three nights following attended at the grave, sa
'rificing hogs, and chanting hymns and prayers,
':'which continued until daybreak.
As the resources of the country were now be-:;:ginning to be drained, by the vast supplies
required for the ships, the natives made frequent:inquiries about the time of their departure. They
- fancied that the English people had come from a
country where provisions had failed, for the pur-::pose of satisfying their hunger; and gave broad
hints that they had now got pretty well filled;:t stroking the sides of the sailors, whose looks
were much improved during the stay, and tell-:ing them, that if they would return next season,
they should then be feasted liberally. The king's:bounty, however, was not exhausted; for having
summoned his people to bring in their tribute, to
enable him to give a parting offering to Orono,
a public assembly was held, on Wednesday, February 3rd, when the ships were about to
sail; and large quantities of hogs, vegetables,
1E




38         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. II.
and cloth, were brought before the king; together with a great assortment of red and yellow
feathers; and the hatchets and iron-ware which
had been obtained from the British. Teraiobu
selected about a third part of the feathers and
iron-ware for himself, with a few pieces of cloth,
and then presented the rest of the cloth, with all
the hogs and vegetables, to Captain Cook and
Lieutenant King; who were astonished at the
magnitude of the present, as it far exceeded even
what they had received at the Friendly Isles.
Mr. King was supposed to be the captain's son;
and both Teraiobu and Kau, who were warmly
attached to him, begged that he might remain
and live with them.
Early on the following morning the ships
sailed out of the bay. Many natives accompanied them in canoes, in their progress northward;
and the king, as a last proof of regard for
Captain Cook, sent after him a large present of
hogs and vegetables. Koa, who had changed his
name to Britannee, accompanied the captain to a
large bay called Tawaihai. When the ships were
off the bay, on the 6th, a storm arose, which continued for nearlythe whole of three days; to the
imminent peril of the natives sailing near them,
some of whom were saved by the humane exertions
of the seamen. In this storm the foremast of the
Resolution gave way, which made it necessary
to go into some harbour to repair it; and the
adjacent bay, affording no safe anchorage, while
it remained uncertain whether a safe and good
harbour could be found in the island to leeward,




CHAP. II.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


39


Captain Cook determined on returning to Kearakekua, little thinking to what fatal result this
decision would lead.
On returning to the place of their former anchorage, the vessels were repaired, and the tents
and observatory were again set up; the priests
having again tabued the spot, in order to prevent interruption.
Teraiobu paid a friendly visit to Captain Cook
on the 12th; and his nephew Maihamaiha, or
Tamehameha, had previously visited Captain
Cook, and spent a night with his attendants on
board the Discovery; but some of the chiefs
seemed less friendly than before. Parea interfered unkindly in a bargain that was making for
a hog; and, on the 13th, several chiefs and other
natives annoyed the watering party bf the Discovery, and showed some appearances of hostility; on which directions were given to the
guard to load with ball. The natives now began to reassemble in the bay, and crowded the
ships, watching for opportunities to pilfer. One
of them, being detected stealing the armourer's
tongs, from the forge on board the Discovery,
was flogged, and sent out of the ship; yet, in the
afternoon, another snatched the tongs and a
chisel, with which he jumped overboard, and,
swimming to a canoe, was paddled on shore.
Parea, who was then on board the Discovery,
hastened after him to recover the stolen goods.
The thief, however, abandoning his plunder,
fled into the country; and when the master and
a midshipman, who had been despatched after
him in the small cutter, approached the shore,




40         MISSIONARY RECORDS.   [CHAP. IIT
they met some natives in a canoe, bringing the
articles back. The Resolution's pinnace, with
five men, joining them, the master thought his
force sufficient to insist on having the thief surrendered, or the canoe which took him on shore.
The thief being out of reach, the master was proceeding accordingly to seize the canoe, which
was hauled up on the beach, when Parea appeared, and claimed it as his property. Finding
that his claim was disregarded, he seized the officer, and held him by the hair, on which one of
the sailors struck him with an oar; the chief,
quitting the master, then snatched the oar, and
broke it in two across his knee; and presently
after the multitude, resenting the insult offered
to their chief, attacked the British with stones.
The latter, after a short resistance, were obliged
to abandon the pinnace, and make their escape;
the men swimming to the small cutter, the two
officers to a rock near the shore. The natives
would have followed, and killed them; but
Parea interfered, and checked their violence.
The officers begged him to remain until they
got their boats off; but he refused, and left
them. The master was then proceeding towards
the tent for help; but Parea meeting him, constrained him to return; and the chief, finding
the mob plundering the pinnace, beginning to
pull it to pieces, and insulting the midshipman
who remained by it, again dispersed them;
and, having thus saved the boat, desired the
gentlemen to return on board, bringing them
some of the oars which the crowd had seized.
They were glad to escape in safety; and Parea




CHAP. II.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.           41
soon overtook them in his canoe, and eagerly
asked if Orono would kill him for what had
happened.  Being assured to the contrary, he
joined noses, in token of reconciliation, and paddled over to the village of Kowrowa, or Kaavaroa, on the north-west side of the bay.
During the above proceedings, Captain Cook,
having observed that some muskets were fired
after a man from the Discovery, and supposing
that he had taken something of consequence,
had landed with Lieutenant King and a marine,
and pursued the thief, ineffectually, a distance of
two miles. When he returned, and was informed
of what had passed, he felt much uneasiness; and
observed, on going aboard, " I am afraid these
people will oblige me to use some violent measures, for they must not be left to imagine they
have gained an advantage over us."  He immediately ordered all the natives to be turned
out of the ships.  Lieutenant King posted a
double guard at the observatory, where a few
natives were seen to approach during the night;
but they retired when they found themselves observed. Mournful sounds from the adjacent
villages were heard by the guards, and supposed
to be the lamentations of women.
Notwithstanding the vigilance of the ship's
crew, it was found, in the morning of the 14th,
that the Discovery's large cutter, which lay
swamped at the buoy of one of the anchors, had
been stolen by the natives; a theft which they
committed, as was afterwards ascertained, at the
instigation of Parea. When apprized of the robbery, Captain Cook resolved, according to his
E2




42         MISSIONARY RECORDS.   [CRAP. II,
usual plan, to endeavour to get the king on
board, with a view to ensure the restoration of
the cutter; and, at the same time, gave orders
that none of the canoes in the bay should be allowed to depart, that he might make reprisals on
them if necessary.
About seven o'clock, having sent Lieutenant King to take charge of the party at the
tents, and try to quiet the minds of the natives
there, he left the ship, with Lieutenant Philips and nine marines, in the pinnace; the crew
of which were also armed, under the command
of Mr. Roberts. Foreseeing that danger might
arise, he took the precaution to order Lieutenant
Williamson, who commanded in the launch, to
leave the station which he occupied at the northwest point of the bay, and come to support the
pinnace. On his landing at Kaavaroa with the
marines, the captain was received with the customary honours, the natives prostrating themselves before him. He wag joined by Kaneena,
his brother Kuourua, and other chiefs, who
kept the crowd in order, and inquired if he
wanted hogs, or other provisions. The king's
sons, two boys, who had often been his guests in
the Resolution, also joined him. When he said
that he wanted Teraiobu, he was conducted to
his house; and the king, having been awakened
from his sleep, came forth to meet him, and
readily accepted his invitation to go on board.
He accordingly went with the captain towards
the water side, and his boys got to the pinnace,
into which the youngest, Keoua, presently entered; but, when the king was within about




',; CHAP. II.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.        43
thirty yards of the water, his people, conscious
of what had been done, crowded around to detain him. His wife, Kanona, besought him
with tears not to go on board, and two chiefs
taking hold of him, made him sit down. The
captain, unwilling to give up his point, urged
him to proceed; but the natives, alarmed at the
firing of guns and musketry in the bay, by those
who were detaining the canoes, crowed more
closely around; and Lieutenant Philips, finding
his men pressed closely together in the crowd,
led them out, with the captain's consent, the natives opening a passage for them, and drew them
up in a line along the rocks, close to the water's
edge. The king, who was seated beside a double
canoe, which had been hauled up, was again
urged to rise, and accompany his friend on board;
but the chiefs insisted on his staying; upon
which the captain relinquished the attempt, observing to Mr. Philips, that he could not take
the king on board by force, without the risk of
killing a number of the inhabitants.
Hitherto the person of the navigator appeared
to be in no danger; but when he was quitting
Teraiobu, and walking towards the boats, a serious tumult arose amongst the crowd. A man,
arriving in great haste from the other side of
the bay, exclaimed, "It is war!" and informed
the people that Kareemu, a chief, had been shot
by one of the Discovery's boats.  Upon this,
the arming of the natives, which had previously
begun, became general, the women and children
were sent off and the men proceeded to acts of
violence and hostility. The captain had been




44         MISSIONARY RECORDS.   [CHAP. II.
annoyed by an old priest, who repeatedly offered
him a cocoa-nut, with loud singing and noise:
and now old Koa approached with a pahoa, or
dagger, under his cloak. Mr. Philips proposed
to shoot him, but the captain forbidding it, he
only struck him with his piece, and made him
retire. A man now seized the sergeant's musket, when a blow from the lieutenant made him
quit his hold. Another native, throwing a stone
at the captain, the latter, who carried a piece
with two barrels, fired one at him, loaded with
small shot.  The fellow, wearing a thick mat,
was scarcely hurt, and brandished his spear to
dart it at Captain Cook, who, being still unwilling to take his life, knocked him down with
his piece, instead of firing with ball. At this
time Mr. Roberts, not aware of the impending
danger, suffered Keoua to be put on shore;
whereas, the detention of the prince might have
operated powerfully in restraining the hostility
of the islanders. And now, a man, behind a
double canoe, being seen in the act of darting
his spear at the captain, the latter fired his other
barrel, loaded with ball, and killed another who
was active in the tumult, while the man who
had aimed at him was presently shot by the
sergeant. Upon this the natives gave back a
little; but, being pushed on by those behind, returned to the charge, and poured a volley of
stones amongst the marines, who, without waiting for orders, returned it with a discharge of
musketry, while the seamen in the boats began
also to fire. At this Captain Cook expressed his
astonishment, and, waving his hand, called to
4




CHAP. II.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.          4:5
the boats to cease firing, and to pull in. His
voice, on account of the noise and confusion,
was indistinctly heard; and while the pinnace
came close in, Lieutenant Williamson, with the
men in the launch, through some strange mistake or neglect, moved farther off, at the very
moment when their support might have saved
their brave commander and the marines. The
natives now rushed on with dreadful yells, and
four of the marines, who had no time to reload,
fell a sacrifice to their fury; four others were
wounded, including Lieutenant Philips, who
saved his life by shooting his antagonist, and
then, with the surviving marines, got into the
pinnace. The captain, now left alone on the rock,
was making for the pinnace, when a chief, named
Karimano, followed him, and, after some hesitation, struck him on the back of the head wjih a
large club, and then precipitately retreated.
Stunned by the blow, the captain staggered a
few paces, fell on his hand and one knee, and
then dropped his musket. As he was rising, a
native, called Nooah, stabbed him in the back of
the neck with an iron dagger, and he fell into
the sea, which, at that spot, was about kneedeep.  Here the natives, crowding upon him,
endeavoured to keep him under; but, struggling
powerfully with them, he got his head up, and
cast a look towards the pinnace, which was only
five or six yards off, yet was unable to save him.
The natives again pressed him down in deeper
water; he was able, however, to get his
head up once more, and, turning to the rock,
tried to cling to it, when another blow with a




46         MISSIONARY RECORDS.   [CHAP. II.
club at once deprived him of life. They then
dragged his senseless body upon the rocks, and,
snatching the dagger from each other's hands,
showed a savage eagerness to have a share in
his destruction. This fatal event occurred about
eight o'clock in the morning, only one hour
after he had landed.
"Such," observes his biographer, "was the lamentable end of the most illustrious of navigators.
It is painful to think, that he, who had done so
much to preserve the lives and increase the comforts of the islanders of the Pacific, should thus
have fallen by their hands; and that some of the
improved implements with which he furnished
them, should have been employed in destroying
him. Keneena had purchased a large dagger for
a hog, only the day before; and this dagger was
probably used in the bloody tragedy. It is still
more melancholy to reflect, that a commander,
who had made it his constant study to promote
the welfare of his officers and crew, should have
been deserted by some of them in the hour of
peril, and left to perish before their eyes by the
hands of barbarians, when a vigorous effort on
their part might, perhaps, have saved him.
Even the recovery of his lifeless body was an
object worth contending for; and five young
midshipmen, who arrived in a small boat at the
close of the fatal business, saw the beach almost
entirely deserted by the natives, who had been
dispersed by the fire of the boats, and some shots
from the Resolution, so that the body might have
been recovered without much difficulty; yet the
lieutenant returned on board without making




CHAP. II.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


47


the attempt. Whether the late order for substituting beer for spirits, had somewhat alienated
the affections of the seamen from their otherwise
beloved captain; or, whether they were seized
with a temporary panic, confusion, or infatuation, amidst scenes so appalling, the fatal result
will ever be remembered with the most poignant
grief."
When the first paroxysms of the natives' rage
had subsided, their feelings immediately became
those of lamentation for the captain's end. They
paid his remains all those honours which they
were accustomed to show to their deceased chiefs.
His body was taken from the beach, and deposited in a cave above the village, from whence it
was removed to an adjacent height, and there
cut in pieces, and the flesh, after being separated
from the bones, burnt. The bones were preserved
as the objects of veneration. This kind of funeral, however barbarous in our view, was regarded in the islands as the most honourable.
The spot where the body was burnt, is a small
inclosure, about fifteen feet square, with a kind of
raised hearth in the midst, where fragments of
charcoal still remain.
It will naturally be supposed, that the fatal result of the sudden dispute, in which the captain
had become embroiled with the natives, must have
somewhat shaken their opinion of his divinity.
When, in the attack made upon him, they saw
his blood running, and heard his groans, they
said, "No, this is not Rono."  Some, however,
after his death, still supposed him to be Rono,
and expected he would appear again. Hence it




48          MISSIONARY RECORDS.    [CHAP. II.
was, that some of his bones, the ribs and breastbone, were considered sacred as part of Rono, and
deposited in a leiau (temple) dedicated to Rono,
on the opposite side of the island. Religious homage was there paid to them, and from thence
they were annually carried in procession to several
other temples, or borne by the priests round the
island, to collect the offerings of the people for the
support of the god Rono. The bones were preserved in a small basket of wicker-work, completely covered over with red feathers; which, in
those days, were considered to be the most valuable articles the natives possessed.
There are a number of persons at Kaavaroa,
and other places in the islands, who either were
present themselves at the unhappy dispute which
terminated the valuable life of Captain Cook,
or who, from  their connexion with those who
were, are well acquainted with the particulars of
that event. With many of these the missionaries
have frequently conversed; and though their
narratives diffir in a few smaller points, they all
agree in the main facts with the account published
by Captain King, his successor.
The foreigner," say they,    'was not to
blame; for, in the first instance, our people stole
his boat, and he, in order to recover it, designed
to take our king on board his ship, and detain
him there till it should be restored.  Kapena
Kuke' and Teraiobu, our king, were walking together towards the shore, when our people, conscious of what had been done, thronged round
e Captain Cook's name is thus pronounced by the. natives,




'CHAP. II.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


49


the king, and objected to his going any further.
His wife also joined her entreaties that he would; not go on board the ships. While he was hesi-: tating, a man came running from the other side
of the bay, entered the crowd almost breathless,
and exclaimed, It is war; the foreigners have
commenced hostilities, have fired on a canoe,
and killed a chief.' This enraged some of our
people, and alarmed the chiefs, as they feared
Captain Cook would kill the king.  The people armed themselves with stones, clubs, and
spears. All the chiefs did the same. The king
sat down.  The captain seemed agitated, and
was walking towards his boat, when one of our
men attacked him with a spear: he turned, and,
with his double-barrelled gun, shot the man who
struck him.  Some of our people then threw
stones at him, which being seen by his men, they
fired upon us. Captain Cook then endeavoured
to stop his men from firing, but could not, from
the noise and tumult. He was turning again to
speak to us, when he was stabbed in the back with
a pahoa; a spear was at the same time driven
through his body; he fell into the water, and
spoke no more. After he was dead, we all
wailed. His bones were separated, the flesh
was scraped off and burnt, as was the practice
with regard to our own chiefs when they died.
We thought he was the god Rono, worshipped
him as such, and, after his death, reverenced his
bones."
Many of the chiefs frequently express the sorrow they feel whenever they think of the captain; and even the common people usually speak
v




50         MISSIONARY RECORDS.    [CHAP. II.
of these facts with apparent regret. Yet they
exonerate the king Teraiobu from all blame, as
nothing was done by his orders.  Karaimoku,
and several other chiefs, were once with one ofthe
missionaries, looking over the plates in the folio
edition of Cook's Voyages: they were greatly
affected by the print which represents his death,
and inquired the names of those who were slain
on that occasion.  Karaimoku more than once
wiped the tears from his eyes, while conversing
on the topic: he said, he recollected Captain
Cook's visit, though he was at Maui at the time
of his death. More than once, when conversing
with the missionaries on the length of time the
mission had been established in the Society
Islands, others have said, '; Why did you not
come here sooner? Was it because we killed
Captain Cook?"
The natives have sometimes been asked, what
inducement they had to steal the boat, when
they possessed so many canoes of their own.
They have generally answered, that they did not
take it to transport themselves from one island to
another, for their own canoes were more convenient, and they knew better how to manage
them; but because they saw it was not sewed
together, but fastened with nails.  These they
wanted, therefore they stole the boat, and broke
it to pieces the next day, converting the
nails thus obtained into fish-hooks.  There is
every reason to believe that this was their principal, if not only object in committing the depredation.  They prize nails very highly; and, though it is not known that they ever went so




<CIHAP. II.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.          51
far in their endeavours to obtain an abundant
supply of them as the Society Islanders, who actually planted them in the ground, hoping they
would grow like potatoes, or any other vegetable; yet, such is the value they still set upon
them, that the fishermen would rather receive a
wrought nail, to make of it a fish-hook according to their own taste, than the best Englishmade fish-hook which could be given them.
Few intelligent visitors leave Hawaii without
making a pilgrimage to the spot where Captain
Cook was killed. The missionaries have often
visited it, and, though several natives have been
their guides, on different occasions, they have invariably conducted them to the same place. A
number of cocoa-nut trees grow near the shore,
and there are perforations through two of them,
which the natives say were produced by the balls
fired from the boats, on the occasion of his
death.
It is scarcely possible to walk over these rocks
without emotions of melancholy interest. The
mind invariably reverts to the period of their
discovery, the satisfaction of the visitors, the
surprise of the natives, the worship they paid to
their discoverer, and the fatal catastrophe which
here terminated his days; and, although in every
event we acknowledge an overruling Providence,
we cannot but lament the untimely end of a man,
whose discoveries contributed so much to the advancement of science, introduced us to an acquaintance with our antipodes, and opened a new
field of speculation and enterprise for the philosopher, the merchant, and the missionary. In




52         MISSIONARY RECORDS.   [CHAP. II,
closing our notice of the last stage of his very
eventful career, it may not be amiss to mention,
that, in the village where the murderous affray
took place, a missionary station has been since
formed; that, not far from the very spot where
the captain fell, a school has been opened, and
a house erected for Christian worship; and that
the inhabitants of the neighbourhood, in their intelligence, cleanliness, order, industry, and good
conduct, are exhibiting, in a most satisfactory
manner, the benign influence of that faith which
alone can sanctify and save.
From the time of the death of Captain Cook,
and the final departure of the Resolution and
Discovery, the Sandwich Islands were unvisited
by any foreign ships, until 1786, when Captains
Dixon and Portlock, in a trading voyage to the
north-west coast, for furs and sea-otter skins, anchored, and procured refreshments in the island
of Oahu. The island of Maui was visited about
the same time, by the unfortunate La Perouse.
After this the islands were frequently visited by
vessels engaged in the fur trade. Captain Douglass of the Iphigenia, and Captain Metcalf of
the Eleanor, an American sloop, were nearly
cut off by the turbulent chiefs, who were desirous to procure the guns and ammunition belonging to these vessels, to aid them in carrying their
purposes of conquest into effect. The son of
the latter, a youth of sixteen, who commanded a
schooner, called the Fair American, which accompanied the Eleanor from Canton, when close
in with the land off Mouna Huararai, was becalmed; the natives thronged on board, threw




CHAP. II.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.            53
young Metcalf overboard, seized and plundered
the vessel, and murdered all the crew, except
the mate, whose name was Isaac Davis. He
resided many years with the king Tamehameha,
who very severely censured the chief under
whose direction this outrage had been committed. A seaman, whose name is Young, belonging to the Eleanor, who was on shore at the
time, was prevented from gaining his vessel, but
was kindly treated by the king, and is still living
at Towaihae.
In the years 1792 and 1793, Captain Vancouver, while engaged in a voyage of discovery in the
North Pacific, spent several months at the Sandwich Islands; and, notwithstanding the melancholy catastrophe which had terminated the life
of Captain Cook, whom he had accompanied,
and the treacherous designs of the warlike and
ambitious chiefs towards several of his predecessors, he met with the most friendly treatment
from all parties, and received the strongest expressions of confidence from Tamehameha, sovereign of the whole group, who had been wounded in the skirmish that followed the death of
their discoverer; but who had ever lamented,
with deepest regret, that melancholy event. He
alone had prevented the murderous intentions of
his chieftains towards former vessels from being
carried into effect; and it was his uniform endeavour to show every mark of friendship to
those who visited his dominions. His attachment to the English induced him, during the
stay of Captain Vancouver, to cede the island o.
r2




54          MISSIONARY RECORDS.   [CHAP. II.
Hawaii to the British crown, and to place himself and his dominions under British protection;
an act which was repeated by his son, the late
king, on his accession to the sovereignty of all
the islands.
The natives received many advantages from
the visit of Captain Vancouver: a breed of cattle,
and a variety of useful seeds were given them
by him.    Generous and disinterested in his
whole behaviour, he secured their friendship and
attachment; and many still retain grateful recollections of his visit.
After his departure, the islands were seldom
resorted to, except by traders from the United
States of America; who, having discovered
among them the sandal wood, conveyed large
quantities of it to Canton, where it was regularly
purchased by the Chinese, manufactured into
incense, and burned in their idol temples.  Subsequently, when the.South Sea whalers began to
fish in the North Pacific, the Sandwich Islands
afforded a convenient rendezvous for refitting, and
procuring refreshments during their protracted
voyages; -particularly since they found the sperm
whale on the coast of Japan, where, of late
years, the greater part of their cargoes have
been procured.




CHAP. Il.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


CHAPTER       II.
Conquest of Mcaui and Oahu, by Tamehameha —
Frequent visits of shipping to the islands-Notices
of Obukahaia, and George Taumuarii, son of the
king of Tauai-Appointment of a mission to the
Sandwich Islands-State of the islands on the
arrival of the mission-Difficulties removed by the
previous abolition of the tabu system and idol worship-First view of the islands-Appearance of
the country-Intercourse with the people-First
sabbath among the islands- Visit to the ruins of a
temple-Introduction to the king and chiefs —Native amusements-Landing of part of the missionaries on Hawaii-Establishment of the mission
at Oahu-Description of native houses-Mission
premises-Domestic accommodations-R-eturn of
Prince George to his father- The king's reception
of his son-Appointment of a mission to, TauaiFirst letter from the missionaries to the Missionary
Society-Letters from the king and queen of Tauai
-General state of the mission at the time the first
communications were forwarded to America.
AT the time of their discovery, the four principal islands, Hawaii, Maui, Oahu, and Tauai
were governed by separate and independent
kings; but, within the ten years preceding Vancouver's visit, Tamehameha, originally a chief of
inferior rank, possessing only one or two districts in Hawaii, a man of ambitious spirit, and
great power both of body and mind, had, by his
talent and prowess, not only secured to himself
the sovereignty of his native island, but had
commenced pushing his conquests to the islands




06         MISSIONARY RECORDS.    [CHAP. III."
of Maui and Oahu.     During the sanguinary
conflicts attending these schemes of political aggrandisement, some of the chiefs, apprized of the
importance of guns and fire-arms in a time of warfare; and, especially, of the advantages which
would accrue from the possession of a foreign
vessel, had made treacherous and violent attacks
upon several traders; and, in one instance,
as already stated, were unhappily successful in
seizing an American schooner, and in putting
her crew to death.
Tamehameha, too wise not to perceive the bad
policy of every such abuse of the friendly disposition of visitors, adopted a course directly opposite; and, by studious and unwearied kindness
and attention to foreigners,.endeavoured to secure
their confidence and good will. This policy, in
an especial manner, characterised his treatment
of Vancouver; and, in 1794, he formally ceded
to this commander, as the representative of the
British nation, the island of Hawaii, in expression of his respect for that government, and a
desire to enjoy the benefit of its protection. In
return, Vancouver aided this chieftain in building
a small vessel, which was of essential service to
him in his future expeditions: and, in the course
of the succeeding year, by the death, in battle, of
the king of Oahu, Tamehameha became the uncontrolled master of the windward islands. Intimidated by his success and seemingly invincible
power, the king of Tauai and Maui despatched
an embassy to him on this event, with formal
proposals to render the islands which he governed tributary; and thus the supreme govern



CHAP. III.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.           57
ment of the whole group became established in
the hands of the conqueror.
This great political change, with the known
kindness of the king to foreigners, opened the
way to an increasing intercourse of the islanders
with both American and European nations.
The number of vessels, especially of American
merchantmen, touching at the Sandwich Islands,
soon became very considerable; and the discovery of the protected and excellent harbour of
Honoruru, in the island of Oahu, which had
escaped the vigilant search of Vancouver, in his
survey of the coast, by supplying ships in general, traversing the North Pacific, with a place
of resort for undergoing repairs, and obtaining
water and other refreshments, still further enlarged the intercourse.
Sandal wood, an article of value in the Chinese market, was discovered in the mountains of
the different islands, and soon became the means,
on the part of Tamehameha, of extensive commerce with foreigners.  The articles of barter
first given in exchange by traders were of the
rudest kind; such as pieces of iron hoop, nails,
coarse cloth, etc.: to these afterwards, knives,
hatchets and axes, guns, muskets, and ammunition, were added; and, eventually, whole cargoes of rich American and Chinese goods, and
vessels of various sizes, from small schooners to
brigs of upwards of one hundred tons burden.
Early in the present century, the natives began occasionally to embark on foreign vessels as
seamen; and in this manner several made their
way to the United States.  Of this number was
Obukahaia, an individual whose wanderings were




58         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. III.
made, in the wise providence of God, to result
in consequences of unspeakable importance, both
to himself and to his nation.
Obukahaia reached the city of New York in
the year 1809, and shortly afterwards became
an inmate of the family of the commander of the
ship in which he had made the voyage. He
possessed an observing and inquisitive mind;
and the wide contrast, which soon arrested his
attention, between the civilized and Christian
people among whom he was now residing, and
the ignorant and degraded idolaters of his own
nation, deeply impressed him. Having learned
the design of Yale College, he frequently visited
the grounds of that institution; and was, at
length, discovered weeping at the entrance of
one of the buildings. The cause of his tears was
ascertained to be a sense of his own ignorance,
and an anxious desire for instruction. A gentleman of intelligence and piety immediately received him as a private pupil. He made rapid
advances in knowledge, became a sincere convert
to Christianity, and, fired with zeal for the salvation of his countrymen, began to qualify himself to return to his native islands, for the purpose of making known the existence of the only
true God, and the redemption that is in Jesus
Christ.
The character of Obukahaia was early reported
to the American Board of Commissioners for
Foreign Missions, a society formed, in the year
1810, for the propagation of the gospel among
the heathen. This information led to the establishment of a school at Cornwall, Connecticut,
which was called "The Foreign Mission School;"




i:'CHAP. III.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.          59
and the object contemplated by which was the
education of pagan youth found on American
territory, preparatory to their being returned, if
s:;,uitable, as teachers to their respective countries.
Here Obukahaia was placed. Other Sandwich
Islanders were afterwards found, and entered on
the same foundation.
Among them was a young chief, George Tamnoree, son of Taumuarii, the king of Tauai.
Eight or ten years previously, his father had
sent him, when only nine years old, to America,
to be educated. The sea captain who had the
charge of him, had been provided by the king
with the means of meeting the necessary expenditures; but the captain dying suddenly within
the year of his arrival, these funds were lost in
the wreck of his own fortune. George, who
had been placed at a school, having been suffered
to wander from it, had enlisted in the naval service of the United States. On his discharge, at
the close of the war, he was discovered in the
navy yard at Charlestown, Massachusetts, identified as the son of Taumuarii, and removed to
Cornwall for education.
To the deep regret of his patrons, Obukahaia
died before completing his course of instruction,
in February, 1818.  The event was, at first,
thought a difficulty in the way of the speedy introduction of Christianity to his native shores;
but, in the overruling providence of God, so great
and beneficial an excitement did it occasion in
the American churches, as rather to expedite
than otherwise, the plan then in agitation, of
sending a mission there.




60         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. III.
In the autumn of 1819, a company of missionaries, under the patronage of the American
Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions,
embarked from the city of Boston for the Sandwich Islands, in the Thaddeus, commanded by
Captain Blanchard. It consisted of the Rev.
Messrs. Bingham and Thurston, ordained ministers of the gospel; Messrs. Ruggles and
Whitney, catechists and teachers; Dr. Holman,
a physician; Mr. Loomis, a printer; Mr. Chamberlain, an agriculturist; all married men: and
also four Sandwich Islanders, John Honorii,
Thomas Hopu, William Tenui, and George Taumuarii. George was sent back to his father, by
the Missionary Society, as a passenger only,
without any official connexion with the mission
family.
The affecting deatn of Captain Cook, and of
the other foreigners, who, since his time, had
been massacred at the Sandwich Islands, had
deeply impressed the public mind with a belief,
that the islanders were more barbarous and sanguinary than  even the inhabitants of other
groups in the Pacific.  The unvarying testimony of voyagers who had visited them, when
consulted in reference to the contemplated mission, had been: ' The natives are too much addicted to their pagan customs ever to give them
up. They will never abandon their sacrifices and
tabus. The missionaries may attempt to convert them, but they can never succeed; they will
be robbed and driven away, even if they escape
violence and death."
It was with just reason, therefore, that the




CHAP. III.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.           61
society, under whose auspices this enterprise had
been projected, waited with deep solicitude for
the tidings of the arrival of the missionary com-!pany at their destination, and of the character of
their reception by the people. Seventeen months
elapsed before this anxiously desired period came.
But, though the suspense was long, it was, at
length, broken by sounds, which vibrated joyfully
on the ears of many who looked for the coming
of the kingdom of God.
The missionaries had not only made the islands
in safety, but the first words of intelligence which
reached their vessel on approaching them, was
the astonishing, and, to them, overwhelming exclamation:-" The gods of Hawaii are no more!
Tamehameha is dead! Rihoriho is king. The
tabu is abolished, and the temples and idols are
'destroyed!"
The eldest son of the conqueror of Hawaii had
ascended the throne, and the very opening of
his reign had been marked by a measure which
is without a parallel in the history of the world.
A pagan king, unbidden, and uninstructed, had,
in a day, cast off all the gods of his people;
and, by a single act of his will, had overthrown
a superstition, which for ages had held a degraded race in servile bondage.
The causes which led Rihoriho to a determination so bold and so important, are not fully
known. They, probably, were a conviction of the
falsity of idolatry, derived from an intercourse
with foreigners, and from an observation of the
indifference or contempt they manifested for the
gods and sacrifices of his nation; a knowledge




62         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. III.
of the destruction of the idols at the Society
Islands, a people known to him to be altogether
like his own; and strong attachment for his
queens, who were restricted in their privileges
and enjoyments by the tabu.
To the system of tabu we have already had
partial occasion to advert, in our brief narrative
of the visit of Captain Cook to the islands. It
was a form of idolatry peculiar to the Polynesian
tribes. The word has generally been considered
by foreigners as synonymous with the English
word, prohibition; but its literal and peculiar
meaning implies a consecration.  Thus, the
priests, the king, and the chiefs, all of whom
claimed descent from the gods, were tabu as well
as the temples. So, again, an animal, a cluster
of fruit, or other article set apart for sacrifice;
as also, a day, week, or month, appropriated to
the worship of the gods, was tabu.
The tabu varied greatly, both in extent and
duration. Sometimes a single tree, or a single
animal only, would be made tabu; and, at
others, a whole grove or herd. Sometimes a
single house, or piece of land, or fishing ground;
at others, a whole district, or even island. Sometimes the tabu would be limited to a day; at
others, it would continue for weeks and months.
Tabu of time varied in the degree of rigour with
which they were to be observed; sometimes requiring only a cessation from ordinary work and
amusement; at others, an entire seclusion, when
to be seen abroad was death. Every fire, too, must
then be extinguished; every sound, even to the
crowing of a cock or barking of a dog, prevent



CHAP. II.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.            63
ed; and the silence and desolation of death be
made to reign throughout the prescribed limits.
But though, in such particulars as these, the
tabu was various in its features and forms,
there were points in it which were general and
unalterable. One of these was the tabu of all
the best kinds of food for the use of the men.
Idolatry has always degraded the female sex;
and such was its influence among the Sandwich
Islands. By a regulation of the tabu, women
were excluded from the use of hogs, fowls, cocoa
nut, bananas, from several kinds of fish, etc., and
even from the houses of the men. A woman
was not permitted to enter the habitation even of
her father or husband, nor to eat in company
with them. It was accordingly this latter point,
an open breach of which the king determined
to make the signal for the abolition of the whole,
and for the downfall of idolatry.
Having secretly consulted the high priest and
principal chiefs on the subject, and gained their
consent and co-operation, he made a great entertainment, in the month of November, 1819, to
which all the foreign traders, mercantile agents,
and residents then at the islands, were invited, together with a large company of chiefs. Two long
tables, one for males, and the other for females, in
conformity to the tabu, were spread in an open
place, around which a great concourse of the natives assembled. After the food was served up, and
all the company had taken their seats, the king,
evidently much agitated, arose with a dish of the
food denied to females in his hand, and walking
first round the table of the men, as if to see that




64         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. III.
all were properly provided, hastily turned to
that of the women, and seating himself between
two of his queens, began to eat with them from
the dish he had carried. At this, the multitude,
astonished, burst into the exclamation, " Ai noa!
Ai noa! " (ai food, noa common, or general; in
contradistinction to ai tabu, food sacred.) The
high priest then, as had been concerted, seized a
firebrand, and rushed to an adjoining temple;
which he himself immediately set fire to. Messengers were then instantly despatched in all directions to complete a similar destruction; and,
in a few days, every heathen temple in the group
was mouldering in ashes, whilst such idols as
had not shared the same fate, were either cast
useless on the beach, or reserved merely as objects of curiosity.
That it was the pleasure of the king thus to
cast off the tabu, and to abolish idolatry, seemed
sufficient to satisfy the minds of the people. One
ambitious young man, indeed, in the following
year, attempted to make the revolution the means
of exciting the natives to rebellion; but in this
he was unsuccessful, his party being defeated, and
himself and wife slain in battle.
On a review of the whole procedure, it is impossible not to recognise the hand of Him who
" worketh all things after the counsel of his own
will;" who can accomplish his purposes of mercy
either with or without human instrumentality;
and who can use even " the things which are
not, to bring to nought things which are."  The
missionaries had naturally expected that their
landing would be opposed by the institution of




CHAP. III.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.          65
a system, which, however degrading in its influence, had still exercised a more than human
sway over the minds of its adherents, and of
which the numerous priests would doubtless perceive their craft endangered, as soon as the paramount claims of the true God to exclusive
homage and obedience should be proclaimed.
Instead of this, they found the priests no longer
existing as a distinct body, and the whole nation
just emancipated from their own dreary superstition, and without religion, prepared, and waiting to receive the gospel of Christ.
Still it was not without considerable difficulty
that the missionaries were able to carry on their
efforts for the instruction and evangelization of
the natives, or even to effect a settlement in
the islands; and as every step in the commencement of such undertakings possesses a peculiar
interest, from its relation to the success of the
whole, somewhat more minuteness of detail may
be pardoned in this part of our narrative, than
will be required in the subsequent history of the
mission.
It was early in the morning of the 30th of
March, 1820, that the cloud-capped summits of
Mouna Kea first met the view of the voyagers
on board the Thaddeus, to the no small joy of
all. In coasting along the northern part of the
island, the missionaries had an opportunity of
contemplating, with deep interest, the numerous
habitations, cultivated fields, trees, etc. of the
immortal beings whose earthly home they had
come to. Hopu, whose anxiety could scarcely
be less than theirs, discovered and designated the
2




66         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. III.
little valley near the beach where he was born.
Hie and his three countrymen were greatly amimated with the sight of their native shores, and
pointed out to their companions many objects
worthy of their observation, amongst which, near
the northern extremity of the island, were the
walls of an ancient temple, where sacrifices had
long been offered to demons.
On doubling the northern extremity of Hawaii,
the lofty heights of Moui arose on the right;
and, as no canoes approached the vessel, it was
supposed to be a season of special tabu, and that
all the people were engaged in its observance.
Captain Blanchard, therefore, concluded to send
a boat for the purpose of making inquiries respecting the king, and the state of the islands;
and it was on the return of this boat, in which
Thomas Hopu and John Honorii had proceeded
to the shore, that the wonderful tidings of the abolition of idol worship reached the missionaries.
This cheering intelligence was confirmed by a
visit of Mr. Ruggles, accompanied by Thomas
Hopu and George Taumuarii, to the island, on
which occasion they were kindly received. By
them, the widows of the late king sent to the
missionary party a present of fresh fish, cocoa
nuts, sweet potatoes, bananas, sugar-cane, bread
fruit, etc., expressing much satisfaction that they
had come to teach them that which was good.
In the course of the day, a number of the natives,
in their canoes, visited the ship, and when asked
whether they had ever heard anything about the
true God, they replied that Rihoriho, the king,
had heard of the great God of white men, and




CHAP. III.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.


67


had spoken of him; and that all the chiefs but
one had agreed to destroy their idols.
On the 1st of April, the missionaries being
in Towaihai Bay, near the residence of Karaimoku
he and his wife, with two widows of Tamehameha,
decently dressed, and attended by a numerous
train of men and women, came on board the brig;
having sent before them a present to the captain,
of three hogs, and as many large bundles of
sweet potatoes.  They were introduced to the
members of the mission family individually, and
the mutual salutation of shaking hands, with the
usual compliment, " Aloha," passed pleasantly
round. When the table was prepared, they sat
down to dine with their new friends, and behaved with much decorum. From what had been
heard and seen of the natives, the appearance of
this noble chief proved to be more interesting
than could have been expected. His dress was
a neat white dimity jacket, black silk vest, nankeen pantaloons, white cotton stockings, shoes,
plaid cravat, and a neat English hat. He sometimes, however, laid these aside for the simple
native maro round the waist, resembling the
dress of the Hindoos. He showed peculiar fondness for the children of Mr. Chamberlain; and
when the missionaries explained to him their object in visiting the islands, and their desire to
become settled residents in them, as teachers of
Christian truth, he listened with attention, saying he must see the king, and they must consult
together about it.  He promised to let them
know the result of the deliberation; and, as a




68         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. III
token of friendship, presented to Mr. Binglham
a curiously wrought spear.
On the first sabbath spent in the islands, the
missionaries expecting soon to leave Towaihai
Bay, and to have no other opportunity of examining its eligibleness as a station for preaching and schools, Mr. Bingham, accompanied
the captain early to the shore, called on the chief
Karaimoku, and with him visited the most cele.
brated heiau, or temple, of the islands. It stands
on the brow of a hill, a little retired from the
beach, fronting the seashore, and was built by
Tamehameha, who himself laid the corner stone.
It consisted of a solid wall, about ten feet tiick
at the base, and five at the top, and twenty feet
in height on three sides of the parallelogram,
which was about one hundred and twenty feet in
breadth, and two hundred and forty in length.
In front the wall was of trifling elevation, but
there were four or five large inclosures, all on
the declivity of the hill. These used to furnish
convenient places for multitudes of worshippers,
who remained in them, while the priest was within,
offering his prayers and sacrifices of abomination.
Within this inclosure were the ruins of several
houses which had been burnt to the ground, the
ashes of various wooden gods, the remains of
cocoa nuts and other similar offerings, and the
ashes and partially burnt bones of many human
victims. At the foot of the hill was a similar
inclosure, two hundred and eighty feet in length,
and fifty in breadth, which had been used for the
sacrifice of various beasts, fish, fruits, etc. The




CHAP. II.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.


69


walls and areas of these open buildings, once tabued and sacred, now open and free to every foot,
were fast tumbling into ruins.
About ten o'clock, the chief, Karaimoku, and
some other influential inhabitants of the island,
arrived. The chief first went on board, dressed
in the manner, and appearing with the dignity
of an American gentleman. He was introduced
to the missionaries, with whom he shook hands
in the most cordial manner. He then turned to
the ladies, while yet at a distance, bowed to them
respectfully, and then advancing nearer, presented
to each his hand. Four women followed, two
of them queens and widows of the late Tamehameha, and two of them wives of Karaimoku.
They each very respectfully presented the ladies
with their left hand, and took their seats beside
them.   The first queen, a woman of gigantic
stature, appeared in a calico gown; but, after a
little time had elapsed, it was thrown off, and
her remaining dress consisted of a striped gingham shirt, with ten thicknesses of native cloth
wound around her: the other queen, who was
nearly as large, had on a velvet gown, ornamented round the bottom with gold lace, a beautiful wreath of yellow feathers around her head,
two strings of beads on her neck, and two rings
on her finger: one of the other women had on
a white shirt, some native cloth of most beautiful
colours wound round her person, and a yellow
wreath upon her head; while the last had on a
rich looking gown, partly of silk. They had elegant fly brushes made of feathers, with handles
of whalebone and turtle-shell, composed of many




70         MISSIONARY RECORDS.    [CHAP. III.
hundred pieces; each individual had scars on
their faces, the marks of the tortures they had
inflicted upon themselves on occasions of death
amongst their friends. It was not long before
the party grew tired of their seats, and one of
them seating herself more comfortably on the
floor, mattresses were brought, on which they
reclined in their own way, and in this manner
dined. The rich dresses described as worn by
them, were part of a large and valuable stock of
articles of this description amassed by the king
Tamehameha and his chiefs, in trading with
Europeans and Americans. Many of the most
valuable were received as presents from sea captains, who obtained cargoes of sandal wood at the
islands. In the store warehouses of Tamehameha
were laid up also many specimens of elegant
broad cloth, silk, military dresses, etc., besides
common articles of hardware, and various other
things.
In the afternoon, there being on board a numerous company of natives, including chiefs, the
solemn duties of public worship were attended to
on the deck of the vessel, and prayers and praises
offered to the God of Zion.    Mr. Bingham
preachedfrom Isaiah, "The isles shall wait for his
law." The topics of the discourse were the character of the Lawgiver, of the law waited for,
of those who wait for it; the evidence that these
iles do now wait for it; and the consequences of
receiving it. Though most of the islanders could
not at that time understand the precepts of the
law of Christ, yet they listened with much attention, and were pleased with the singing and the




iHAP. III.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.           71
order of worship. Seldom had the missionaries
attended on the duties of the sanctuary, when the
theme and the occasion had excited more hallowed
and delightful feelings.
In the evening, the native party having spread
their portable mats and mantles on the detk, laid
themselves peacefully down to sleep, with the sky
for a canopy. It was the prayer of their friends,
that the Watchman of Israel might keep them,
and ultimately bring them to his heavenly rest.
It was not till the 4th of April, that the missionaries, having reached the vicinity of the royal
residence, were able to put themselves in personal
communication with the king. They thus describe the circumstances of their first interview
with him:- At ten o'clock this morning, we
came to anchor in Kairua Bay, about one mile
from the king's dwellings. Karaimoku, who still
appears to be friendly to our cause, being sent
for by Rihoriho, went on shore; and soon after
Messrs. Bingham and Thurston, and Thomas
Hopu, accompanied by Captain Blanchard, followed. As we drew near the shore, we saw the
king bathing in the surf, in company with others.
Hewas distinguishedby ornaments of beads on his
neck. As we landed, five or six hundred natives,
of different ages, and both sexes, swarmed around
us; and, in their usual rudeness, gave a noisy irregular shout, and used all their eyes and ears to
learn who and what these new visitors might be.
Among the crowd was a distinguished native chief,
named Kuakini, also called John Adams, who had
acquired a slight knowledge of the English language and manners. He politely conducted us




72         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. III.
to his own house, and afterwards to the house
of Mr. John Young, who has long resided here,
has the rank of a chief, and is now acting secretary to the king.  By him, and by Captain
Adams, an English settler with him, we were
welcomed to the Sandwich Islands.
" We then waited on the king, with the most
important message that can be sent to any earthly
potentate; read to him the official letter from
Dr. Worcester to Tamehameha, and the letters of
Captain Reynolds to Tamehameha, and to his son
Rihoriho; and had them   interpreted by Mr.
Young and Thomas Hopu. In the same manner we made known to the king the views of the
American Board of Missions, and the wishes of
the mission family, presenting the telescope furnished by the board, which the king accepted
very thankfully. He seemed pleased also with
the statements we had made to him, and expressed a degree of approbation of our object, in
which all present concurred, using the general
term  maitai,  it is good."  Still he signified a wish to consider the subject deliberately,
and to pause before giving a definitive answer to
our message.
" On the 5th," the missionaries continue the
narrative "we renewed our negotiation, and
presented to Rihoriho the elegant Bible prepared by the American Bible Society for Tamehameha; also, Bibles to the king's daughters,
which had been furnished by particular friends.
The king appeared grateful for the presents, and
his behaviour was friendly; but, in the immediate
business of our conference wit' him, we made
2




i COAP. III.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


73


little progress, and one cause of difficulty to his
mind soon became apparent. It appears, some
conjectures had been started, from what source,we know not, that Great Britain might not be
pleased with our settling here as American missionaries; and, to deepen the unfavourable impression thus occasioned, some reports were in
circulation, that the missionaries at Tahiti afid
Eimeo had monopolized both the trade and
government of the Society Islands. These new
and unexpected embarrassments we endeavoured
to obviate as well as we could; appealed to our
public instructions, and to the full approbation
of our design given by British subjects, British
missionaries, and British missionary societies;
gave the assurance that we had nothing to do
with the political concerns of these islands; that
there was no collision between the people of the
United States and the people of Great Britain;
and that several stations were occupied by American missionaries in the British dominions.
" In the course of the day, as we passed near
the place where several chiefs were spending
their idle hours in gambling, we were favoured
with an introduction to  Hevaheva, the late
high priest.  This was the personage whom,
about five months ago, the young king consulted
with respect to the expediency of breaking tabu,
and asked to say frankly and plainly whether it
would be good or bad, assuring him, at the same
time, that he would be guided by his word.
Ievaheva readily declared it would be good;,adding, that he knew there was but one Akua,
(God,) who was in heaven; and that their wooden
H




74


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. IlI.


gods could not save them, or do them any good.
On the present occasion he received us kindly;
and, when introduced to Mr. Bingham, he expressed much satisfaction in meeting with a brother priest from America; still pleasantly claiming that distinction for himself.  He seemed
much pleased in speaking of the demolition of
the maraes and idols, and assured us that he
would be our friend."
On the 6th, the royal family went on board
the brig to dine, the king being dressed in the
native costume, with a broad maro round his
waist, a green silken scarf upon his shoulders,
beads around his neck, and a wreath of flowers
upon his head. He was introduced to the female part of the mission family, the first American women he had ever seen, and conducted
himself with great civility. After dinner, the
company assembled on the quarter deck, and
sung, at the king's request, several psalms and
hymns, with which he and the multitude around
appeared much pleased. Shortly afterwards, they
gave to their new friends their parting " aloha,"
(a word of friendly salutation,) returning, it was
hoped, under favourable impressions. The visit
was returned on the following day, by several of
the missionaries and their wives, who went by
invitation on shore, to dine with the king.
As the captain of their vessel was desirous to
proceed, as soon as he had accomplished his business with the king and chiefs, the missionaries
were under the necessity of pressing for a formal
decision on the proposals they had submitted to
them. The missionaries had expressed a wish to




II1fAP*. II*]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.           75
be allowed to form one station at Oahu, and
one at Hawaii; believing that they might thus
commence and prosecute their work, with less
embarrassment to the government, and with
more important advantages to the public in general, than could be insured by all remaining at
Kairua, or proceeding together to Oahu. Their
desire to settle at the latter place was, however,
misconstrued, and regarded with some suspicion
that selfish motives or political views were
drawing them thither. The king said, " You
wish to go to Oahu, because provisions are so
plenty there; all the white men wish to live at
Oahu."   He intimated, at the same time, that
he feared the Americans were contemplating a
seizure of the island.
In the former of the reasons assigned by the
king, for the preference of Oahu as a station
above Kairua, there was, undoubtedly, felt by the
missionaries, to be force. Kairua was a barren
spot, situated on a bed of lava, and without any
streams of water. In such a locality, all hope of
instructing the natives in the proper culture of
ground, and improvement of natural resources,
would have been precluded; and as it was tlfe
wish of the missionaries to be so situated, that
they might early give proof of their usefulness
to the people, by introducing useful arts, and
might support themselves with little expense to
their patrons, the above circumstances were felt
to be serious objections to the accepting of Kairua
as the sole settlement. Still it seemed to be the
pleasure of Rihoriho, and some of his chiefs,
that the missionaries should all settle at Kairua;




76         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP, III,
and, for this purpose, permission was given them
to land, and a large house, formerly occupied by
Tamehameha, assigned for their accommodation.
Before, however, signifying their acquiescence
in this plan, it was resolved to make one more
united effort to obtain a different arrangement;
and, accordingly, on the 10th of April, all the
brethren went on shore for this purpose. They
unexpectedly found that Karaimoku, who had
considerable control over Oahu, had returned.
To him, to John Adams, to another native chief
named Nihe, to the king, and to Mr. Young, individually, were made known their wishes, that
a part of their number should have liberty to
proceed to Oahu, to settle there. But, though
this proposition appeared reasonable to the whole
party, they seemed reluctant to give their consent
to it. In the afternoon of the same day, Kaahumanu, who had been out on a fishing expedition,
and for whose advice Rihoriho pretended to be
waiting, returned successful.  She possessed
more property and power than any woman on
the islands, and her return was regarded as a
favourable event. About this time, Keaumoku,
a native chief, commonly called Governor Cox,
arrived. This man also had great influence,
spoke English, was considered as a friend of
Europeans, and, at that time, was the commander of one of the king's vessels. His return
from Oahu, being at the very moment when the
important question was pending, and when his
influence was most needed, was regarded by the
missionaries as peculiarly auspicious.
Towards evening, the king, with all the queens.,;




c  i.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.


77


and all the principal chiefs, had assembled toge-:ther; and this was thought to be a suitable time;for making the application in a more formal and:rgent manner. After many inquiries, about
the real design of the missionaries, and the number of arts they could teach, the king and his
chiefs seemed fully satisfied that their intentions
were good; and, while waving a final answer
till the morrow, gave them every encouragement
to hope that their request would be complied
with.  They stipulated only that information
should be sent to Great Britain, as to the nature
of their designs. It was with great pleasure the
king learned that his new visitors understood so
many useful arts. He inquired very earnestly,
whether they had any ship carpenter, saying
that he greatly needed one to repair his vessels,
and expressing a regret that one had not been
brought.
On the following day, Mr. Thurston and Dr.
Htolman went on shore, to learn the final decision of the king and his chiefs. The missionary
party were rejoiced to find it favourable. The
order of the government was, that two of the
brethren, with their wives, and two of the natir
youths, should remain at Kairua; be furnished
at the public expense with lodgings, water, fuel,
and provisions; and be permitted to commence
their appropriate work, with the promise of protection: and that the rest of the party should
proceed to Oahu, and there be accommodated
with convenient houses. It was the pleasure of
the king, that Dr. Holman, with Tbcmas Hopu
and William Tenue, should remain at Kairua;
E 2




78         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. IMI.
and to this there was no objection. The more
difficult question, which of the ordained missionaries should stay to commence the mission there,
was decided by ballot; and the important appointment, to the satisfaction of all, fell on Mr.
Thurston.
It was a busy and trying, but still a joyful
and memorable day, when Mr. Thurston and
Dr. Holman, with their wives, and Thomas Hopu and William  Tenue, landed and took up
their residence at Kairua.  As the brig lay
about a mile from the shore, the boats were employed all day in transporting the baggage, etc.
to the beach; and several of the king's men,
with one of the brethren, assisted in removing
them from the beach to a small house appropriated to the temporary use of the mission. In
the evening of the 12th of April, the brethren
who had cheerfully agreed to commence their
labours here, took leave of the remaining members of the mission family, and repaired, for the
first time, to sleep on heathen shores. They
were accompanied by Mr. Bingham and Captain
Blanchard; and, with affectionate salutations,
were commended to the grace and protection of
Him, who said, " Lo, I am with you alway."
In two days from the time of separation,
namely, on the 14th of April, the vessel cast anchor opposite to Honoruru, a convenient harbour at Oahu; and, on the 19th, the remainder of
the mission family, consisting of Messrs. Bingham, Chamberlain, Whitney, Ruggles, and Loomis, with their wives, and John Honorii, took
np their residence on heathen ground. Through
1




IdUAP. III.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.


79


th!lhe kindness of various residents, Americans and
i others, they were accommodated with the tempoi::rary use of several small houses for their own
i: convenience, and the storage of their goods.
Immediately on landing, the missionaries commenced the public and private worship of God,
which, indeed, they had hitherto regularly main-! tained on board the Thaddeus, and not, it was
hoped, without great and permanent benefit to
two or three of the mates. In their present
situation, they preached on the sabbath, not only
to the mission family, but to many residents,
officers of vessels, and seamen, who were occasionally present; and, in some instances, held
service on board ships at the request of the masters. As soon as they had obtained permission
of the chiefs to remain in the island, they proceeded to select a site for their future dwellings;
they fixed on a spot about half a mile distant
from the landing place and the town of Honoruru.  In the meantime, the governor, acting
under the directions of the king, employed the
islanders in erecting temporary houses for their
residence, till more permanent ones could be provided. These were of slight construction and
fragile materials; being large native huts, built
after the manner of the country, of poles planted
in the ground, and with small sticks or rods,
about an inch in circumference, fastened horizontally from one pole to another for the walls: the
roof was formed by rafters of poles fixed to those
planted in the ground, and united at the top, having the space filled up with small sticks; this
constituted the frame of the, building.  The




80       MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. IIt.
whole was tied together with the fibrous roots of
a native plant, or with a cord of twisted native
grass. The substance of the walls and roof were
of the same material, generally of long, coarse,
dried grass, tied with a cord of grass, similar to
the small horizontal sticks already described.
Externally, these houses resemble a hay-stack; the
interior consists of one apartment, the sides and
roof exhibiting the rough poles, sticks, and cords:
occasionally, however, these are covered, and the
whole lined with matting made of a coarse kind
of rushes, woven by hand. The floor, which is
earthen, is covered over with long dried grass,
over which are spread coarse or fine mats, according to the taste or wealth of the owner.
The door is usually placed at one end of the
building, and the windows are simple openings
cut in the walls, and closed by a boarded shutter.
It is only in the houses built for foreigners that
windows are ever made, the natives considering
them superfluous. Such were the kind of dwellings occupied by the mission families, on their
first entrance upon the field of their future labours: they were commenced on the 19th of
June, and, fiom the number of people employed,
the frame of one was completed in a day. The
houses furnished at best but an indifferent protection against the wind or rain, and were often
exposed to considerable danger from fire. Yet,
in these the families spent many pleasant days,
and felt grateful for the accommodation and comfort they afforded.
On the 2nd of May, the vessel which had
brought the missionaries fiom America, left Oahu




CHAP. III.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


81


for Tauai, having on board the young prince,
who was returning to his father, and Messrs.
Whitney and Ruggles. These brethren went,
for the purpose of testifying the good feeling of
the Christians in America towards the king and
people of Tauai, of explaining the objects of
their mission, and ascertaining whether or not
the people were disposed to receive instruction.
They reached the island in safety, and the missionaries observe:" King Taumarii received his long-absent
son with the greatest tenderness and affection.
When the Thaddeus had anchored in the harbour, and the intelligence was communicated to
the king that his son had arrived, Captain
Blanchard gave a royal salute of twenty-one
guns, which was returned by the same number
from the fort. The brethren then accompanied
George to his father. As soon as he entered
the door, the king rose from   his sofa, and
affectionately clasped his son in his arms, saluted
him after the manner of the country, and wept
in silence. Both were unable to speak for several minutes.  Others could not suppress their
tears. The king, at length, observed, that the
arrival of Huihuhmi, (which is the real name
of his son,) made his heart so joyful, that he
could not talk much that day. George then introdnced the brethren to his father, as his friends,
who had come from America to accompany him
home. The king embraced them with tears of
affection, calling them his friends. When he was
acquainted more fully with the kindness of the
Christians of America, in teaching his son, and




82         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. III.
providing for his wants till they could arrange
his return; as also, in sending missionaries to
instruct his countrymen in useful arts, and to
unfold to them the true religion, he exclaimed:
Nui, nui, maitai; and, with tears of gratitude,
added, Nui roa aloha America; (very good,
very great love to America.)  His wife joined
in these expressions of interest and approbation.
He engaged to be a father to the missionaries,
as the good people of America had been to his
much-loved Humihumi."
During the stay of Messrs. Whitney and Ruggles, the king showed a great desire to acquire
useful knowledge, was highly pleased with the
Bible presented to him by the American Bible
Society, and anxious to know its contents. He
often requested the brethren to read and explain
it to him, particularly the account of the creation
of the world, and the history of the Saviour; a
service which they cheerfully attempted to perform. ie once said to them, in broken English,
Humihumi tell me you love me and my people,
and wish to do us good all our days; I love him
very much, more than I do my other children.
I thought he was dead; I cry many times because I think he was dead. Some captains tell
me he live in America. I say, No, he dead;
he no more come back: but he live, he come
again, my heart very glad. I want my son to
help me; he speak English very well, and can
do my business; but he is young. Young men
sometimes wild, and want advice. I want you
stay here, and help Humihumi go on board and
trade, and so I make you a chief."  He was




CAP. III.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.


83


surprised to hear Mr. Ruggles say that he did
not wish to be a chief, nor could do any of the
king's public business; though he should be
most willing to advise and assist his son, so far
as he could consistently with the nature and general objects of the mission.
To Captain Blanchard, the king said, " You
are a good man; I love you much. All the
captains say they will bring my son; but they
no bring him: but you bring him.  I will give
you any thing you ask, if I can get it for you."
le gave forty or fifty large hogs, and as many
sweet potatoes, yams, and sugar-canes, as were
wanted; promising to give another supply of
such provisions when Captain Blanchard should
return from the coast, together with a present of
sandal wood, worth, probably, one thousand dollars in Canton.
On the first day of Humihumi's arrival, his
father gave him the rich and fertile valley of
Waimea in which he lives, at the same time committing to him, as second in command, the principal concerns of the island, and telling the chiefs
that they must henceforth consider his son as
their ruler; charging him, at the same time, to
make it his care to acquire their confidence, anzd
make them happy.
So great was the anxiety of the king to detain
the missionaries near him, that he offered to furnish houses and land sufficient for the whole family, if they would settle there; to build school
houses and a church at his own expense; and to
have his people learn to keep the sabbath, and
sing and pray to theGod of America. Indeed,
so strong was the attachment of the king and




84         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. III.
queen to their new friends, that from a mistaken
apprehension of their having determined to leave
for Oahu, and not return, they both spent once a
sleepless night. When the brethren called the
next day, they were much affected, and the king
said to them, with tender interest, "Why you
no stay here? we like you very much; my people all like you. We want missionaries here,
as well as the other islands."  Nor was it till
they were informed that it was intended, as soon
as possible, to supply them with teachers that
they seemed satisfied, and became cheerful again.
Such was their desire to learn to read, that they
appeared willing to spend years in acquiring the
art; and though their fondness for bathing and
sleeping came frequently in competition with their
desire to learn, the brethren were often amused
to see them standing in the river, with their
books in their hands, diligently repeating their
lessons.
The brethren explored a considerable part of
this island, and found it fertile and well watered.
The inhabitants are generally poor, but hospitable.
Through indolence, much of the excellent soil
of this island, as well as the others, is uncultivated.
Messrs. Whitney and Ruggles returned to
Oahu, after an absence of about two months; and
shortly afterwards, in consequence of the continued urgency of the entreaties of the king, and
also of the chiefs, the brethren deemed it expedient, that, with their wives, they should remove
to Tauai, and commence there the work of evangelizing the natives; trusting in the kindness of
Providence, to send ministers of the gospel here



I AP. II1.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.,          85
afer to enter into their labours, and teach the way
ioff the Lord more perfectly. In accordance with
Itis determination, these brethren soon afterwards,:ent to Tauai, a passage being kindly offered
them by Captain Cary, of the Levant. They were
received with great affection by the king and
principal persons about him, and entered without
delay upon the preparatory measures for a missionary establishment. The circumstance of their
removal and commencement of labours are thus
described, in a letter to the secretary of the American Missionary Society, dated August 1,1820:" We arrived at this island on the morning of
the 25th of July, were met in the offing immediately after the ship came to anchor, by the
king and queen, with their retinue, and were
received with every mark of parental affection.
Nui nui maitai, (much much good,) responded
from a hundred tongues. We were conducted
to a house which had been prepared, and where
every thing necessary to our comfort was provided. George tells us, that his father and mother have been engaged for three weeks past in
learning to write. You will see what improvement they have made, by a specimen consisting
of three letters; one written by the king, the
two others by the queen. They first dictated
what they wished to send; which was written,
and then copied by themselves.   The king's
youngest son has also made considerable progress. Our friend George treats us with much
attention. We eat at his table, and he appears
anxious to render us all the assistance in his
power. He usually attends family prayers with
I




86          MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. Ill,
us, and is evidently less sceptical than formerly.
On the sabbath we attended public worship, and
read a sermon, written by the Rev. Daniel
A. Clark, of Southbury, Connecticut, entitled,
'The Church safe.' The king and queen with
their servants attended, and seemed much pleased.
After the services were completed, the king said,
'I like your way of worship very much; my
old way is pupuka, (bad.) I will come every
sabbath, and by and by we will build a large
church, and be like good people in America.'
" At present we have great encouragement to
hope and pray for the blessing of God to attend
our labours. The people have turned fron the
worship of idols; kings have become nursing
fathers, and the queens nursing mothers; our
hands are strengthened, and our hearts made
joyful. But we rejoice with trembling: there is
much need for us to be humble, and to walk
softly before God. These people are naturally
fickle; and we know not how soon the current
of feeling may be changed. The clouds, which
are now out of sight, may soon gather in our horizon, and storms of persecution may extinguish
our rising hopes; yet, He who hath said, ' Lo,
I am with you,' is our Helper, and we will not
fear."
The king requested the missionaries to state
to their friends in America, that he very much
wanted a good minister, physician, house and
ship carpenter, cabinet maker, and powder maker,
to come and live with him; adding, that he
would support as many good people as would
settle at his island.




IpA. III.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.


87


T l;The following are the letters alluded to in the
li above extract: the first is from king Taumarii,:o the secretary of the mission:Dear Friend; —I wish to write a few lines to
ou, to thank you for the good book you were so
kind as to send by my son. I think it is a good
book; one that God gave for us to read. I
hope my people will soon read this, and all other
good books. I believe that my idols are good
for nothing, and that your God is the only true
God, the one that made all things. My gods I
have cast away; they are no good; they fool
me; they do me no good. I take good care of
them. I give them cocoa nuts, plantains, hogs,:and many good things, and they fool me at last.:Now I throw them all away. I have none now.
When your good people teach me, I worship your
God. I feel you good people come to help us.
We know nothing here. American people very
good-kind. I love them. When they come
here, I take care of them; I give them eat; I
give them clothes; I do every thing for them.
I thank you for giving my son learning. I think
my son dead. Some man tell me he no dead.
I tell him he lie. I suppose he dead. I thank
all American people. I feel glad to see your
good folks here. I take good care of them. I
hope you take good care of my people in your
country; if you do, I feel glad. I must close,
accept this from your friend,
KING TAMOREE."
Letter of the queen of Tauai to the mother of
Mrs. Ruggles, dated Atooi, July 28, 1820.




88        MISSIONARY RECORDS.   [CHAP. III.
"Dear Friend;-I am glad your daughter
come here; I shall be her mother now, and she be
my daughter. I be good to her 5 give her tappa,
(cloth;) give her mat; give her plenty eat.
By and by your daughter speak Hawaii; then
she teach me how to read, and write, and sew;
and talk of that great Akua, which the good people in America love. I begin spell little: read
come very hard, like stone. You very good,
send your daughter great way to teach the heathens. I am very glad I can write you a short
letter, and tell you that I be good to your
daughter. I send you my aloha, and tell you I
am your friend,
C CHARLOTTE TAPULEE, Queen of Atooi."
From the foregoing correspondence it will be
gathered, that the removal of Messrs. Whitney
and Ruggles to the island of Tauai took place towards the end of July, 1820. Thus, in less than
four months after the heights of Hawaii met the
anxious eyes of the missionaries, they had fixed
upon three stations, designed to be permanent,
and actually occupied them, with the cordial approbation of chiefs and people. In the course of
this period, Mr. Loomis had also received and
accepted an invitation to reside at Towaihai Bay,
under the protection of Karaimoku, with a view to
the instruction of several youths selected by him.
In a letter from Messrs. Bingham, Chamberlain, Whitney, Ruggles, and Loomis, dated
July 23, 1820, the remarkable and auspicious
events connected with the introduction of the
gospel to the islands, are thus referred to:" Far removed from the loved dwellings of




IHAP. III.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.          89?Zion in our native land, surrounded by pagans:and strangers, we would lift the voice of grateful praise to our covenant Father.  Here we:now see no altars of abomination, nor bloody
rites of superstition; Jehovah has begun to overturn the institutions of idolatry, and to prepare
the way for the nobler institutions of his own
worship.
"' On the 30th of March, we arrived off the
shore of these long-lost and long-neglected ' isles
of the Gentiles;' but how were our ears astonaished to hear a voice exclaiming, ' In the wilderness prepare ye the way of Jehovah; make
straight in the desert a highway for our God.'
This victory was achieved by that arm alone
which sustains the universe. He, who in wisdom
has ordained that no flesh should glory in his
presence, has saved us from the danger of glorying in the triumph, and taught us, with adoring
views of his majesty, to c stand still, and see the
salvation of God.'  Long, indeed, did we expect to toil, with slow and painful progress, to
undermine the deep-laid foundations of the
grossest idolatry; but He, whose name alone
is Jehovah, looked upon the blood-stained superstition erected in insult to Divine purity, and,
even without the winding ram's horn of a consecrated priest, it sinks from His presence, and
tumbles into ruins; and he commands us, as the
feeble followers of the Captain of salvation, to
go up v every man straight before him,' and,
'in the name of our God, to set up our banner.'
"We have been allowed to plant the standard
of the cross at Kairua and at Honoru ru where
12




90          MISSIONARY REOORDS. [CHAP. III.
the chiefs, the natives, and foreigners, may, from
week to week, hear the sound of the gospel.
Most gladly would we erect the same standard
on every isle in this cluster, but we have no
preacher to send. The people are without any
form of religion, waiting, as it were, for the law
of Christ, though they know not his name, nor
the way of salvation.
' At Kairua, our brethren, though subject to
great privations, are allowed to engage in their
appropriate work with flattering hopes of success.
The king, chief, or governor, leads the way as
their humble pupil, and now begins to read intelligibly in the New Testament; desirous to
outstrip all his subjects in the acquisition of useful knowledge. Two of his wives, and two
stewards under their instruction, exercise themselves in the most easy lessons of Webster's Spelling Book.
" At this place we have a school, advancing
with desirable progress in the rudiments of the
English language. The number under our instruction here is about thirty, among whom are
the governor, or head chief of the island, his wife,
daughter of a chief of Karakakooa, and eleven
children of white men.
" We know not what Divine wisdom intends
to do here, but we think a great effort ought to
be made in every island, to take possession for
Christ and the church. The case is so new and
so unparalleled in the history of the world, that
we know not what to say. When hath a nation
changed its gods? The enemy may have retired
but for a season, to appear again in his wrath,




JiP.. IIi.]   SANDWICH ISLANDS.


91


to; kindle the flames of persecution, and re-establish the worship of demons in all its forms of:pollution and cruelty. How often did Israel, the
chosen of God, give melancholy proof of the most
deep-rooted depravity, and the incurable propensity of the human heart to the grossest idolatry,
even with the lively oracles of Divine truth in
their hands, and the awful majesty of Jehovah's
presence before their eyes! Were it not for the
fact, that the present is an age of wonders, and
the hope, that the Christian church will not relax the ardour of effort, and the fervency of
'prayer, for us and this people, we should expect
soon to see the altars of abomination erected, and.the powerful priesthood of superstition arrayed.against this little feeble band of Christian pilgrims, before one of us could preach plainly and
impressively, in the language of the islands, the
unsearchable riches of Jesus Christ.  But in
God is our hope, and we will not fear. We dare
not put our trust in princes; the King of Zion
alone is worthy of our confidence; it is he who
has begun the glorious work, and it will go on.
The powers of earth and hell cannot successfully
oppose it. We are nothing, and whether defeat
or success shall be our particular lot, we know
that the holy cause in which, under your patronage, we are allowed to embark, cannot fail of ultimate and universal triumph.  Zion shall arise
and shine; the Redeemer shall reign; the isles
shall wait for his law. The glory of the Lord
shall cover the earth, and all flesh shall see it
together, for the mouth of the Lord hath spoken
it.  Cheered with these Divine consolations,




92         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. III.
contented and happy in our work, weak and
inexperienced as we are, we turn our eyes to
you for counsel, and to Heaven for help; and
subscribe ourselves, dear sir, your servants, for
Jesus's sake, and fellow-labourers in the vineyard
of our Lord."
The circumstances and prospects under which
the mission had been commenced, is thus adverted
to in a letter from Messrs. Bingham and Loomis,
to the corresponding secretary, under date November 19, 1820.
" Rev. andvery dear Sir;-Your first communication to us, after giving us the parting hand,
with your parental benediction, in Boston Harbour, we received by the Cleopatra's barge.
We have been refreshed by its interesting contents; as also by the rich feast of religious and
missionary intelligence sent us by the provisional
committee, and others. We cannot but rejoice
with you in the view of what God is doing for
Zion, and for the heathen. We believe you
will rejoice with us when you see what the Lord
has done for these ' isles of the Gentiles,' in removing their altars of abomination, and in planting
a Christian mission and church, and erecting the
standard of the gospel. Though the idea is still
present to our minds that our departure was
somewhat premature, considering the magnitude of the work before us, and the difficulty
of making every desirable preparation; yet we
are satisfied that we arrived, in the good providence of God, at the very juncture for the
establishment of a mission; and, were we 'thoroughly furnished unto every good work,' we




CHsiAP. III.]   SANDWICH     ISLANDS.


3


m!iight hope to see our banner unitedly set up, in
the name of our God, andimmoveably established
unto all generations. The work will indeed put
in requisition all the wisdom and experience,:all the talents and enterprize, all the zeal and
activity which we possess: nay, it seems to demand the wisest and most efficient labourers
which the church could possibly furnish. The
chaotic state of the nation requires a plastic hand,
more skilful and powerful than we are able to
apply to it, that its religious and national character may be formed acceptable to God. We
trust the same Divine hand which gave existence
to the nation, and which has prostrated its idolatry, and broken the galling chains of the oppressive tabus, will form its moral character, and
give it such purity, beauty, consistency, and
stability, that the Prince of Peace will delight to
reign here for ever. We, as instruments of the
Divine administration, are allowed to begin the
work; and we doubt not you will rejoice to
know, that we have the prospect of continuing
it with hopes of success. We expected trials;
we have had our share; we needed them; and
we hope they will work for our good. But our
trials from the heathen have been less than we
expected. Though even here, if fickleness of
mind, instability, and uncertainty in the measures
of government, of drunkenness and debauchery,
and their attendant evils and abominations, can
be considered as trials to us, we meet with them
every day. We must struggle with them long,
and never be weary in well doing."




MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. Iv.


CHAPTER IV.
Account of the general state of the people, from the
time of their discovery, to the abolition of idolatry, and the arrival of the first missionaries from
America- Government of the Sandwich Islands —
Monarchy absolute-Rank and offices hereditaryPolitical divisions of the country — Te king sole
proprietor of all land —Tenures by which land
is held-Mode of levying taxes-Punishment of
offences-Description of their cities of refugeCourts of justice- General effects of the former
system of government in the islands.
HlAVING   noticed  the peculiar circumstances
under which a Christian mission was commenced
at the Sa. iich Islands, and conducted the
missionaries to their respective original settlements, it seems proper, before proceeding with
the record of their operations, to furnish some
account of the political and social state of the
people, as well as of their former superstitions
and usages. Such an account, while it adds
another to the many proofs which already exist
of the sunk and degraded state of unevangelized
communities, will also show more distinctly the
actual advantages and benefits which have resulted to the nation from the introduction of the
gospel among them. Among the most important features in the social state of a people, may
be justly ranked their mythology and their government.
The government of the Sandwich Islands is
an absolute monarchy; the supreme authority is
hereditary. The rank of the principal and supe



AP. IV.]     SANDWICH ISLANDS.             95
lior chiefs, the offices of the priests, and other si-;:uations of honour, influence, and emolument,?descend from father to son, and often continue
through many generations in the same family;
though the power of nomination to every situa-;tion of dignity and trust is vested in the king;
and persons, by merit or royal favour, frequently:rise from  comparatively humble rank to the
highest station in the islands; as in the instance
of Karaimoku, sometimes called by foreigners
William  Pitt.  This individual, from  being a
chief of the third or fourth rank, was long prime
minister, in dignity next only to the king; and
had, in fact, the actual government of the whole
of the Sandwich Islands.
Hereditary rank and authority are not confined to the male sex, but are inherited also by
the females; and, according to tradition, several
of the islands have been once or twice under the
government of a queen.
Four distinct classes or ranks of society appear
to exist among the inhabitants: the highest rank
includes the king, queens, and all the branches
of the reigning family; it also includes the
chief counsellor or minister of the king, who,
though inferior by birth, is by office and authority superior to the queens and other members
of the royal family. The second rank includes
the governors of the different islands, and also
the chiefs of several large divisions or districts
of land. The third rank is composed of those
who hold districts or villages, and pay a regular
rent for the land, cultivating it either by their
own dependents and domestics, or letting it out




96         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. IV.
in small allotments to tenants. This class which
while the system of heathenism in the islands
continued, included most of the priests, is by far
the most numerous body of chiefs in the island:
they are generally called hakhzaina, (proprietors
of land.)  In the fourth rank may be comprehended the small farmers, who rent from ten to
twenty or thirty acres of land, the mechanics,
among whom must be reckoned not only canoe
and house builders, but fishermen, musicians,
and dancers, and all the labouring classes, as well
those who cultivate small portions of land for
their own advantage, as those who attach themselves to some chief or farmer, and labour on his
land for their food and clothing.
The chiefs in the Sandwich Islands never seem
to have received that abject and humiliating homage which is frequently paid to superiors in
barbarous nations, where the government is arbitrary; still they enjoyed, under the former system,
a degree of respect from the common people far
greater than could be considered as simply due to
their rank or office. Towards the sacred chiefs,
indeed, who were supposed to be descendants of
the gods, this respect amounted almost to adoration; as the people were, on no occasion, allowed
to touch their persons, but expected to prostrate
themselves before them, and could not enter their
houses without first receiving permission. The
behaviour of the chiefs, one towards another, was
courteous, and indicative of a desire to render
themselves agreeable; while all observed a degree of etiquette in their direct intercourse with
the king. When he so far, indeed, forgot his




SiHAP. IV.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.           97
dignity as a man and a sovereign as to appear
in a state of inebriation, all marks of distinction
were lost; but, at other times, even the familiar
favourites, who were accustomed to join in his
amusements and occupations, conducted themselves towards him with great respect.
In some respects the government resembles
the ancient feudal system of the northern nations.
During many periods of their history, not only
the separate islands, but the larger divisions of
some of them, have been under the government
of independent kings or chiefs; and it does not
appear that, until the reign of Rihoriho, the late
king, they were ever united under one sovereign.
Theking is acknowledged, in every island, as the
lord and proprietor of the soil by hereditary right,
or the laws of conquest. When Tamehameha
had subdued the greater part of the islands, he
distributed them among his favourite chiefs and
warriors, on condition of their rendering him
not only military service, but a certain proportion of the produce of their lands. This also
appears to have been their ancient custom on similar occasions, as a division of land among the
victors invariably followed the conquest of a
district or island.
Every island is made over by the king to
some high chief, who is supreme governor of it,
though still subject to the king, whose orders
he is obliged to see executed, and to whom he
pays a regular tax or rent, proportioned to the
size or value of his territories. Each island is
separated into a number of permanent divisions,
sometimes forty or fifty miles in extent; and
K




98         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. IV.
over these also are appointed, as governors, one
or two chiefs, approved by the king, and chosen
by him or by the governor of the island. These
large divisions are again divided into districts or
villages, which extend from half a mile to five
or six along the coast, and over each of these
villages, which are still further subdivided into
a number of small farms, or plantations, presides
a head man, nominated by the governor.
Although this is the usual manner in which
the land is distributed; yet the king holds personally a number of districts in most of the
islands; and several of the principal chiefs receive districts directly from the king, and independent of the governor of the island in which
they are situated. The rents or taxes, for which
the governor of an island has become answerable
to the king, he commonly pays either annually
or half-yearly: he receives them from the chiefs
under him, and pays them sometimes in Spanish
dollars, at other times in sandal wood.
This, however, is only a modern regulation, introduced since they have become acquainted with
the use of money, and the value of sandal wood.
The rent was originally paid in canoes, native
cloth, mats, fishing-nets, hogs, dogs, and the
produce of the soil. It was commonly appropriated either to the king's personal use, or to
that of the numerous train of favourite chiefs and
dependents by whom he was surrounded, and
who might be regarded as part of his domestic
establishment.
In addition to this tax, which it is the business of the governor to see thus conveyed to the




IHAP. IV.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.


99


tI::ing, a second tax is laid on the districts by the: governor, for himself. The inhabitants of those:portions of the island, however, which belong
'.;:to other chiefs, are not called upon to contribute
to this impost, but are expected to send a part of:their produce to their own chiefs.  After the governor's revenue has been paid, additional requisitions are made on the cultivators of land by the
petty chiefs of the districts and villages: these
latter exactions, however, are but trifling.
There is no standing rule for the amount of
rents or taxes, but they are regulated entirely by
the caprice or necessities of their rulers.  Sometimes the poor people take a piece of land, on
condition of cultivating a given portion for the
chief, and the remainder for themselves, making
a fresh agreement after every crop.
In addition to the above demands, the common
people are, in general, obliged to labour, if required, part of two days out of seven, in cultivating farms, building houses, etc., for their landlords.
A time is usually appointed for receiving the
rent, when the people repair to the governors
with what they have to pay. If the required
amount is furnished by them, they return, and,
as they express it, (komo hotl,) enter again on their
land.  But if unable to pay the required sum,
and their landlords are dissatisfied with the presents they have received, or think the tenants
have neglected their farm, they are forbidden to
return, and the land is given to another. When,
however, the produce brought is nearly equal
to the required rent, and the chiefs think the




100        MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. IV.
occupants have exerted themselves to procure
it, they remit the deficiency, and allow them
to return.
Besides the stipulated rent, the people are expected to make a number of presents to their
chiefs, usually thefirst fish in season, from their
artificial ponds, or from the sea, if the land they
occupy be near the coast, together with the first
fruits of their trees and plantations.
Besides the revenue arising from the land, as
also from the monopoly of trade in live stock and
other supplies furnished to the shipping at several ports in the islands, a considerable amount
is now derived from the harbour dues at Oahu.
Every vessel anchoring in the outer harbour pays
sixty dollars, and eighty for entering the basin
or inner harbour.   The pilotage, which is a
dollar per foot for every vessel, both on entering
and leaving the harbour, is divided between the
governor and the pilot.
There are, besides those already enumerated, a
number of singular and irregular methods of taxing the people, which are equally vexatious
and oppressive. When a new house is erected
for the king, or some high chief, on the day
it is first entered by the proprietor, the chiefs and
people of the neighbourhood are expected to repair thither, to pay their respects, and present
gifts proportioned to their rank, or the land they
hold, and if any chief should absent himself, he
is necessarily exposed to the imputation of being
disaffected. Some chiefs, on such occasions, give
sixty dollars, others ten or five, and some only
one. When a large native house was built for




:CHAP. IV.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.


101


Rihoriho, a short time before his embarkation
for England, gifts were offered for the space of
three days after the king had taken possession of
it, and not even the queens entered without presenting a sum of money.
Until the establishment of a Christian mission
among them, the Sandwich Islanders had no records, and consequently no written laws. They
have, however, a kind of traditionary code respecting the tenure of lands, right of property,
personal security, and exchange or barter, which
are well understood, and generally acted upon.
The irrigation of their plantations is of great importance in most parts, and there is a law that
the water shall be conducted over every plantation twice a week in general, and once a week
during the dry season.
On the death of a chief, his lands revert to the
king or governor of the island. A chief may nominate his son, his wife, or any other person to
succeed to his districts, etc., but the appointment
must be confirmed by the king or governor, before the individual can take possession.  This
regulation, next to the tabu, is the most effectual
mode of preserving the authority of the king and
chiefs.
In cases of assault or murder, except when
committed by their own chief, the family and
friends of the injured party were, by common
consent, justified in retaliating. When they were
too weak to attack the offender, they sought the
aid of their nieighbours, and appealed to the chief
of the district, or the king, who seldom inflicted
a heavier punishment than banishment, even for
K2




102        MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. IV.
murder; which, however, is a crime very rarely
committed by the natives.
Theft, among themselves, is severely punished.
Formerly, when a garden or house had been robbed, and the robbers were discovered, those
whose goods had been stolen, repaired to the
house or plantation of the offenders, and seized
whatever they could find. This regulation was
so well established, that though the guilty party
should be the strongest, he would not dare to resist
the retaliation; for, in the event of any opposition, the people of a whole districtwould rise and
enforce, by their co-operation, the punishment of
the offender.
When robbery had been committed on the
property of a high chief, to any great amount,
the thief; in some of the islands, was frequently
bound hand and foot, placed in an old decayed
canoe, towed out to sea, and there turned adrift.
The canoe speedily filled, and the culprit, being
bound, soon sunk beneath the waves.
It is a remarkable fact, in the history of the
Sandwich Islands, that amongst their ancient
customs, one was the maintenance of cities of
refuge, to which culprits of every description
might flee for safety. They were called puhonuas, and afforded an inviolable sanctuary
to the guilty fugitive, who, when fleeing from the
avenging spear, was so favoured as to enter their
precincts. That adjoining the Hare o Keave,
" the house of Keave," a sacred depository of
the bones of departed kings and princes, had
several wide entrances, some in the side next the
sea, the others facing the mountains  Hither




IIAP. IV.]      SANDWICH ISLANDS.           103
i the manslayer, the man who had broken a tabu,: or failed in the observance of its rigid require-:i ments, the thief, and even the murderer, fled
from his incensed pursuers, and was safe. To
'whomsoever he belonged, and from   whatever
part he came, he was equally certain of admittance, though liable to be pursued even to the
gates of the enclosure. Happily for him, those
gates were perpetually open; and, as soon as the
fugitive had entered, he repaired to the presence
of the idol, and made a short ejaculatory address,
expressive of his obligations to him in reaching
the place of security. Whenever war was proclaimed, and during the period of actual hostilities, a white flag was unfurled on the top of a tall
spear, at each end of the enclosure, where it waved
until the conclusion of a peace, as the symbol of
hope to those, who, vanquished in fight, might
flee thither for protection. It was fixed a short
distance from the walls, on the outside; and to
the spot on which this banner was unfurled, the
victorious warrior might chase his routed foes;
but here, he must himself fall back; beyond it
he must not advance one step, on pain of forfeiting his life. The priests, and their adherents,
would immediately put to death any one who
should have the temerity to follow those who
who were once within the pale of the pahu tabu;
and, as they expressed it, under the shade, or
protection of the spirit of Keave, the tutelar deity
of the place.
In one part of the enclosure, houses were formerly erected for the priests, and others for the
refugees, who, after a certain period, or at the




104


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. IV.


cessation of war, were dismissed by the priests,
and returned unmolested to their dwellings and
families; no one venturing to injure those who
had enjoyed the protection of the gods. It does
not appear, on inquiry, that a length of time exceeding two or three days was necessary for them
to remain in the puhonua; and, after that, they
either attached themselves to the service of the
priests, or returned to their homles.
The puhonua at Honaunau is capacious, capable of containing a vast multitude of people.
In time of war, the females, children, and old
people of the neighbouring districts were generally left within it, while the men went to battle.
Here they awaited in safety the issue of the conflict, and were secure against surprise and destruction, in the event of a defeat.
The form of it was an irregular parallelogram,
walled up at one side and at both ends, the other
being formed by the sea-beach, except on the
north-west end, where there was a low fence.
On measurement, it was found to be seven hundred and fifteen feet in length, and four hundred
and four feet wide. The walls were twelve feet
high, and fifteen wide. Holes were visible in
the top of the wall, where large images had formerly stood, about four rods apart throughout
its whole extent. Within this enclosure there
had been three large temples, one of which
remained nearly entire. It was a compact pile
of stones, forming a solid mass, one hundred and
twenty-six feet by sixty-five, and ten feet high.
Many fragments of rock, or pieces of lava, of
two or more tons each, were seen in several parts
3




CCHrAP. IV.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.         1iX
of the wall, raised at least six feet from the
ground. The erection of such a place as the
puhonua at Honaunau, under the circumstances,
and by such means as it must have been reared,
was an herculean task, and could not have
been completed but by the labour of many
hands. All that could be learned, by inquiries on the spot, as to the time it had been
standing, was that it was built for Keave, who
reigned in Hawaii about two hundred and fifty
years ago. The walls and leiaus, indeed, looked
as if it might claim such antiquity; but the
house of Keave, and the images, must have
been renewed since that time.
" We had often," observes a writer who
visited this spot, " passed over the ruins of deserted heathen temples, and the vestiges of demolished altars, in the Sandwich Islands, and
I had frequently visited those in other groups
of the Pacific; but the feelings excited on these
occasions had always been those of deep melancholy and horror, at the human immolations, and
shocking cruelties, which they had so often exhibited.  Here, however, idolatry appeared in
the form of clemency, and the sacred enclosure
presented a scene unique among the ruins of paganism, which we contemplated with unusual
interest.
"Whether its establishment was originally
designed by the priests, to attach to their interest
all who might owe their lives to its institution;
or by some mild and humane prince, anxious
to diminish the barbarous cruelties of idolatry,
and soften the sanguinary character of savage




106         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. Iv.
warfare; or whether derived traditionally from
the Israelitish cities of refuge, to which some of
its features are strikingly analagous, we do not
pretend to determine. However, we could not
but rejoice that its abolition was so soon succeeded by the revelation of a refuge more secure;
that the white flag ceased not to wave until another banner was ready to be unfirled, on which
was inscribed,  'Look unto me, and be ye
saved, all the ends of the earth.'"
There is, in the Sandwich Islands, no class of
men, either peasants or mechanics, who are regularly employed as day labourers, or who receive
for their work a stipulated payment, except those
employed by foreigners. In hiring workmen for
digging, building, or any other purpose, it is a
common practice among the natives themselves
to make the bargain with a petty chief, who requires the labour of all his dependents in its fulfilment. They usually pay beforehand; and
those who have received such remuneration are
bound, when called upon, to perform their work,
or have their property seized, and their plantations plundered.
These, and several similar regulations, are generally received, and govern the conduct of the
people; for though the king can dispense with any
of them, such an act would be contrary to the established usages, and is seldom done. The will of
the sovereign, however, being the supreme law,
the government is more or less arbitrary as his
disposition is humane, or vindictive and cruel.
Both his own power, and that which he delegates,
first to the governors of the different islands,




C:AP. Iv.]   SANDWICH ISLANDS.           107
and from them to the chiefs of the districts, extends not only over the property, but over the
liberty and lives of his subjects. A chief takes
the life of one of his own people for any offence:he may commit, and no one thinks he has a right
to interfere.  But while the power of the chiefs
is absolute over their own people, it extends no
farther, as a chief dare not for any offence punish
a man belonging to another, but must complain
to the chief on whose land the offender resides.
The house, or front yard, of the king or governor is the court of justice, and is sometimes a
court of equity. Judgment is seldom given until
both parties are heard face to face. Amongst
their numerous ordeals for trying those accused of
different crimes, the most singular is the wai
haruru, (shaking water.)  A large calabash, or
wooden dish, of water is placed in the midst of a
circle, on one side of which the accused party is
seated. A prayer is offered by the priest, and
the suspected individuals are required, one by
one, to hold both hands, with the fingers spread
out, over the dish, while the priest or chief looks
stedfastly at the face of the water; and it is said,
that, when the person who has committed the
crime, spreads his hands over the vessel, the water trembles.  Probably, conscious guilt and
superstitious dread may make the hands of the
culprit shake, and occasion the tremulous appearance of the water in which they are reflected.
No unnecessary delays take place in the redress of grievances, or the administration of justice.  On one occasion, while one of the missionaries was sitting with Karaimoku, a poor




108         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [OHAP. IV.
woman came to complain of the chief of her district, who, she said, had kept the water running
through his own plantation for several days,
while the potatoes and tara in her garden were
parched up with drought. After making a few
inquiries, he called Kaikoiri, one of his favourite
chiefs, and said, " Go with this woman, and if
the chief has keptback the water, open the channels, and let it flow over her field immediately."
The chief girded up his maro, and, followed by
the woman, set off for the district in which he resided.
There is, in the islands, no regularly consti;ctted
and permanent council of state; nor hav; he
people a voice in the proceedings of governrmnt.
But the king, though accountable to no one for
the measures he adopts, seldom acts in any affair
of importance without the advice of his confidential chiefs. These counsellors are in no degree responsible for the advice they give, nor
liable to suffer from any conduct the king may
pursue. He seldom acts in opposition to their
wishes. In all matters of importance, it is customary to summon the governors and principal
chiefs of the several islands to a national council, when the subject is freely discussed. Their
deliberations are generally conducted with great
privacy, and seldom known among the people
until finally arranged; when they are promulgated throughout the island by the king's heralds
or messengers. The king sends his orders directly
to the governor of the island, or principal chief
of the district. Formerly, a courier bore a verbal message; now he carries a written despatch.




THAP. IV.]   SANDWICH ISLANDS.


o10ad


The office of a messenger, as well as that of g
herald, is hereditary, and considered honourable,
as those who sustain it must necessarily have possessed the confidence of the king and chiefs.
The Hawaiian system of government, whether
derived from the country whence the first settlers
emigrated, or established by warlike chieftains
in a subsequent period of their history, as an
expedient to secure conquests, to command the
services of their tenants on occasions of war, and
to perpetuate the influence which martial prowess,
or success in the first instance, had given them,
exhibits in various distinctive features, considerable advancement from a state of barbarism, and
warrants the conclusion, that the people have
been an organized community for many generations.  But, whatever antiquity their system
may possess, they have made but little progress
in the art of good government. The well-being
of the subject seems to have been but rarely regarded by the rulers; who appear to have considered the lower orders, in general, as a kind of
property, to be employed only in promoting the
interests of their superiors; and the ardent love
of wealth, which an acquaintance with the prow.
ductions of foreign countries has excited in most
of the chiefs, has not improved the condition of
the people.  Industry receives no encouragement; and even those whom natural energy of
character would induce to cultivate a larger portion of land than was absolutely necessary for their
bare subsistence, are deterred from the attempt by
the apprehension of thereby exposing themselves
L




110         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. IV.
to the rapacity of avaricious or necessitous chiefs.
Nothing can be more detrimental to the true interests of the chiefs, and the civilization and true
happiness of the people, than the abject dependence of the latter, the uncertain tenure of lands,
the insecurity of personal property, the exactions
of the chiefs, and the restrictions on trade with
the shipping, which they impose. As the nration, in general, becomes enlightened, it is to be
presumed, that the policy of the rulers will be
more liberal, and the general prosperity of the
islands proportionably advanced.




:CHAP. v.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.


11


CHAPTER V.
Idols formerly worshipped by the Sandwich Islanders - Description of the images of Keoroeva —
Mode of presenting offerings-Privileges of the
sacred hogs-Mooarii, king of lizards-Karaipahoa- Tradition of the origin of this idol-Its supposed power over human life-Pele, the goddess of
volcanoes-Account of her appearing to the chief
Kahavari-Imagined effects of her anger- Universal dread of the gods of the volcanoes-A
visit to the great volcano-Native account of the
god by whom it was supposed the crater was
inhabite t —nterview of the missionaries with a
priestee; of 'he volcano at Hawaii- Visit of Kapiolanz  a chief woman, professing the Christian
faith, to the volcano-Her descent to the craterEngaging in the worship of the true God-Descrip.
tion of the visit of a priestess to the chiefs-Notice
of the ruins of some of the heathen temples-House
of Keave-Practice of sorcery-Methods employed by sorcerers.
IN the brief account which was furnished, of the
circumstance which marked the first arrival of
the missionaries from America among the Sandwich Islanders, incidental reference was made to
some of the features of that system of idolatry
which had prevailed in the islands. We propose,
in this chapter, to present a more detailed account of their worship and mythology; though,
from the illiterate character of the received superstitions, there being no sacred writings to
appeal to, it would be vain to expect a very luminous or systematic description of them. The
principal objects of worship to the natives were




112        MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. V.
deified men or animals; and they were either
national or local, there not only being deities
considered to preside over remarkable spots, but
particular chiefs having often an idol representing the tutelar god of his family or tribe.
Keoroeva was one of the ancient gods of
Maui, prior to its subjugation by Tamehameha.
The body of this idol was of wood, and attired
in garments of native cloth; the head and neck
were formed of a fine basket or wicker work,
and covered over with red feathers, which were
so curiously wrought in as to resemble the skin
of a beautiful bird; * a native helmet was placed
upon the idol's head, from the crown of which
long tresses of human hair hung over its shoulders: its mouth, like those of most of the Hawaiian idols, was large and extended.
In all the temples dedicated to the worship of
this god, the image was placed within the inner
apartment, on the left hand side of the door, and
immediately before it stood the altar, on which
the various offerings presented were placed. It
has not been ascertained whether human victims
were ever sacrificed to it; but large offerings, of
the most valuable description, were frequently
made. Very common presents were hogs, taken
to the temple alive; the large ones were led,
and the smaller ones carried in the arms of the
priest into the presence of the idol. The priest
then pinched the ears or the tail of the pig till it
made a squeaking noise, when he addressel the


* An idol of this kind is deposited in the Missionary lMuseuan, Blomfield Street, London.




RCiAP. v.]    SANDWICH ISLANDS.          113
god, saying,   Here is the offering of one of
your devotees," naming the owner of the pig.
A hole was then made in the pig's ear, a piece
of cinet, formed of the fibres of the cocoa-nut
husk, was fastened in it, and the pig was set at
liberty until the priest had occasion for him.
In consequence of this mark, which distinguished the sacred hog, he was allowed to range the
district at pleasure; and, whatever depredations
he might commit, driving him away from the
enclosures was the only punishment allowed to be
inflicted. Nor was it to Keoroeva's hogs alone
that these privileges were granted, the same lenient conduct was observed towards all the sacred
pigs, to whatever idol they had been offered.
Tika, a female idol, ivas also held in great
veneration by the people of Maui, receiving
nearly the same homage as Keoroeva; and, in
the adjacent island of Ranai, amongst many inferior idols, were two large carved stone images,
representing the deities supposed to preside over
the sea, and worshipped by fishermen.
Mooaru,(king of lizards or alligators,) a shark,
was also a celebrated marine god, worshipped by
the inhabitants of Morokai, another island in the
neighbourhood. To this idol a temple had formerly been erected on almost every point of land
projecting any distance into the sea; and here
the first fish of each kind, from the many shoals
which arrive every year on their coast, was offered by the fishermen to the god; it was his influence, they imagined, which drove the fish to
their shores. It is probable, that, in some remote
period, they had observed the shark chasing
L2




114.       MISSIONARY RECORDS.     [CHAP. V,
or devouring these fish, as they passed along
amongst their islands; and had, therefore, been
led to deify the monster, from supposing themselves indebted to him for their supplies.
Besides the sea gods, whom they thus held in
veneration, the natives of the Sandwich Islands
had also gods, who, they believed, controlled
the winds and the weather; and to whom, during a storm, or other season of danger at sea, they
offered up a particular kind of prayer. On these
occasions, their dread of perishing frequently led
them to make vows to some favourite deity; and,
if they reached the land, it was their first business to repair to the temple, and fulfil their vows.
These vows were most sacred engagements, and
it was expected that, sooner or later, some judgment would not fail to overtake those who neglected to perform them. It is not improbable,
that the priests of these idols, in order to maintain their influence over the people, either poisoned the delinquents, or caused them to sustain
some other injury.
Karaipahoa was also a famous idol, originally
belonging to Morokai: it was a middle-sized
wooden image, curiously carved; the arms were
extended, the fingers spread out, the head ornamented with human hair, and the widely.xtended mouth armed with rows of sharks' teeth.
It was stated by the natives, that the wood of
which this idol was made was so poisonous,
that whoever drank the water in which a small
piece of it had been steeped, would certainly die
in a few hours. It is known that the natives
use several kinds of vegetable poison, and, pro



EIIhAP. V.]  'SANDWICH ISLANDS.       11l5:bably, the wood of, which the idol was made
might possess some poisonous property; but the:report of the virulence of the poison can only
be regarded as one of the many stratagems so
frequently employed, by chiefs and priests, to
maintain their influence. A small image of the
same god was formed of nioi, a hard yellow
wood, of which idols were usually made. This
was left at Morokai, the original being always
carried about by Tamehameha, and placed under
his pillow whenever he slept.
The traditional history given by the natives,
of the original idol, is, that in the reign of one
of the ancient kings of Morokai, there lived a
great gambler, who, in playing one day at a Hawaiian game, lost all that he had, except one pig,
and having dedicated this animal to his god, he
durst not stake it on any hazard. In the evening, after falling asleep on his mat, his god appeared to him in a dream, directing him to go
and play again on the following day, and stake
this pig on his success, in a particular part of
the play. He awoke in the morning, did as the
god had directed, and was remarkably successful
through the \iay. Before he returned home in
the evening, \e went to the temple of his idol,
and there dedlkated the greater part of his gain,.
During his sleep that night, the god appeared to
him again, and requested him to go to the king,
and tell him, that a clump of trees would be seen
growing in a certain place in the morning; and
that, if he would have a god made out of one of
them, he would reside in the image, and impart
to it his power; signifying also that the gambler,




116        MISSIONARY REOORbS.   [CHAP. V.
whose' name was Kaneakama, should be his
priest.
Early the next morning, the man who had
received the communication from his god, went
and delivered it to the king, by whom he was
directed to go with a number of men to cut down
one of the trees, and carve it into an image. As
they approached Karuakoi, a small valley on the
side of one of the mountains in Morokai, they
were surprised at beholding a clump of trees
where there had been none before, the gods having caused them to grow up in the course of the
preceding night; and into these trees, Taue and
some other gods are reported to have entered.
When the party arrived at the spot, the gods, by
some sign, directed Kaneakama which tree to
cut down. Upon which they began to work
with their stone hatchets; but, the chips flying
on the bodies of some of them, they instantly
expired. Terrified at the dreadful power of the
wood, the others threw down their tools, and refused to fell the tree; but being urged by Kaneakama, they resumed their work, not, however, until they had covered their bodies and
faces with native cloth, and the leaves of the ti
plant, leaving only a small aperture opposite one
of their eyes. Instead of their hatchets, they
took their long daggers, or pahoas, with which
they cut down the tree, and carved out the
image. From this circumstance, the natives say,
the-idol derived its name, Karaipahoa; which
is, literally, dagger-cut or carved; from karih,
to chip with an adze, or carve, and pahoq, a,
dagger.  With the exception of the deities




:'cAP. V.]   SANDWICH ISLANDS.         117:iext to be mentioned, no god was so much
dreaded by the people as Karaipahoa: of all
who were supposed to have died by poison, it
was said that they had been slain by him.
In the Sandwich Islands, as in other heathen
countries, the most prevalent superstitions were
those arising out of local associations, and from
the powerful impressions produced upon the
senses by imposing scenery. In one instance,
a flickering light in the neighbourhood of
swampy ground, was supposed to be a powerful war-god, whom they described as flying
abroad in the evening, embodied in a flame resembling the tail of a comet; and, on another
occasion, when a party of the missionaries wished
to ascend the mountain of Mouna Kea, no entreaties of theirs could induce the natives, whom
they had engaged as guides, to go with them so
far as the summit. They could not learn whether any, who had made the experiment, had pe —
rished amongst the snow which covere/i the top
of the mountain; but the popular belief seemed
to be, that the gods resided there, and that some,
in attempting the ascent, had been turned to.
stone.
But of all the objects of superstition which
the force of grand natural phenomena has suggested to the imagination of the Sandwich
Islanders, none appears to have exercised so potent or terrible an influence over their minds as
Pele, the goddess of the volcano, A traditional
story, in which, as commonly happens, much
that is fabulous is mixed up with, perhaps, a portion of the real, will serve to give an idea of the




118        MISSIONARY RECORDS.   [CHAP. V.
kind of associations which they had blended with
her name.
For many generations, the horua has been a
popular amusement in the Sandwich Islands, and
is still practised by many. It consists in sliding
down a hill on a narrow sledge, and those who,
by strength or skill in balancing themselves,
slide farthest, are considered victorious. It is
said, that in the reign of an ancient king of Hawaii, Kahavari, chief of Puna, and one of his
companions, went on a certain occasion to amuse
themselves at the horua, on the sloping side of
a hill, which is still called Ka horua ana o Kahavari, (the sliding place of Kahavari.) Vast
numbers of the people collected at the bottom of
the hill to witness the game, and a company of
musicians and dancers repaired to the spot, to add
to the amusement of the spectators. The dance
had begun, and amidst the sound of drums and
the songs of the musicians, the horua commenced
between Kahavari and his companion. Amongst
other spectators, Pele, the goddess of the volcano, came down from Kirauea, to witness the
sport; she stood on the top of a hill, in the form
of a woman, and challenged Kahavari to slide
with her. He accepted the offer, and they set
off together down the hill.  Pele, less acquainted with the art of balancing herself on the
narrow sledge than her rival, was beaten, and
Kahavari was applauded by the spectators, as
he returned up the side of the hill. Before they
started again, Pele asked the chief to give her
his sledge; and he, supposing her to be no more
than a native woman, replied abruptly in the




tC'A-P. V.]   SANDWICH ISLANDS.          119
n:6negative; at the same time preparing himself
once more to shoot down the hill. Incensed at
his rudeness, Pele stamped on the ground, and
'i an earthquake followed, which rent the hill in:sunder. She called aloud, and liquid fire and
lava arose; while assuming her supernatural
form, with these irresistible ministers of vengeance, she followed him down the steep. When
Kahavari reached the bottom, he arose; and, on
looking behind, saw Pele, accompanied by thunder and lightning, earthquake and streams of
burning lava closely pursuing him. He took
up his broad spear, which he had stuck in the
ground at the beginning of the game, and, accompanied by his friend, fled for his life. The
musicians, dancers, and crowds of spectators,
were instantly buried beneath the fiery torrent,
which continued to pursue the chief and his
friend, bearing the enraged goddess upon its
foremost wave. As Kahavari came within view
of his own house, he threw off his cloak of netted
ti leaves to facilitate his flight. The first familiar object he met was his favourite hog, which
he had barely time to salute; the next was his
mother, to whom he exclaimed, "Compassion
great to you; close here, perhaps, is your death:
Pele comes devouring!" Leaving her, he met
his wife Kanakawahine; he saluted her. The
burning torrent approached, and she said, " Stay
with me here, and let us die together;" to which
he answered, ' No, I go, I go;" and, as he saluted his two children, added, 'C I grieve for you
two." The lava now rolled near, and Kahavari
ran until a deep chasm arrested his progress:




120


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. V.


here he laid down his spear, and on it walked
safely over, and when his friend called to him
for help, he laid down his spear again, and drew
him securely after. By this time Pele was coming down the chasm with accelerated motion,
and though he met his sister also in his flight,
he had only time to exclaim, " Alas, for you!"
as he hastened to the sea shore. His younger
brother had just landed from his fishing canoe,
and had hastened to his house to provide for the
safety of his family, when Kahavari arrived; he
and his friend leaped into the canoe, and with
his broad spear paddled out tosea. P6le, perceiving his escape, ran to the shore, and hurled
after him, with prodigious Torce, huge stones
and fragments of rock, which fell thickly around,
but did not strike his canoe. When they had
paddled a short distance from the shore, the east
wind sprung up; he fixed his broad spear upright in the canoe, which answering the double
purpose of mast and sail, they soon reached the
island of Maui.
In this story it is not difficult to separate the
truth from the fiction, and absurd as are the incidents detailed in it, there is much in its general
representations which is true to the habits and
character of the people. We may notice especially the low estimation in which it shows the
females to have been held, the wretched state of
their domestic society, and the deplorably feeble
degree, in which, the fond attachments and charities which in civilized and Christian life endear
the different members of a family to each other,
appear to have existed. This is not more. evi



iiA I~p. V.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.          121
dent, from the facts themselves, than from the:anner in which they are often told.   The
absence of affection discovered by Kahavari,
when, notwithstanding the entreaties of his wife,
he could leave her with his children, and his
mother, to certain destruction, seldom provokes
any reprehension from the narrator: no censure
is passed on his unjust seizure of the canoe belonging to his brother, who was engaged in
saving his own family; while his adroitness in
escaping the dreadful calamity, of which he had
been the sole cause, is applauded in the strongest
terms. The natives were accustomed to point
out a number of rocks in the sea, which they
said were thrown by Pele, to sink the canoe in
which the chief and his friend escaped.
Such being the superstitions connected, in the
Sandwich Islands, with volcanic eruptions, and
other similar phenomena, it is not surprising that
the natives generally should evince a strong objection to approach the crater of a volcano:
when by any means they are induced to do so,
their dread of offending the goddess is such as
to induce them strictly to abstain from digging
up the- sand or throwing stones, and even from
quenching their thirst with the sacred berries,
which grow in profusion around. They believe
that, by so doing, they should incur the wrath of
the offended deity, who would either rise up out
of the crater in volumes of smoke, send up large
stones to fall upon them, or cause darkness and
rain to overtake them, so as to prevent them from
finding their way back.
In the " Narrative of a Visit to the Interior
M




122


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. V.


of the Island," etc., in 1823, during which the
writer, in company with some of his missionary
brethren, discovered one of the most remarkable
exhibitions of volcanic phenomena in the world, it
is remarked of the party, that on their approach
to the crater, in passing along they observed the
natives who had previously refused to touch any
of the ohelo berries, now gather several bunches,
and after offering a part to Pele, eat them very
freely. They did not use much ceremony in
their acknowledgment, but when they had
plucked a branch containing several clusters of
berries, turned their faces towards the part
whence the greatest quantity of smoke and vapour issued, and breaking the branch they held
in their hand in two, threw one part down the
precipice, saying at the same time, " Pele, here
are your ohelos; I offer some to you, some I
also eat;" and they believed that, after such
acknowledgment, they might eat the fruit with
safety.
Some inconvenience arose, on the same occasion, from the natives believing that there was
but one situation, and that near the edge of the
crater, where Pele would permit the party to
spend the night. They accordingly built a hut
on a pile of rocks overhanging the frightful
abyss, at a distance of not more than four feet
from the precipice, and spent the night in talking of the wonderful achievements of Pele, whose
primeval abode, with that of the other deities of
the volcano, they believed to be in the fiery
depths before them. The conical craters, they
said, were their houses, where they frequently




: HAP. V.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS,


123:amused themselves by playing at a game called
Rouane; the roaring of the furnaces and the
crackling of the flames, they said, were the music
accompanying their dance, and the red flaming
surge was the surf wherein they played, sportively
swimming on the rolling wave.
Their account of the volcano was, that it had
been burning from time immemorial, and was
occupied by a family of volcanic deities, who
formerly came from Tahiti. This family appears to have been extremely numerous, consisting of a number of sisters, some of whose names,
such as Heaven-rending, Cloud-holder, etc., etc.,
seem to have been very appropriate to the place
of their abode. Whenever the natives spoke of
them, it was as dreadful beings, removing from
their residence to different parts of the island,
and always travelling, not orn errands of mercy,
but to receive offerings or execute vengeance.
Sometimes their arrival in a district was foretold
by the priests of the leiaus there, and always
announced by a convulsive trembling of the
earth, a sudden fire in their houses, (craters,)
flashes of lightning, and the roar of thunder.
The whole island was considered as bound to pay
them tribute, or support their leiaus and devotees;
and whenever the chiefs or people failed to send
the proper offerings, or incurred their displeasure
by insulting them or their priests, or breaking
the tabu of their domains in the vicinity of the
craters, they would spout out lava, or taking a
subterranean passage, march to some of their
houses in the neighbourhood of the offending
party's residence, and from thence come down




124        MISSIONARY RECORDS.    [CHAP. V.
upon the delinquents with all their dreadful
vengeance. If a sufficient number of fish were
not taken to them by the inhabitants of the sea
shore, they would go down, and with fire kill the
fish, fill up the shallow places with lava, and
destroy all the fishing ground. It was, therefore, to avert these dreadful consequences of their
displeasure, that vast numbers of hogs, some
alive and others cooked, were thrown into the
craters during the time they were in action, or
when they threatened an eruption; and also,
during an inundation, many were thrown into
the rolling torrent of lava, to appease the gods,
and stay its progress.
In the year 1823, a woman, calling herself a
priestess of Pele, (it is difficult to say how far
her own infatuation, or a desire to impose upon
the credulity of others, was the motive instigating
her,) being present at the preaching of one of
the missionaries, exclaimed immediately after the
discourse,  Powerful are the gods of Hawaii,
and great is Pele, the goddess of Hawaii; she
shall save Maaro," (a sick chief who was then
present.) After this exclamation from the priestess, another began to chant a song in favour of
Pele; and, though their conduct was such as to
lead the missionaries to suspect them of being
intoxicated, some of the company who had listened attentively, persisted in maintaining that
such was not the case, but that they were inspired
by the goddess of the volcano; or that one of
them was the goddess herself in the form of one
of her priestesses. When asked if she had listened to the discourse, the woman replied, that




:H:AP. V.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.          125::she had listened, and understood it. She was
then asked if she thought Jehovah was good,
and those happy who made him their God; she
answered, "He is your best God, and it is right
that you should worship him; but Pele is my
deity, and the great goddess of Hawaii. Kiraua
is the place of her abode. The northern peak
of the volcano is one corner of her house; from
the land beyond the sky in former times she
came." She then went on with the song which
she had thus begun, giving a long account of
the deeds and honours of Pele; and this she
pronounced in such a rapid and vociferous manner, accompanied by such extravagant gestures,
that only here and there a word could be understood. On being farther addressed by the missionary, she did not deny that Jehovah was a
God, but maintained that he was not the only
god; and, in conclusion, asserted with a haughty
air, that Pele was a goddess; that she herself was
Pele, and should never die!
On this assumption, one of the natives, who
had till then stood silent, interrupted her by
accusations against her mischievous and destructive character; enumerating many instances in
which the island had suffered from her malice
and her power. This attack was rather unexpected, and seemed to surprise several of the
company. However, the pretended Pele said,
" Formerly we did overflow some of the land,
but it was only the land of those who were very
wicked people;" (of course intending to appropriate the charge of wickedness to the breaking
of tabu, or the withholding of offerings;) " now
M 2




126        MISSIONARY RECORDS.   [CHAP. V.
we abide quietly in Kiraua:" she then added,
"It cannot be said that, in these days, we
destroy the king's people." She mentioned the
names of several chiefs, and then asked, "Who
destroyed these?  Not Pele, but the rum  of
the foreigners, whose God you are so fond of:
their diseases and their rum have destroyed more
of the king's men than all the volcanoes of the
island." The truth of this retort was painfully
felt by the missionaries who were present, and
who felt how extensively baneful the conduct
and example of men from countries professedly
Christian had proved to the people.
A powerful impression was subsequently made
upon the minds of the natives, and the influence
of the priests and priestesses of the volcanoes
deeply undermined, by the visit of Kapiolani,
a pious chief woman, the wife of Naihi, to the
crater of the volcano.  The following account
of this visit is thus given, in a letter from Mr.
Goodrich, missionary at the nearest station:
"We heard several reports that Kapiolani
intended to visit the volcano, and to go from
thence to Waiakea. Many tried to dissuade
her from going up to Pele's dominion, telling
her that she would certainly be killed and eaten
by Pele. She replied that she would go, and if
Pele killed her and ate her, then they must worship Pele; but if she returned safe and unhurt,
then they must turn and worship Jehovah, for he
was the true God. At another time, a woman
came to Kapiolani, affirming that she was a god,
and calling herself Pele. Kapiolani told her
she was not a god; but she still persisted in it




t:HAP. v.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


127!that she was, and, in order to prove her words,
said, that she had a palapala. Kapiolani told
her to take it out and read it; she at first refused,
but at last Kapiolani laid her commands upon
her, when she took out a small piece of tapa,
with a few crooked marks upon it, and muttered
over something to prove her divinity. Naihi,
the husband of Kapiolani, asked her by the way,
if she would eat some fish and poi, to which she
replied in the negative, adding, that she was a
god, and did not want any thing to eat. Kapiolani then told her that all she had said was
false, and that she had a palapala by which she
could prove that she was no god.  She then
took out her hymn book, and read to her of the
true God; on hearing which, Pele immediately
forsook her, confessing that she was no god.
She was then asked again if she would eat some
fish and poi, which she readily accepted, and
ate heartily. Kapiolani then reprimanded her
sharply, for imposing upon and deceiving the
people, and ordered her to go back and work for
her living.
"Towards the latter part of December, we
heard that Kapiolani was on her way to the
volcano. I set out immediately, to go up and
meet her, and accompany her down. I met her
about twelve o'clock on the eastern side of the
crater; and, truly, it was a happy and an affecting scene.  She extended her friendly hand
and clasped mine, but could not speak for a time;
but, when she did, the first words she uttered
were, that she was very hungry for the word of
life, for it had been a long time since she had




128        MISSIONARY RECORDS.   [CHAP. V.
heard any preaching.   When seated at the
brink of the crater, at the house prepared for
her accommodation, her first request was, that I
would select a hymn for singing, and engage in
prayer. The next daywe all descended, fifty
or sixty in number, to the black ledge, on
the edge of which we united in singing and
prayer.  Kapiolani and her attendants, went
about one quarter of the way round upon the
black ledge, and then returned with eight or ten
companions; I then went round the west side,
and to the south end of the place. At the time
we made the tour of the island, the whole of this
end was liquid and boiling; it now appeared to
have been raised up more than a hundred feet,
so that it did not look like the same place. On
my return, I descended to the bottom at the
north end; and lastly, crossing from west to east,
we descended and ascended on the east side, from
the top of the crater. Sometime in the course
of the following night, a new crater broke out in
the middle of the large one, and by day-light it
had extended thirty or forty rods. As soon as
it was sufficiently light, I descended to the spot::
a part of it was then throwing lava into the air
forty or fifty feet, while the larger part was boiling up like water from a spring.
The crater of this volcano is an immense gulf,
of a crescent form, at least between five and six
miles in circumference, and about one thousand
feet deep; at which depth, it presents at times,
one vast lake of liquid lava, two miles long and
half a mile wide, in the midst and around which
upwards of fifty small conical-shaped craters are




: ILAP. V.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


129


seen, some of them in violent action, emitting
smoke, flame, and boiling lava, which flows
down their sides into the lake of lava in which
these smaller craters appear like so many islands.
When the ignorance and superstitious fears of the
natives are considered in connexion with the terrible effects sometimes produced by eruptions of
the volcano, it is not surprising that it should
be an object of superstitious worship, and of
most appalling dread."
It was some months after this circumstance
occurred, that a priestess of Pele came to Lahaina, in Maui, where the principal chiefs of the
island then resided.  The object of her visit
being noised abroad, much public interest was
excited. Arrayed in her prophetic robes, having the edges of her garments burnt with fire,
and holding a short staff or spear in her hand,
preceded by her daughter, who also was a candidate for the office of priestess, and followed by
thousands of people, she came into the presence
of the chiefs; and, having told who she was,
they asked what communications she had to
make. She replied, that in a trance or vision
she had been with Pele, by whom     she was
charged to complain to them, that a number
of foreigners had visited the volcano, eaten the
sacred berries, broken her houses, thrown down
large stones, etc., and her request was that
the offenders might be sent away. She also assured them that if these foreigners were not banished from the islands, Pele would certainly, in
a given number of days, take vengeance, by inundating the country with lava, and destroying




130         MISSIONARY RECORDS.    [CHAP. VE
the people. She also pretended to have received, in a supernatural manner, Rihoriho's approbation of the request of the goddess. The
crowds of natives, who stood waiting the result
of her interview with the chiefs, were almost as
much astonished as the priestess herself, when
Kaahumanu, and the other chiefs, ordered all
her paraphernalia of office to be thrown into the
fire, told her the message she had delivered was
a falsehood, and directed her to return home,
cultivate the ground for her subsistence, and discontinue deceiving the people.
This answer was dictated by the chiefs themselves. The missionaries at the station, although
they were aware of the visit of the priestess, and
saw her, followed by the thronging crowd, pass
by their habitation on her way to the residence
of the chiefs, did not think it necessary to attend
or interfere, but relied entirely on the enlightened
judgment and integrity of the chiefs, to suppress
any attempts that might be made to revive the
influence of Pele over the people; and in the
result they were not disappointed, for the natives returned to their habitations, and the
priestess soon after left the island, and has not
since troubled them with the threatenings of the
goddess.
It has been already stated, that idolatry was
abolished before the missionaries arrived, but
amongst other vestiges remaining at the time of
the introduction of Christianity, were the ruins of
many of the temples of the idols, and of these a
large temple, called Bukohola, appears to have
been one of the most important. The building




It P. V.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.          131
of it was commenced by Tamehameha, whilst he
was carrying on his schemes of conquest in
Itawaii, and the rest of the Sandwich Islands.
As soon as he had obtained undisputed possession
of the supreme power in Hawaii, he finished
the leiau, dedicated it to Tari, his god of war,
and then proceeded to the conquest of Oahu.
The shape of this temple is an irregular parallelogram, two hundred and twenty-four feet long,
and a hundred wide. The walls, though built
of loose stones, were solid and compact. At
both ends, and on the side next the mountains,
they were twenty feet high, and twelve feet
thick at the bottom, but narrowed gradually
towards the top, where a layer of smooth stones,
six feet wide, was so disposed as to form a pleasant walk. The walls next the sea were not
more than seven or eight feet high, and were
proportionably wide. The entrance to the temple was by a narrow passage, between two high
walls; and, along the avenue, the feet of those who
bore the murdered bodies of the numerous human
victims there offered to the relentless idols trod.
The upper terrace, within the area, was paved
with smooth flat stones brought from a distance;
and at the south end was a kind of inner court,
which might be called the sanctum sanctorum of
the temple, where the principal idol used to
stand, surrounded by a number of images of inferior deities.
In the centre of the inner court was erected
what was called the anu, which was a lofty frame
of wicker work, in shape something like an obelisk, hollow, and four or five feet square at the




MISSIONARY RECORDS.  [CHAI.P V.


bottom. Within this anu stood the priest, as
the organ of communication from the god, whenever a worshipper came to inquire his will. It
was an oracle which the king often consulted;
and, on these occasions, accompanied by two or
three attendants, he would proceed to the door of
the inner temple, and, standing immediately before the obelisk, inquire respecting war and
peace, or any other affair of importance. The
answer was given by the priest in a distinct
and audible voice, though, like those of other
oracles, it was frequently very ambiguous. On
the return of the king, the answer he had received was publicly proclaimed, and generally
acted upon. It was very natural to suspect that,
on such occasions, there must have been some
previous agreement between the king and the
priest; but the natives always deny the fact. On
the outside, near the entrance to the inner court,
was the altar, on which human and other sacrifices were offered. At the time it was visited by
the missionaries, in 1823, the remains of one of
the pillars that supported this altar were pointed
out by the natives, and the pavement around
was strewn with bones of men and animals, the
mouldering relics of the numerous victims once
immolated there. About the centre of the terrace was the spot where the king's sacred house
stood, in which he resided during the season of
strict tabu; and at the north end, the place occupied by the house of the priests, who, with the
exception of the king, were the only persons permitted to dwell within the sacred enclosures.
Holes were visible on the walls all around this




RAP. VI]   SANDWICH ISLANDS;


133': well as the lower terraces, where wooden idols,.of varied size and shape, formerly stood, casting
tjieir hideous stare in every direction. Tairi, or:Kuairimoku, a large wooden image, crowned
with a helmet, and covered with red feathers,
the favourite war god of Tamehameha, was the
principal: to him the leiau was dedicated, and
for his occasional residence it was built.  On the
day when he was brought within its precincts,
vast offerings of fruit, hogs, and dogs, were presented, and no less than eleven human victims
were sacrificed on his altars.  Although the
huge pile now resembles a dismantled fortress,
whose frowning height no longer strikes terror
through the surrounding country; yet it is
scarcely possible to walk over such a Golgotha,
and recal to memory the bloody rites so frequently celebrated within its precincts, without
an involuntary feeling of horror.
Another temple, of considerable importance,
was called the Hare o Keave, (or house of Keave.)
It is situated at Honaunau, formerly the residence
of the kings of Hawaii for many successive generations, and still abounding with monuments
and relics of the ancient idolatry. The house of
Keave, to which was attached the place of refuge
already described, appears to have been a sacred
depository for the bones of departed kings and
princes; most probably erected for the reception
of the bones of the king whose name it bears, and
who reigned in Hawaii about eight generations
back. It is a compact building, constructed of
durable materials, and erected on a bed of lava,
which runs out a considerable distance into the
N




134        MISSIONARY RECORDS.   [CHAP. V.
sea; it is surrounded by a strong fence or paling,
leaving an area in the front and at each end,
about twenty-four feet wide; the pavement is of
smooth fragments of lava, laid down with considerable skill. Several rudely carved male and
female images of wood were placed on the
outside of the enclosure; some on low pedestals,
under the shade of an adjacent tree, others on
high posts, upon the jutting rocks that hang over
the edge of the water; a number stood on the
fence at unequal distances all around; but the
principal assemblage of these frightful figures
was at the south-east end of the enclosed space,
where twelve of them stood in grim array, forming a semicircle around the slumbering dead.
They were placed on a pile of stones, neatly
thrown up in the form of a crescent; some on
small pedestals, and others on pillars eight or ten
feet in height, and curiously carved: the principal idol stood in the centre, and was not so
large as some of the others, but distinguished by
the superior carving of the body, and especially
the head: the idols supposed next in power
were placed nearest to this.  Once they had
evidently been clothed, but at the time these
observations were made, they appeared in the
most indigent nakedness: a few tattered shreds,
rotted by the rain, and bleached by the sun, still
hanging around the neck of one, were all that
remained of the numerous and gaudy garments
in which their votaries had once arrayed them.
A large pile of broken calabashes and cocoa-nut
shells lay in the centre, and a considerable heap
of dried, and partly rotten wreaths of flowers,




;iAP. V.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.           135
jiranches of shrubs and bushes, and fragments
o f tapa, (the accumulated offerings of former;::days,) formed an unsightly mound immediately
Sbefore each of the images. Altogether, the horrid::'stare of these idols, their tattered vestments and? forlorn condition, seemed no improper emblems:of the system they belonged to, distinguished
alike by its cruelty, folly, and wretchedness.
On an attempt being made to obtain admission
to the inside of the house, the strangers were
told that it was tabu, (strictly prohibited,) and
that nothing but a direct order from the king, or
Karaimoku, could open the door; however, by
pushing one of the boards across the door-way
a little on one side, a view of the interior was
obtained.  It contained many large images;
some of wood, very much carved; others of red
feathers, with distended mouths, large rows of
sharks' teeth, and pearl-shell eyes. There were
also several bundles, apparently of human bones,
cleaned, carefully laid up, and placed in different
parts of the house, together with some rich
shawls, and other valuable articles; probably
worn by those to whom the bones belonged, as
the wearing apparel, and other personal property
of the chiefs is usually buried with them.
In connexion with the other superstitions of
the natives of the Sandwich Islands, we must
not forget their opinions of the power of sorcerers. It is a prevalent belief, that an individual,
who possesses the means of employing a sorcerer,
may afflict with painful diseases, and even occasion the death of any person against whom he
may indulge feelings of hatred or revenge. They




136         MISSIONARY RECORDS.    [CHAP. V.
also believe that the sorcerers, by certain incantations, can discover the author or cause of the
disease, and refer it back to the party with whom
it originated. So prevalent are these notions,
that the people generally believe every individual, who does not meet his death by some act
of violence, is destroyed by the immediate power
of an unpropitious deity, by poison, or the incantations of the sorcerers employed by some
cruel enemy.   This belief gives the sorcerers
great influence among the middling and lower
orders; and, in times of protracted sickness, their
aid is almost invariably sought by all who can
procure a dog and a fowl for the sacrifice, and a
piece or two of tapa as a fee for the priest. A
dog and a fowl are all that are necessary for the
ceremony; but the offerings to the god, and the
fees to the priest, are regulated according to the
wealth or rank of the individual on whose behalf
the aid of sorcery is employed.
The most general, amongst the various ceremonies performed on these occasions, is what
may be termed the broiling fire, a kind of sorcery
used to discover the person whose incantation
has induced the illness of the party for whom it
is performed. When a chief wishes to resort to
it, he sends for a priest, who, on his arrival,
receives a number of hogs, dogs, and fowls, together with several bundles of tapa. Before he
commences any of his operations, all persons,
except the parties immediately concerned, retire
from the house, which the priest tabus, and prohibits strangers from entering; he then kindles
a small fire somewhere near the couch of the




CHIAP. v.]   SANDWICH ISLANDS.           137
invalid, and covers it with stones. This being
done, he kills one of the dogs by strangling it,
and cuts off the head of one of the fowls, muttering all the while his prayers to the god he is
invoking: the dog, fowl, and pig, if there be
one, is then cut open, embowelled, and laid on
the heated stones; the priest continuing his incantations, and watching, at the same time, the
offerings broiling in the fire. A small part only
of these offerings is eaten by the priest, the rest
remain in the fire until consumed; when the
priest lies down to sleep, and, if his prayers are
answered, he informs the poor sufferer, on awaking, who or what is the cause of his sickness.
Additional presents are then made to the god,
and other prayers offered, that the sickness may
seize the person whose incantations in the first
instance caused it; or, if it be the consequence
of any delinquency towards the god on the part
of the sufferer, that he would abate his anger,
and remove the disease. Sometimes, however,
the priest, during his sleep, has no revelation or
dream; in which case he informs his employers,
on awaking, that he has not succeeded, and that
another ceremony must be prepared before he
can satisfy them respecting the cause of the sickness. On such occasions, the unsuccessful priest
is often dismissed, and another sent for to try his
influence with the god.
Different priests employ different prayers or
incantations, and are careful to keep the knowledge of them confined to their own families;
as each one supposes, or wishes the people to
think, his own form the best; hence the natives,
N2




138         MISSIONARY RECORDS.    [CHAP. V.
when talking on this subject, will often say,
" A powerful prayer has such a one:" and the
priest or sorcerer, who is supposed to have most
influence with the god, is most frequently employed by the people, and hence derives the
greatest emoluments from his profession. Thus
the poor deluded people are led to imagine, that
the beings they worship are continually exerting
their power against each other; or that the
same god who, when a small offering only was
presented, would allow sickness to become fatal
to his victim, would, for a large offering, restrain
his anger, and withdraw the disease. The sorcerers were a distinct class among the priests of
the island, and their art appears to possess an
equal antiquity with the other parts of that cruel
system of idolatry, by which the people were so
long oppressed. Happily, it is now falling into
merited desuetude; for, though it has survived
the destruction of the national idolatry, and is
still practised by many, it is entirely discontinued by the principal chiefs in every island,
and by all who attend to Christian instruction.




:HAP. VI..]  SANDWICH ISLANDS,


'139


CHAPTER VI.:'Former frequency of war in the Sandwich IslandsPreliminary arrangements-Employment of diviners to ascertain the will of the gods-Offering of
human sacrifices-Ancient arms, weapons, feather
helmets, cloaks, and other war dresses- Tairi, the
Hawaiian god of war-Idols carried before the
armies going to battle- Conduct of the priests of
the god of war-Notice of the last war in Hawaii,
occasioned by the abolition of idolatry-Death of
the idolatrous chief and his wife, on the field of
battle-Treatment of the vanquished-Intimate
connexion between the wars and superstition of the
people- Usages observed at the death of chiefsCutting off the hair, knocking out the teeth, cutting the ears, and tatauing the tongue-Elegiac
ballads-Introduction of the rites of Christian
burial-Belief in a future state-Prevalence of
infanticide-Reasons for the commission of the
crime.
LIKE many other parts of the world, the Sandwich Islands appear to have suffered much from
the ravages of war. Till of late, their mutual
political relations have been favourable to its
prevalence. The whole group of islands has seldom, if ever, been united under one authority;
in general, separate governments, and independent kings or chiefs, have existed in each of the
large islands; and sometimes the six great divisions of Hawaii have been under as many distinct rulers or chieftains. The inclinations or
interests of these rulers often interfering with
each other, the natural consequence was, frequent
disputes, and, ultimately, an appeal to arms. A




140        MISSIONARY RECORDSo [CHAP. Vi,
pretext for war was seldom wanting, when one
party thought themselves sufficiently powerful to
invade with success the territories of another.
In the modes of warfare customary among
the islanders, was exhibited much of their natural character. Their armies were composed of
individuals from every rank in society. No
distinct class were trained exclusively to the use
of arms, but there were always men celebrated
for their courage and martial achievements.
There are many now living, who, in the former
part of Tamehameha's reign, left their peaceful
homes and employments, as agriculturists or
fishermen, to follow his fortunes in the field;
most of these have since resumed their original
pursuits.
As a means of producing skill in the use of
the various weapons employed in battle, almost
all the men were frequently engaged in martial
exercises, or warlike games. One of these consisted in slinging stones at a mark; and in this
exercise they were extremely dexterous. They
also practised throwing the javelin, as well as
catching and returning it when thrown at them;
or warding it off so as to avoid receiving injury.
Wrestling was also a favourite exercise with the
more athletic youth, and used as a preparation to
the single combats usual in almost every battle.
Sometimes there were held sham fights, when
large numbers engaged, and each party advanced
and retreated, attacked and defended, as if employed in actual engagement. Admirably constructed by nature, with finely formed bodies,
supple joints, strong and active limbs, and ac.
3




HAP. VI.]    SANDWICH ISLANDS.


141:utistomed to a light and easy dress, the natives;:took great delight in these gymnastic and war-:' like exercises, spending in them no inconsider-:table portion of their time.
Whenever war was in contemplation, it was::customary with the diviners and priests to slay
certain appointed victims, and consult the gods.
On these occasions, hogs and fowls were generally used. In sacrificing these victims, the
diviners observed the manner in which they:I expired, the appearance of the entrails, and other
signs; the priests, at the same time, offering
their prayers: if no answer was received to
these petitions, and the appearances presented
by the victims were unsatisfactory, war was
deferred.  If, on the contrary, the war god
revealed his will by a vision or dream, or some
other supernatural means, (and on pretence of
awaiting these, the priests, at such times, usually
slept in the temple where the god was kept,)
they communicated the decision to the king and
warriors, and war was either undertaken or relinquished accordingly.  If the expedition in
contemplation was of any magnitude or importance, or the danger which threatened imminent,
human sacrifices were previously offered to the
war gods of the nation. The object of these,
was to ensure their co-operation in the destruction
of their enemies. It does not appear to have
been imagined that these gods exerted any protecting influence over their devotees; but, rather,
that their presence and their power destroyed the
strength of their enemies, and filled their hearts
with terror and dismay.  Sometimes the priests




142        MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. VI.
proposed that human victims should be slain;
sometimes the gods themselves were said to
require them, promising victory on condition
of their being offered; and, at other times, when
the consultation of their oracles had been fruitless,
human sacrifices were offered before again inquiring their will, as a likely means of conciliating
their favour.  If any enemies had been taken
captive, the victims were selected from amongst
their number; if not, individuals who had broken
tabu, or rendered themselves obnoxious to the
chiefs, were fixed upon. On these occasions, a
message was sent to the chief under whose
authority they were, and at the appointed time
he sent his men, who generally despatched them
with a stone or club, without any notice, and
then carried them away to the temple: sometimes,
however, they were bound and taken alive to the
leiau, and slain in the outer court, immediately
before being placed on the altar. It does not appear that they were slain in the idol's presence,
or within the temple; but either just without it, or
at the place where they were first taken: in both
cases, they appear to have endeavoured to preserve
the body entire, or mangled as little as possible,
The number offered at one time varied according
to circumstances. From two to twenty have been
offered at once. When carried into the temple,
every article of clothing they might have on was
taken off, and they were laid in a row, with their
faces downwards, on the altar immediately before
the idol. The priest then, in a kind of prayer,
offered them to the gods; and; if any offerings of
hogs were presented at the same time, they were




CHAP. 'Vi.,]  SAN1NVICH '15LANIS.


143


afterwards piled at right angles across the human
bodies, and in this manner the whole were left
to rot and putrefy together.
War was seldom declared without the approbation of the gods, obtained through the medium of the priests; though it is probable the
anrswer of the diviners was generally given with
due regard to the previously known views of the
king and chiefs.
Sometimes, the question of war or peace was
deliberated in a public meeting of chiefs and warriors, and these popular assemblies furnished occasion for the most powerful displays of native
eloquence, in the bold and imaginative character
of which there was a striking resemblance to
that of their neighbours of the South Sea Isles;
at once bold in sentiment, beautiful in imagery,
and powerful in effect.
As soon as war was declared, a council of the
king, warriors, chiefs, and priests, fixed the
period and place for commencing it, and also the
manner of carrying it on; and, in the meantime, messengers of war were sent to the districts and villages under their authority, requiring the services of their tenants, in numbers proportionate to the magnitude of the expedition.
These were ordered to come with their weapons,
and with all manner of portable provisions.
The summons was, in general, obeyed with alacrity; and, as their spears, clubs, javelins, and
slings were usually suspended in some convenient part of every house, little delay was occasioned by the need of arming themselves, and




144


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. VI.


they soon joined the forces at the appointed rendezvous.
Whenever the people were required en masse,
an officer called the Tuahana was sent, whose
duty it was to bring every individual capable of
bearing arms. Sometimes the Uruoki, another
officer, was afterwards despatched; and if he
found any lingering behind, who ought to have
been with the army, he cut or slit one of their
ears, tied a rope round their body, and in this
manner led them to the camp. To remain at
home when summoned to the field, was considered so disgraceful, the circumstance attending
detection so humiliating, and the mark branding the delinquency so indelible, that it was seldom necessary to send round the last named
officer.
In some cases, battles were fought at sea,
when the parties engaged in fleets, amounting
to upwards of one hundred canoes on each side.
The Sandwich Islands not being surrounded
with coral reefs, there is but little smooth water;
it is probable, therefore, that the roughness of
the sea induced them generally to prefer the
land for their theatre of war.
Trusting entirely to their skill in using the
spear, the club; and the sling, they had no
shields or weapons of defence, except the javelin,
which they employed in warding off those that
might be thrown at them; they were very expert in avoiding a stone, if they saw it thrown;
and the spearmen excelled in parrying the
thrusts of their enemies' spears. The warriors
4




1AP. I.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.        145
|ildom went to battle with any other dress than
1E  maro, or narrow girdle, round their loins;
I^some, however, wore a quantity of cloth bound:lrond their heads, and the chiefs were frequently
dressed in their war cloaks and helmets. The
I:cloaks, though they gave the wearers an impos-?:?ing appearance, must have proved an incumi:?ibrance, without affording  much  protection.
Some of the helmets were made of close wickerwork, exactly fitting the head, and were ornai:::mented along the crown. Those worn by the
higher chiefs, though not more serviceable than
the rest, were peculiarly beautiful: they were: made in the form of the Grecian helmets, with
towering crests, and were thickly covered with
glossy red and yellow feathers. Comparatively?useless as they were for the defence of the head,
IEthey increased the effect of the towering height
and martial air of the chiefs, whose stature was
generally above that of the common people.
The cloaks worn by the king and principal
chiefs were distinguished from others by their
length, reaching often below the knees, and even:ito the ancles. The royal colour was yellow, and
no one besides the king was allowed to wear a
cloak made entirely of yellow feathers. Those
of the other chiefs were of red and yellow rhomboidal figures, intermingled or disposed in alternate lines, with sometimes a section of dark purple or glossy black. Tippets were manufactured
of the same materials, and worn by the inferior
chiefss or some of the principal warriors, whose
rank did not entitle them to wear the cloak. In
addition to the helmet and cloak, the high chiefs
0




146


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. VI.


occasionally wore an ornament like a breastplate,
suspended from the neck by finely braided human hair.
After the diviners had been consulted, and their
victims slain, observations were often made upon
the face of the heavens, the passage of clouds
over the sun, or the appearance of the rainbow;
and, if all these augured well, the principal war
god was brought in front of the whole army,
and placed near the king. The priests then addressed a prayer to the gods, urged them to exercise their power, and prove themselves, in the
ensuing engagement, mightier than the gods of
their enemies; promising, at the same time, hecatombs of victims in the event of victory. The
king, or commander in chief, then addressed the
assembled warriors, and, if they were to comm mence the attack, gave the signal for the onset.
The national war god was then elevated above
the ranks, and carried by the priests near the
person of the king, or commander in chief.
Nor was this the only idol borne to the battle,
other chiefs of rank had their war gods carried
near them by their priests; and, if the king or
chief was killed or taken, the god himself was
usually captured also.  The presence of their
deities inspired the warriors with courage, who
supposed their influence essential to victory. A
description of one of these gods may be taken as
a sample of the whole. The image was four or
five' feet high, the upper part wicker-work, covered with red feathers; the face a hideous form;
the mouth armed with triple rows of dogs' or
sharks' teeth; the eyes of mother of pearl; the




PeAp. VI. ]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.          147:ead crowned with a helmet, and -the crest someti mes formed of long tresses of human hair. Arjices were sometimes adopted to increase the
terror which it was hoped, by carrying this
timnage, to produce. There is nothing naturally:repulsive in the countenance of Hevaheva, the
'.priest of Tamehameha's war god; but it is said
ihat, in battle, he often distorted his face into
every frightful form, and uttered most terrific: and appalling yells, which were supposed to pro-:ceed from the god he bore or attended.
It is not to be expected that the profession of
the Christian faith should at once have effected
a discontinuance of the practice of war in the
islands. In bar of such an anticipation, we must:; remember both the recent date of the introduction
of Christianity, and the partiality of its reception.
Still it is gratifying to know, that its influence
has already greatly altered the ferocious and exterminating character of warfare, and that, notwithstanding changes peculiarly favourable to
hostilities, the peace of the entire group of islands
has been only once interrupted during a period of
seventeen years. The principles of clemency, too,
inculcated in the gospel, have been most strikingly exemplified, in the humane chiefs by whom
it has been embraced.
As an instance of this, it is worthy of notice,
that after a late civil war in Tauai, when the
captives were brought before Karaimoku, the
chief against whom they had rebelled, he dismissed many of them with spelling books, and
directed them to go home and dwell in peace,




148        MISSIONARY RECORDS. [C-HAP. VI.
cultivate their lands, learn to read and write, and
worship the true God.
We have already mentioned, that the sudden
and surprising decision, which Rihoriho took to
abolish the superstitious worship and customs of
his country, was not unattended with opposition oni the part of his subjects. Kekuaokalini,
the first cousin of Rihoriho, was at the head of
the combination, which was organized to restore
the ancient system.  He was an enterprising
and restless young man, who, urged on by the
priests, and by his own superstitious reverence
for the gods of his ancestors, took up arms in
their defence. Views of personal ambition were
by some supposed to mingle with his mistaken
zeal for idolatry. He was, however, defeated, in
a decisive battle fought in the year 1819; thus
'leaving his cousin sole and undisputed monarch
of the Sandwich Islands.
The natives point out the place where the
king's troops, led on by Karaimoku, were first
attacked by the idolatrous party. Several small
heaps of stones are shown as the graves of
those who fell in the conflict; as well as a spot,
on which the king's troops formed a line, from
the sea-shore towards the mountains, and drove
the opposing party before them to a rising ground,
where a stone fence, about breast high, enabled
i the enemy to defend themselves for some time,
but from which they were at length driven by a
party of Karaimoku's warriors.   In passing
along towards a place called Tuamoo, the small
tumuli increase in number, and it appears to be




CiHAP. VI.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


149


|B;t this place that Kekuaokalini made his last, stand, rallied his flying forces, and seemed for a
m ioment to turn the scale of victory; but being
weak with the loss of blood, from a wound reii!ceived in the early part of the engagement, he
fainted and fell. However, he soon revived, and,
though unable to stand, sat on a fragment of
lava, and twice loaded and fired his musket on
the advancing party. He now received a ball
in his left breast, and immediately covering his
face with his feather cloak, expired in the midst
of his friends. His wife, Manona, during the
whole of the day, fought by his side with steady
and dauntless courage. A few moments after
her husband's death, perceiving Karaimoku and
his sister advancing, she called out for quarter;
but the words had scarcely escaped from her lips,
when she received a ball in her left temple, fell
upon the lifeless body of her husband, and instantly expired. The idolators, having lost their
chief, made but feeble resistance afterwards; yet
the combat, which commenced in the forenoon,
continued till near sunset, when the king's troops
finding their enemies had either fled or surrendered, returned to Kairua.
Karaimoku grieved much at the death of Kekuaokalani, who was his own sister's son. He
delayed the engagement as long as possible, and,
the same morning that the battle took place,
sent a messenger, addressing the young chief as
his son, and requesting him to refrain from
hostilities until they could have an interview,
and if possible effect an accommodation. But
the message was rejected, and the messenger
o2




150        MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. VI.
obliged to jump into the sea, and swim to
save his life. In the moment of victory, also,
he acted with humanity; and, contrary to the
usual custom, forbad his followers to pursue the
vanquished, or murder them in their retreats.
The heroism of Manona was not a solitary
instance in the history of the female inhabitants
of the Sandwich Islands.  The wives of the
warriors often accompanied their husbands to
battle, and were frequently slain. Their practice, in this respect, resembled that of the Society Islanders on similar occasions. They generally followed in the rear, carrying calabashes of
water, or of poi, a little dried fish, or other portable provision, with which to recruit their husbands' strength when weary, or afford a draught
of water when thirsty or faint; but they followed, more particularly, to be at hand if their
husbands should be wounded.
Some women, more courageous than the rest,
or urged on by affection, advanced side by side
with their husbands to the front of the battle,
bearing a small calabash of water in one hand,
and a spear, a dart, or a stone in the other; and,
in the event of the husbands being killed, they
seldom survived,
The love and the practice of war ranks among
the most direful fruits of sin; it is one of the
chief elements of the savage state, and is the
delight of savages; while the extent to which
the war spirit prevails among any people, affords
no fallacious index of the degree of elevation
above the state of ferocious barbarism  which
they have attained.  The Sandwich Islanders




E EAP. VI.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.         151.lt all the miseries of this dire scourge, in its
u, gnmitigated severity and force; and though the
&inmediate effects of the gospel, while but imper-:fectly understood, and partially received, have; not entirely prevented the outbreaking of war,
the fact, that notwithstanding the changes pecu-:i:;iliarly favourable to war, the peace of the entire: group of islands has been only once interrupted
for the space of seventeen years, demonstrates it
to be a system of peace, and confirms our expectS:`: ation, that in proportion as its principles are
I;:: adopted, and its influence diffused, nation shall;not lift up sword against nation, neither shall
they learn the art of war any more.
In connexion with the death of the chiefs of
the islands, there were formerly many customs
and superstitions observed, some of them highly
injurious to the peace and good order of society.
Amongst the most innocent, was the habit of
cutting the hair, and extracting teeth.  It
does not appear that there existed any prescribed
method of showing grief, by the manner in which
the head was disfigured, but that each one was
left to follow his own taste, and hence arose
every possible variety of tonsure. Sometimes a
small round place only was made bald, just on
the crown; at other times, the whole head was
shaved or cropped close, except round the edge,
where, for about half an inch in breadth, the hair
hung down at its usual length.  Some made
their heads bare on one side, and left the hair on
the other side twelve or eighteen inches long;
and if a chief who had lost a relative or friend,
had his own hair cut in any particular pattern,




152        MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CfiAP. VI.
his followers and dependents usually imitated
him in cutting theirs. Not to cut or shave off
the hair, indicated want of respect towards the
deceased and the surviving friends; but to have
it cut close in any form was enough.
The custom of knocking out some of the front
teeth was also common amongst both sexes, but
chiefly amongst the men. When a chief died,
those most anxious to show their respect for him,
or his family, would be the first to knock out
one of their front teeth with a stone. The chiefs
related to the deceased, or on terms of friendship
with him, were expected thus to exhibit their
attachment to him; and, when they had done so,
their attendants or tenants felt themselves in a
manner obliged to follow their example. Thus,
though more than one tooth was seldom destroyed at one time, the mutilation being repeated on
the decease of every chief of rank or authority,
there were few men to be seen who had arrived
at maturity, before the introduction of Christianity to the islands, with an entire set of teeth;
many, by this custom, had lost the front teeth on
both the upper and lower jaw, occasioning a
great defect in their speech. A few, however,
dared to be singular, and though they must have
seen many deaths, have parted with but few of
their teeth. Among this number is Karaimoku,
a chief next in authority to the king, not more
than one of whose teeth is deficient.
Cutting one or both ears was formerly practised on funeral occasions, but the custom seems
to have gone out of repute. And another badge
of mourning, assumed principally by the chiefs,




:iCHAP, VI.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.           153
l::l was tataning a black spot or line on the tongue,:: in the same manner as other parts of the body
are ^taued.
"".:Inconvenient as many of these usages must
ij: have been, they were still all of them innocent;
but there were others, which, until very recently,:;: were practised on every similar event, which
I:: must be very differently characterized.  One of
these it will suffice to mention. As soon as a
chief had expired, the whole neighbourhood
exhibited a scene of confusion, wickedness, and
cruelty, seldom  witnessed even in the most
barbarous state of society. The people ran to
and fro without their clothes, appearing and acting more like demons than human beings; and
in this state every vice was practised, and almost
every species of crime perpetrated. Houses were
burned, property plundered, even murder sometimes committed, and the gratification of every
base and savage feeling pursued without restraint.
Injuries or accidents, long forgotten, perhaps,
by the offending party, were then revenged with
unrelenting cruelty. Hence, many of the people
of Maui, dreading their recurrence, when Keopuolani was near her end, took their effects
into the enclosure belonging to the missionaries,
hoping to find within their premises a sanctuary
from the general devastation, which they anticipated after her decease.
A custom much more congenial to the feelings
of humanity, and which obtained formerly
amongst the islanders on occasion of the death
of chiefs, was that of singing in a manner resembling the chants of the ancient Peruvians.  The




154          MISSIONARY RECORDS.      [CHAP. VI.
following lines are an interesting specimen of
this kind of death dirge. They were taken down
from the lips of a mourner, who, on entering the
house where the relatives of a deceased governor
of Maui were weeping around his lifeless body,
began to sing in a plaintive tone, accompanying
her lament with every gesticulation expressive of
the most agonizing grief:"Alas! alas! dead is my chief!
Dead is my lord and my friend;
My friend in the season of famine,
I\ly friend in the time of drought,
My friend in my season of need,
My friend in the rain and the wind,
My friend in the heat and the sun,
My friend in the cold from the mountain,
My friend in the storm,
My friend in the calm,
My friend in the eight seas; *
Alas! alas! gone is my friend,
And no more will return!"
A belief in a future state prevailed among the
Sandwich Islands, as well as most of the other
tribes inhabiting the isles of the Pacific. On
one occasion, talking with the missionaries on
this subject, the people said, they had heard of it
through a native priest, who, in the time of Tamehameha, told that prince, that at his death he
would see his ancestors; and that, hereafter, all
the kings, chiefs, and people of Hawaii would
live again. Their idea appeared to be, that there
were two gods, who conducted the departed
A figurative term for the channels between the different
islands.




HAP. VI.]     SANDWICH ISLANDS.          155
spirits of their chiefs to some place in the heavens,
wi::'here it was supposed the spirits of kings and
f:::chiefs sometimes dwelt, and afterwards returned
'.:'ith them to earth, where they accompanied the
i;,;ovements, and watched over the destinies of
their survivors. A priest of one of these gods::: informed Tamehameha, by pretended revelation,
that, when he should die, the god would take his
spirit to the sky, and accompany it to the earth
again, when his body would be reanimated and::,' youthful; that he would have his wives, and
' resume his government in Hawaii; and that, at
the same time, the existing generation would see;, and know their parents and ancestors; and all
the people who had died would be restored to
', life. These, the people said, were all the parti-::culars they knew; but they added, that though,
at the priest's suggestion, many valuable offerings were made to his god, he proved a false
prophet, for Tamehameha died, and did not come
to life again.
We will close this imperfect account of the
former manners and usages of the Sandwich
Islanders, by a reference to a species of crime, in
their practice of which an unhappy resemblance
obtained between them and the Society Islanders;
we mean that of infanticide. It was not until
the introduction of Christianity that any correct information could be obtained as to the
extent to which it had prevailed. One dreadful
instance will sufficiently prove the indifference
with which this unnatural practice wea regarded
by the natives.




156        MISSIQNARY RECORDS. [CHAP. VI.
A man and his wife, tenants of Mr. Young,
an Englishman, who for many years held under
the king the small district of Kukuwau, had one
child, a fine boy. A quarrel arose between them,
on one occasion, respecting this child; the wife
having refused to accede to the wishes of the
husband, he, in revenge, caught up the child by
the head and the feet, broke its back across his
knee, and then threw it down in its expiring
agonies before her. Struck with the atrocity of
the act, Mr. Young seized the man, led him
before the king, Tamehameha, who was then at
Waiakea, and requested that he might be punished. The king inquired, " To whom did the
child he has murdered belong?" Mr. Young
answered, that it was his own son. "Then,"
said the king, "neither you nor I have any right
to interfere; I cannot say any thing to him."
Infanticide appears to have prevailed throughout all the islands, and amongst every class of
people, with the exception of the highest order of
chiefs. However numerous the children amongst
the lower order of people, parents seldom reared
more than two or three, and many spared only
one; all the others were destroyed, sometimes
shortly after birth, and generally during the first
year of their age.
The means by which this dreadful act was accomplished were numerous, and many of them
unfit to be described.  Sometimes they were
strangled, but more frequently buried alive. In
some cases, when the child was sickly, and the
parents had grown tired of nursing and attending




HAP- VI.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


157


1j, in order to avoid further trouble, they have:been known to bury it at once; and thus, when
the child has cried more than the parents, particularly the mother, could patiently bear, instead of soothing the little sufferer by her fond
caresses, she has stopped its cries by thrusting a
piece of cloth into its mouth, dug a hole in the
floor of the house, and, perhaps within a few
yards of her bed and the place of her daily
meals, deposited her helpless babe in an untimely grave! The floor of the house was a
common sepulchre for children thus barbarously
murdered, and, on many occasions, the parents
joined in treading down the earth upon their innocent victims.
Among the Society Islanders, who, while
they were idolaters, probably practised infanticide more than any other natives of the Pacific, if the child survived only one day, it was
saved.   Hence the parties interested in the
destruction of the child, generally strangled it
soon after its birth. But, among the Sandwich
Islanders, the infant, after living a week, a
month, or even a year, was still insecure, as
some were destroyed even after they were able
to walk.
It is dreadful to believe the fact; but it is
one which all the information that could be obtained on the subject has tended to confirm, that
two-thirds of the children born in the Sandwich
Islands perished by infanticide. Many parents
murdered three or four infants, while they spared
only one. But, even supposing not more than
P




158         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [RIAP. VI.
half the children were thus cut off, what an
awful spectacle of depravity is thus presented!
The reasons given for this practice manifest a
degree of depravity not less affecting. The missionaries were informed that, amongst the Marquesians, children were sometimes, during seasons of extreme scarcity, killed and eaten by
their parents, to satisfy hunger. With the Society Islanders, the rules of the Areoi institutions, and family pride, were the principle motives for this practice.  With the exception of
the latter, which operated in a small degree, none
of these motives actuated the Sandwich Islanders. Those, however, by which they were influenced, were equally criminal.   Some of the
natives state, that children were formerly sacrificed to the sharks infesting their shores, and
which, through fear, they had deified; but this
account seems to be of doubtful authenticity.
The principal motive with the greater part of
those who practised it, was idleness; and the
reason most frequently assigned, even by the
parents themselves, for the murder of their children, was the trouble of bringing them up. In
general, they are of a changeable disposition,
fond of a wandering life, and find their children an unwelcome restraint, preventing them,
in some degree, from   following their roving
inclinations. Like other savage nations, they
are averse from any more labour than is absolutely necessary; and hence they considered their
children a burden, and were unwilling to cultivate a little more ground, or undertake the small




/I:AP. VII.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.            159
Aldditional labour, necessary to the support of their
offspring, during the helpless periods of infancy:and childhood.
The record of the proceedings of the missionaries, in the prosecution of their great objects,
will now be resumed, and uninterruptedly continued.
CHAPTER VII..First establishment of schools-Meetings for religious conversation and prayer-Study of the native
language-Fitting up a place for public worshipArrival of the king at Oahu-Description of missionaries required-Letter from the governor of
the Russian settlement of Kamtschatka-Iujurious
reports respecting the objects of the mission, circulated by foreigners-Proposed voyage to the Society Islands- Visit of Rihoriho to Tauai-Public
interview between the two kings-Establishment of
the printing press-First printing in Oahu- Visit
of the deputation from the London Missionary Society, with native Christians, to the Islands-Detention of Auna, a native teacher-Invitation to
Mr. Ellis to join the mission-Departure of the
deputation-Return of Mr. Ellis and familyFraternal correspondence between the missionaries
-Religious service, in connexion with the public
commemoration of the death of Tamehameha, and
the accession of Rihoriho to the throne.
IT will be recollected, that the missionary band,
which, under the auspices of the American
Missionary Society, had sailed, in the early part
of 1820, for the Sandwich Islands, had, on




160         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. VII.
reaching the islands, and obtaining permission to
settle in them, divided itself into three parties,
one company locating itself in the island of Hawaii, another at Honoruru in Oahu, and a third
in the island of Tauai.
Among the first arrangements, after obtaining
habitations of the most temporary kind, was an
attempt, at each station, to collect a school, composed both of adults and children. These attempts were more successful than could have
been expected among a people, none of whom
had before attempted to learn the rudiments of
the English language, and whose native language had never been written. The kings, the
chiefs, and the younger members of their families, were the first pupils.
The following extracts from letters of the missionaries, written after they had some months
occupied their respective stations, will present a
connected view of the circumstances and prospects under which their labours had commenced. The first is from Messrs. Bingham
and Loomis, and is dated Oahu, Nov. 19, 1820.
" We have had under our instruction at the
different stations, about ninety pupils, of different
ages, rank, and colour, from the king and royal
family to the outcast in the street: under the
instruction of brother and sister Thurston, and
Thomas Hopu, at Kairua, fourteen; under
brother Loomis, at Towaihai, eight; at Oahu,
under the care of Mr. and Mrs. Bingham,
forty; and under the care of brothers Whitney
and Ruggles, at Tauai, thirty. The station at
Hawaii seems, for some time, to have been strug



:C~itAP. VII.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


161:!gling for existence; it has suffered more affliction by far than the others. First, the behaviour:of William Tenui, one of the native teachers,
~who showed symptoms of defection from  the
cause of God, soon after his arrival at the
islands, was a severe trial; and then the intemperate drinking and discontent of the young king,
which interrupted his studies soon after he began
to read in the New Testament; add to this, the
declared determination of the government to remove from Hawaii to Oahu. These things seem
to require that the island of Hawaii should be
left for a season in all its darkness and pollution.
But most of our pupils there will, in that
case, come here, and still be under our instruction. The king and brother Thurston are expected here soon. The school in this place has
been, on the whole, flourishing; to-day it is made
to feel its first heavy blow: nine of our pupils
are taken away by four or five white men, who
are going to people an uninhabited island near
the equator, about the longitude of Tauai: they
have learned the ten commandments in their
own tongue. This is a mysterious providence;
but, we hope, it will be all for the best. The
station at Tauai is yet attended with the Divine
blessing."
a King Taumarii,"   Messrs. Whitney and
Ruggles write, " appears no less interested in our
object than when we first landed on his island;
he is almost daily contributing to our comfort
and convenience. About the middle of September, he made us a present of two pieces
of land: one about two miles from our house,
r2




162        MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. VII.
in the valley of Wymai; the other in Hanapapa, six miles distant. It is all good land,
yielding taro, potatoes, yams, bananas, sugarcane, and cocoa-nuts, in abundance; there are
also two fish-ponds attached to the lands, which
furnish us with some excellent fish. On both
pieces are forty-eight working men, upon whom
we have a right to call for assistance whenever
we choose: they have built us a convenient cookhouse, the back part of which serves as a lodging place for our domestics. At a moderate calculation, we conclude that the annual produce
of our land is sufficient to support our own family, those who cultivate it, and sixty or seventy
children.  Our school, at present, consists of
about thirty children, and eight or ten adults:
their progress is encouraging. The king is not
so much engaged in learning to read as he has
been, but appears desirous that the children and
youth should be instructed."
It was not to be hoped, however, that adults,
in an untutored state, unaccustomed to any regular employment, would so far overcome their
habits of indolence and dissipation, as to persevere in the drudgery of proceeding slowly
through the grammar of an unknown tongue,
till they could perceive the benefits of learning.
Accordingly, the zeal of this class of pupils soon
began to abate, and their steadiness to decline.
Children were more easily influenced, and more
readily acquired a taste for study. After the
school at Honoruru had been in operation
about three months, principally under the care of
Mrs. Bingham, a quarterly examination was




CHdAP. VII.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.:163.held, in accordance with the practice in New
i England. Several masters of vessels, and other
strangers, were present. All united in express-,ing an agreeable suprise, that so much proficiency should have been made, under such circumstances, and within so short a period.
As a part of the general system by which, it
was hoped, Christianity and civilization might be
communicated to the destitute islands, sabbath
schools also were commenced, and were found to
furnish a happy occasion of conveying religious
instruction.
By the aid of John Honoree, an evening conference was established, at which Divine truth
was taught in a more familiar manner than in
the public services of the missionaries.  At these
meetings for religious improvement, prayer was
offered, both in English and in the Hawaiian language, by the missionaries and their native coadjutors. On these occasions, also, the praises of
the Most High were celebrated by the little missionary band, and the nature and import of this
part of Divine worship, as far as practicable,
explained to the natives.  Soon after their arrival, a fund was raised, by subscription, from commanders of vessels and resident foreigners, for
the board and education of orphans; the children chiefly of European and American fathers
by native mothers.   These constituted, in a
great measure, the first scholars of the missionaries, and appeared to be both pleased and impressed with the instruction communicated, expressing strong desires to be made partakers of
the blessings of salvation. These indications of




164        MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. VII.
good encouraged the missionaries in their labours, and gave a fresh stimulus to their study of
the native language, and their labours in the
school. In the latter they had, for a considerable time, at all the stations, great encouragement. At Oahu, they numbered between thirty
and forty scholars, chiefly of the class above
referred to, whom they endeavoured to instruct
in the first elements of reading in the English
language. It was peculiarly pleasing to the missionaries, to perceive that, after the novelty of
the engagement had subsided, these people still
continued to attend the school.
The curiosity of the natives was at first, as
might be expected, almost unbounded, especially in relation to the females. For some
weeks after the landing of the mission family at
Kairua, the house in which they took up their
abode was crowded from sunrise till dusk; the
door and windows were thronged. From thirty
to forty persons were generally present, and sometimes from eighty to a hundred. Mrs. Thurston
remarks, in a letter written shortly after their
arrival: " For the sake of being alone, I left the
house, and wandered to a retired place in the
neighbourhood, where I sat down under the
shade of a tree; in five minutes I was surrounded by seventy persons; and whenever we
walked out, the crowd followed us, and the house
was left empty. I could not help smiling, to
see the pains they took to obtain a sight of us,
frequently running on before us, and stationing
themselves by the side of the path, in order to
have a full view of our faces."




cgAP. VII.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.,165


i: Much of the interest manifested by the natives,
"in the pursuits and objects of the missionaries,
ideclined as this curiosity subsided; a number,
however, especially at Oahu, and from among;the children of foreigners, continued to attend
their instructions, and of these, such whose years
exceeded those of childhood attended their meetings for religious instruction.  These meetings
were, at first, held in the hut occupied by one of
the missionaries, but, in the month of September,
a native building within the same enclosure as
the mission houses was fitted up as a place of worship. It was first used for this purpose on sabbath
day, the 17th of September, when a discourse,
designed to be dedicatory, was preached fiom
Psalm cxxvii. 1,  Except the Lord build the
house, they labour in vain that build it: except
the Lord keep the city, the watchman waketh but
in vain." The place was well filled, and the day,
especially to the missionaries, was highly interesting. "In our peculiar situation and employment," they say, " far from our friends and from
civil protection, labouring to enlighten and evangelize an unlettered and heathen nation, it becomes us to feel the force of the text, and to
make it a ruling maxim in all our plans, and purposes, and operations: since all our efforts, however well directed, must be altogether in vain
without a Divine blessing.  What has been
done in our work, thus far, we have the happiness to believe God has accomplished by his
gracious hand."
In the month of December, 1820, the king
and the chiefs, who, since the arrival of the




166


MISSIONARY RECORDS. tCHAP. VII.


Thaddeus had resided at Kairua, removed to
Oahu, and it was deemed best for Mr. and Mrs.
Thurston to accompany them, and unite with the
missionaries there, in the study of the language,
and the arrangement of plans for the welfare of the
people. The prospects of usefulness, occasioned
by the favourable disposition of the people, induced the missionaries to request additional aid.
In reference to this subject, Mr. Thurston thus
writes, shortly after his arrival at Oahu: —C We
could now find employment for many more missionaries; and, in a few years, should the Lord
prosper our efforts, we shall need a host of faithful servants of the Lord Jesus. We need none,
and we shall expect none, but such as are devoted heart and soul to the Redeemer and his
cause.  We want men and women who have
souls, and who are crucified to the world, and
the world to them; who have their eyes and
their hearts fixed on the glory of God, in the salvation of the heathen; who will feel willing to
sacrifice every interest, but Christ's; who will
cheerfully and constantly labour to promote His
cause: in a word, those who are real pilgrims
and strangers, such as the apostle mentions in the
11th of Hebrews. Men like these we want; many
such we need, to complete the work which God
in his providence has permitted us to commence."
Shortly after the arrival of the mission at the
islands, the brethren had addressed a letter to
the governor of Kamtschatka, informing him of
their arrival and objects, and making inquiries
respecting the state of that part of the north-west
coast of America. Early in December, of the




CHAP. VII.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.            167
same year, 1820,, they received, by a trading
vessel, the following gratifying letter from the
governor, addressed to Mr. Bingham, one of
missionaries.
"Kamtschatka, St. Peter and St. Paul, Sept. 5, 1820.
Rev. Sir;-I have had the happiness to peruse your evangelical epistle, which was handed
me by Mr. Clarke.
" I cannot help observing, that the late auspicious events at the Sandwich Islands, which so
prepared the way for your great work, appear
to me to be stamped with something marvellous,
and to be a plain interposition of Divine Providence in behalf of your great undertaking.
" I beg you will accept my warmest thanks for
the favour you have done me, in communicating
news so gratifying to my feelings; and to assure
you, that my fervent prayers will be offered for
the preservation of your valuable life.
" You wished to know, honoured sir, the moral condition of the people of Kamtschatka.  I
have the satisfaction to inform you, that, except
a few wandering tribes, all the aborigines enjoy
the sweet blessing of the gospel of our Lord, and
even these tribes are visited by our priests, to recommend to them the principles of Christianity;
at the same time, I should be very happy to Use
any missionary who would choose to visit' he
peninsula of Kamtschatka, and offer them all the
assistance in my power.
" I have the honour to inform you, that, as I
am now about to send our post away to St. Petersburgh, a copy of your epistle is prepared to
4




168        MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. TI.I
be transmitted to our minister, and the president
of the Bible Society, Prince Gallitzin, who will
not fail to present it to our emperor. With sentiments of high esteem, yours faithfully,
" PETER RICKFORD."
At the time the missionaries arrived, the use
of letters was unknown among the islanders, and,
amidst the numerous difficulties of their station,
few were felt to be greater than the fixing satisfactorily the orthography of the native language,
and reducing it to a written form. But this was
not the only difficulty they had to meet; vague
reports were circulated among the people unfavourable to their object, which it was said was
to usurp power over the chiefs, and to monopolize the trade of the islands, as they were told the
missionaries of the Society Islands had done.
For the purpose of ascertaining the truth or
falsehood of these reports, of opening a friendly
communication with Pomare, the king of Tahiti
and the adjacent islands, and exchanging the productions of the respective islands, Taumarii,
the king of Tauai, in the month of July, 1821,
proposed to send one of his vessels to the Society
Islands. It was his earnest desire that two of
the missionaries should accompany the chiefs
whom he proposed to send: with this wish the
missionaries felt it right to comply, and rejoiced
in the prospect of forming an acquaintance with
their brethren, who had been so many years in
the field; who had not only acquired the language of the people, but printed books, which
were in extensive use among their converts, and




CIAP. VII.]    SANDWICH ISLANDS.


169


wiiho could give them much valuable information
n: relation to their work. Messrs. Bingham     and
iUBuggles were appointed to undertake the voyage;;and the former proceeded to Tauai for the purpose of embarking with his colleague in the king's
vessel.
About this time, Rihoriho, the young king of
Hawaii, Maui, and Oahu, accompanied by a few
friends, set off in an open boat, professedly for a
port in Oahu, about fifteen miles distant; but,
when out at sea, ordered the pilot to steer for
Tauai, distant about seventy-five miles. This
voyage, which the young king was by many supposed to have undertaken in one of his wild and
reckless freaks, under the influence of inebriating
drink, led to important consequences: it prevented Taumarii sending his vessel on the projected voyage; it led to the acknowledgment of
the supremacy of the ruler of the windward
islands by the king of Tauai, and the surrender
of the government of the island to the former,;*
* The following is the account, given by the missionaries,
of what may be regarded as the official interview between
the king of Tauai and his visitor. The latter is represented as
saying, " King Rihoriho, hear; when your father was alive,
I acknowledged him as my superior; since his death, I
have considered you as his rightful successor, and according to his appointment as king. Now I have plenty of muskets and powder, and plenty of men at my command; these,
with the vessels I have bought, the fort, and guns, and the
island, all are yours. Do with them as you please. Send
me where you please. Place what chief you please as governor here." Nike, the Karakekahooah chief, addressed the
council in few words, and, referring to the treaty made between the two kings, confirmed the fact, that Taumarii had
held this island under Tamehameha. A solemn silence
Q




170          MISSIONARY RECORDS.       [CHAP. VII.
who, on returning to Oahu, brought with him
the king of Tauai, avowedly as a guest, but
actually, it was generally believed, as a captive.
Although disappointed of the advantages that
had been expected from the visit to the southern
islands, the missionaries had the pleasure of witnessing an increasing interest taken in their operations, both by the natives and foreigners at
Oahu. The subscription for their orphan school
was augmented; a liberal amount, five hundred
dollars, was also raised among the foreigners residing on shore, or visiting the islands, for the
erection of a place of worship more commodious
than the small building within the mission premises, hitherto used for that purpose.    The new
building was completed, and opened for Divine
service, on the 15th of September, when a suitable discourse was preached by Mr. Thurston,
from Ezra vi. 16. In the spring of the year 1821,
two Russian vessels of discovery touched at the
Sandwich Islands, the commanders and officers of
which showed the missionaries much kindness,
pervaded the house for some time, while all waited with deep
solicitude to hear the reply of the king, on which so much
appeared to be suspended. Then, with a mild and manly
aspect, he addressed Taumarii as follows: —' I did not come
to take away your island. I do not wish to place any one
over it. Keep your island, and take care of it just as you
have done, and do what you please with your vessels." To
this succeeded a shout of cheerful and hearty approbation
from all parties, and Taumarii retired from the council with
a peaceful smile. Thus, without noise or bloodshed, the
treaty made with the late king was recognized or ratified with
his son and successor; a treaty which allowed Taumarii
the peaceful possession of the leeward islands, as tributary
king.




A,.P. VII.] -SANDWICH ISLANDS.          171
t:oiouraged them  in their work, and recom-:?mended their object to the favourable notice of
the king and chiefs.  The missionaries had also
ihe grateful satisfaction of seeing pleasing indications of spiritual good attending their labours,
especially those of their faithful and devoted
native brother, Thomas Hopu.
Scarcely had the missionaries secured even
temporary shelter for themselves, their wives, and
their little ones, and opened their first school,
when they set up the printing press, and arranged the materials in readiness to print lessons
for their pupils, as soon as any could be prepared.
The actual operations of the press commenced in
the beginning of the year 1822, and are thus
noticed by the missionaries, in writing to the society:-"We are happy to announce to you,
that, on the first Monday of January, we commenced printing, and with great satisfaction
have put the first eight pages of the Hawaiian
Spelling Book into the hands of our pupils; copies of which we now transmit for the examination of the committee, and as little curiosities
from these dark isles.  By the next conveyance
we hope to send complete copies, with a preface.
We intend to print a Catechism, historical and
doctrinal, a Scripture Tract, and a Grammar and
Vocabulary, as we make advances in the language. Our pupils will devour books in this
language as fast as we can make them.
" The translation of the Scriptures into any
language is a great work; and, considering that
there are here ho learned men to whom the language is vernacular, as also the great apparent




172


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. VII.


poverty and ambiguity of the Hawaiian language,
which needs the aid of gesticulation to make it
clear and forcible, a good translation of the
Bible into it ought not to be expected for many
years to come: probably our eyes will never
be gladdened with such a goodly sight."
The little book first put to press in the islands
was necessarily imperfect, as the missionaries had
not, with all their efforts, been able correctly to
fix even the orthography of the native language;
it was, however, highly serviceable, in exciting
the attention of the natives to the use of letters,
and encouraging the few who were endeavouring
to acquire a knowledge of the first elements
of English.
The missionaries and their friends had justly
regarded the abandonment of the projected voyage to the Society Islands as unfavourable to
their objects, and disadvantageous to the people;
but, in the wise arrangements of the great Lord
of missions, events occurred shortly afterwards,
by which his own watchful care over the infant
cause was strikingly manifested, and all the advantages ever contemplated effectually secured.
These occurrences were connected with the arrival
at the Sandwich Islands of two gentlemen, sent
out as a deputation from the London Missionary
Society, in the previous year, to visit their
stations in the South Seas.
Tamehameha, the king of the Sandwich Islands, considering himself under the protection
of the king of England, had always shown himself friendly to the commanders of British vessels
touching for refreshments at his islands. These




gJIAP. VII.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.


173


attentions had been reported to the governor of
New South Wales, who, in the name of the
Prince Regent of England, sent him from New
South Wales a small and neatly-built schooner,
as a present. The captain having this schooner
in charge, touched at the Society Islands for refreshments, and offered to the deputation, or the
missionaries, a passage to the Marquesas, at
which islands he intended to call on his way to
Hawaii. The missionaries having been long desirous of introducing the gospel to this group,
the offer was gratefully accepted. The deputation, Mr. Ellis, one of the missionaries, and
two pious natives, members of the church, embarked accordingly, in the Mermaid, and sailed
from Huahine on the 25th of February, 1822.
After endeavouring for some time to contend
with unfavourable winds, and pursue their course
towards the Marquesas, the apprehension of deficiency of water and provisions obliged the
captain to alter his course, and steer direct for
the Sandwich Islands, taking the missionary
passengers and the Christian natives with him
thither, instead of leaving them, as had been intended, at the Marquesas. As soon as this change
had been made, the winds were favourable, and
the passage speedy and pleasant.
After a most agreeable voyage of thirty-one
days, one of the company writes:-" Land appeared in sight, and we continued sailing along
within a few miles of the shore until sabbath day,
March 31, when we came to anchor in Kearakekua Bav, about 10 A.M. The bustle occasioned
Q2




174         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. VII.
by the boats passing from ship to ship, the natives
paddling about in their canoes, surrounding the
vessel with vegetables, etc. for barter, crowding
the decks, halTooing to each other, singing their
heathen songs in honour of their late or present
king, produced a scene of confusion which, as
contrasted with the quietude of the sabbath
among the Society Islands, was deeply affecting.
In the afternoon, a sermon was preached to our
little Taheitan congregation, from 1 Cor. vi. 11,
'And such were some of you.' The ship was
crowded with natives from the shore, and many
were in their canoes alongside during the service;
they all behaved very quietly, and listened with
attention. The singing of the Taheitans appeared
to interest them very much. While the vessel
remained at Kearakekua we made frequent visits
to the shore, and conversed almost daily with
the people, whom we always found kind, and
attentive to whatever we conversed with them
about. We also made two visits to Kairua, the
residence of the king's brother-in-law, who is
governor of the island. He appeared pleased,
and expressed his wishes that two of us would
remain with him, to instruct him in reading and
writing, also in the knowledge of the true God,
and the religion of Jesus Christ, saying, that
the king had missionaries residing with him in
Oahu, but that he had none with him.
"After Mr. Tyerman and Mr. Ellis had lain
down to sleep on their mat, he came in, and sat
down by the side of them, with his slate in his
hand, to receive a copy, which was readily fur



AP. VII.]   SANDWICH ISLANDS.         175
i  ished him.  He afterwards continued his in-:: zquiries until two o'clock in the morning, when
h:ie left them, and retired to rest, frequently re1peating, He mahemake au e ao; nui he make-;. nake a'u. 'I desire to learn; great is my des:ire.
" After waiting a fortnight," the writer continues, 'the captain weighed anchor, and we proceeded to Oahu, where we arrived on Monday, the
21st of April. Shortly afterwards, we proceeded: to the shore, and were met on the beach by the
Rev. Mr. Thurston, and Messrs. Chamberlain
land Loomis, missionary brethren from America.
After paying our respects to the king and other
branches of the royal family, together with
foreign residents of the place, we accompanied
our brethren to their residence, about half a mile
from the landing place, where we were very
kindly welcomed by our sisters, Thurston, Chamberlain, and Loomis, who repeated the invitation
before given, that we should spend in their family
the time we might remain on the island; an invitation which was gladly accepted.
"' Our Taheitan Christians were soon invited
to the house of Kaahumanu, queen dowager of
Tamehameha, lately married to Taumarii, king
of Tauai. They had met with a countryman of
theirs, whose name is Moe, who had formerly
been with the mutineers in the Bounty, but had
been residing here many years as steward to
the queen's brother, the governor of the island of
Maui.   The intelligence and amiable manners
of Auna and his wife, together with their truly
Christian deportment, soon gained them  the




176         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [cuAP. VII.
esteem of their host and hostess, who became remarkably inquisitive about the change that had
taken place in the Georgian and Society Islands,
and the present state of things there. Every
necessary information was cheerfully given, and
every inquiry fully answered by Auna and his
companions, to the entire satisfaction of the chiefs
and people; contradicting entirely the false reports that had been maliciously propagated
among them, as to the degraded state of the
people of the Society Islands, and especially of
the kings and chiefs, who were represented as
poor and miserable. They were also frequently
questioned by Rihoriho, the king, respecting
these things, and were enabled perfectly to satisfy his mind, and remove some of his prejudices
against Christianity. Family worship was regularly performed by our friends every morning
and evening, of which the king and queen expressed their approbation, requesting that it
might not be performed before they were awake
in the morning, as they were anxious to unite in
it. Auna and his wife had now full employment
in teaching the king of Tauai, his queen, and
their attendants, to read and write, the proficiency
of the Taheitans in which very much surprised
them."
Writing to the secretary of the American Society, the deputation thus refers to the obvious
benefits of the visit:" Our arrival appeared to be most opportune.
Many false and injurious reports had been propagated here by some foreigners, respecting the
state of religion in the Society Islands, in order




?CSHAP. VII.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


177:to prejudice the minds of the king, and chiefs,
and people of these islands against the gospel
and the missionaries. Your missionaries had
projected, a short time previous to our arrival, a
voyage to the South Sea Islands, accompanied
by some of the chiefs, to ascertain the real state
of things there; but the foreigners, by their influence, had prevented the vessel from sailing.
At the time of our arrival, the people were labouring under the influence of the prejudices
which the foreigners had produced among them.
But our testimony to the wonderful work of God
in the South Sea Islands, together with that of
the people who accompanied us, appears to have
confounded the opposers, and confirmed the
king, and chiefs, and people, in the confidence,
that the prejudices which had been excited were
false and unfounded. We had no idea that this
important object was to be answered by our voyage. Truly God is wonderful in counsel, and
mighty in executing.
"One, only, of the chiefs who accompanied
us, with his wife, remained at the house of the
king of Tauai. But the king, and Kaahumanu,
his wife, a woman of great influence in these
islands, were so much pleased with the conduct
of their visitors, that they gave them a strong
invitation to continue with them, and not go to
the Marquesas.  Struck with this unexpected
occurrence, and perceiving that ri'eat benefit
might arise to the cause of relydion in these
islands, from the residence of persons so pious
and excellent as these are, and knowing that we




178


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. VI.


could obtain others for the Marquesas, at the
Society Islands, we were induced to consent to
their remaining.
" Soon after this, a meeting of several of the
most important chiefs was convened by the king
and queen of Tauai, to deliberate on the propriety of inviting Mr. Ellis, also, to join your
missionaries, and take up his residence here,
with his wife and family. An invitation to that
effect was, therefore, given to him. This, also,
was most unexpected. On further inquiry, we
found that his remaining here met with the decided approbation of the king Rihoriho, and
all the principal chiefs, and what was still
more, in our estimation, that of your missionaries."
With this invitation, which was given with
the utmost cordiality on the part of the missionaries, the deputation and Mr. Ellis deemed it the
will of Divine Providence that they should comply, and it was therefore arranged that Mr. Ellis
should proceed by the earliest conveyance for his
family, and return to Oahu. Circumstances,
however, entirely beyond their control, detained
the visitors four months at the Sandwich Islands.
During this time the progress of the mission
was rapid and encouraging. The orthography
of the language was correctly fixed, elementary
books prepared, the useful arts of reading and
writing in it commenced by the king, chiefs, and
many of the people, and the study pursued with
great diligence and pleasing success. During
this time, also, the gospel was regularly and in



tICHAP. VII.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


'779


telligibly preached in the Hawaiian tongue, by
Mr. Ellis, to increasingly numerous and attentive
assemblies, and short portions of the Scriptures
were circulated in manuscript. We may add,
that family devotion was observed, morning and
evening, in the dwellings of many of the chiefs of
highest rank and influence among the people,
and some indications graciously vouchsafed, that
spiritual benefit had been received by many.
Till this period, though the people as a nation
had publicly renounced idolatry, it was secretly
practised by many; and as the king had neither
verbally nor practically given his sanction, all
seemed afraid to engage in any of the acts of
Christian worship, or to receive instruction in the
Christian religion. But, on the Sth of August,
to use the language of the deputation, the chapel
overflowed with all the royalty and dignity
of the islands, and subsequently the place of
worship was regularly thronged. Verily, Jehovah is a God, hearing and answering prayer.
From this period increasing numbers every day
thronged the missionaries, earnestly desiring instruction, and it was a circumstance strikingly
manifesting the favour of the Lord, and eminently
beneficial to the nation, that among this number
were many of the principal chiefs, and persons of
the greatest influence in the islands, who shortly
made a profession of faith in the gospel. It is
highly gratifying to reflect on the proficiency to
which steady application enabled many of these,
though past the morning of life, to make in
learning, and the stedfastness and exemplary




180


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. VII.


consistency with which all maintained their profession through subsequent life. On the 22nd
of August, the deputation and the missionaries
sailed for Huahine, leaving the native teacher
Auna with the'king and queen of Tauai. After
six weeks, they reached Huahine in safety, and
on the 1st of January, 1823, Mr. Ellis, with his
family, and additional native teachers, embarked
for the Sandwich Islands.
On the 16th of this month, the mission was
visited with an afflicting bereavement, in the
death of one of the children; the removal was
severely felt by all, being the first inroad death
had made in their feeble band.
The missionaries thus notice the mournful
event:-" This evening, January 16, the little
Levi Parsons closed his short mission on earth,
and was quietly taken from the embrace of his
fond parents, by the same holy hand that had
given him to them; the same blessed hand that
still very graciously sustains them under their
present affliction, as it has done in every former
trial. We hope we recognize the tender, solemn,
and impressive voice of our covenant God and
Father, our Divine Shepherd, in calling this
dear lamb to his fold, in thus commissioning
death to make his first entrance into the Sandwich mission, and giving us all a needful admonition to watch and pray, and labour with
all our might, as we know neither the day nor the
hour when the Son of man cometh. As strangers, Kaehumanu, Taumarii, Kamamalu, and
others, called, in a friendly manner, to sym



'IaAP. V1I.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.          181
pathize with the bereaved parents. As sojourners with the people, we felt the affecting necessity of asking of the rulers of the land the per-.mission of a burying place with them, that we
might bury our dead out of our sight; and, at
our request, the king and queen, and Kaahumanu, granted us a spot for the purpose, near
the church."
One month from this time, namely, on the 5th
of February, 1823, Mr. Ellis, with his family,
rejoined the mission, and commenced his labour,
in affectionate harmony with the American
brethren. Of this the following letters, which
passed between the brethren respectively, afford
pleasing evidence.
" Honoruru, Feb. 19, 1823.
Dear Brother Ellis;-Safely and seasonably
arrived at this new missionary field, as the scene
of your future labours in the gospel of our common Lord, you will permit us, as your brethren,
to tender our sincere congratulations and affectionate welcome. We have, with admiration,
witnessed some of those striking movements of
Providence, which led the way, and brought you
hither to unite your experience, your counsels,
your prayers, your labours, and your influence,
with ours, in the great work of giving to this
nation the inspired word of God, with ability to
read it intelligibly, and leading them to the obedience of the truth as it is in Jesus; and we regard your arrival and settlement here as an important means of comfort and aid to us, and an
accession of strength to the cause of missions




182


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. VIIT


here; and as one of the special tokens of God's
merciful designs towards the benighted and
degraded inhabitants of the Sandwich Islands.
"We have long ago opened our arms and our
bosoms to receive you; we now gladly hail your
arrival; and, with unfeigned satisfaction and
unreserved approval, as your brethren and fellow
labourers, embrace you as a minister of Christy
and as a missionary of his cross; and, while we
feel and cherish an ardent desire that we may
ever be mutual helpers and comforters in the
toils and trials of a missionary life, you will, in
all matters relative to the acquisition of the language, the translating and publishing of the
Scriptures, recommending important measures
to the government, devising and executing plans
for urging forward the intellectual and moral
improvement of this nation, allow us, with special confidence, to rely on your experience and
opinion, your counsels and your aid. Fully persuaded, as we are, that no interest separate from,
or opposite to, that which we seek in the sacred
cause will ever be embraced in your designs, it
shall be our steady aim to afford every facility
in our power for the promotion of your most
extended usefulness in these islands of the sea,
whose salvation wewould unitedly seek. 'Thine
are we, David, and on thy side, thou son of Jesse;
peace, peace be unto thee, and peace be to thine
helpers, for thy God helpeth thee.' ' Lift up
thine eyes, and look around on the fields, for they
are white already for the harvest; and he that
reapeth receiveth wages, and gathereth fruit unto
life eternal, that both he that soweth and he that
3




HAP. VII.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.           183
ireapeth may rejoice together.' We are, dear? brother, very affectionately yours, in the labour::and fellowship of the gospel,:       "Signed,     HIRAM   BINGHAM.
^1,               ASA THURSTON.
"To the Rev. Mr. Ellis,
Missionary of the London Missionary Society."
Copy of a letter to the American brethren, in
answer to the above.
"Oahu, Feb. 25, 1829.
Dear Brethren;-The warm congratulations
on our arrival here, and the very affectionate
welcome to these shores, conveyed in your kind
epistle of the 19th instant, I received with unusual
emotions of pleasure and satisfaction; and should
have answered it at an earlier period, had not
the immediate and more pressing duties of the
mission so completely occupied my time and attention, as to put it entirely out of my power.
" It is peculiarly encouraging to our minds to
enter these interesting fields under such animating circumstances as those which mark our
introduction to them, strikingly displaying, as
they do, the Divine protection and approbation in
our removal from the Society to the Sandwich
Islands. Nor do I reckon, among the least auspicious of these events, the ingenuous and benevolent manner in which we have been received
by you, though coming from a different country,
patronised by another society, and originally
designated to a different field. The broad and
catholic principles which you have, in the present instance, so generously evinced, indicate an




184


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. VII.


eminent degree of that disinterested liberality and
benevolence which is so much commended in the
New Testament, and which, in its more conspicuous features, so happily distinguishes the present
from any preceding age of the church. Our union
in the great cause, which we have combined our
energies to support, will be hailed by Christian
philanthropists, both in America and England,
as an indication of the approach of that happy
period, when minor distinctions among the
ministers and people of God shall vanish, when
they shall recognize each other as brethren
wherever they may meet, and be as ' one fold
under one Shepherd.'
"Allow me, also, to assure you, that, in complying with the solicitations of the chiefs of these
islands, and your own deliberate recommendation
to remove hither, I have been actuated solely by
a sense of duty. I have no interests whatever
to promote, other than those equally dear to us
both; no plans to pursue, but those indicated by
the precepts and principles of the Bible, nor
any object to accomplish, but to aid in the extension of that glorious kingdom,-the extension
and prosperity of which we mutually count it our
happiness to spend and be spent in advancing.
I feel that it is unnecessary for me to add, that
it is the undisguised wish of my heart to combine
my efforts with yours, and uniformly employ
any facilities which my acquaintance with the
language, traditions, popular character, and
general habits of the Society Islanders may
furnish, for the great object of ameliorating the
wretchedness of the long neglected and degraded




i'OCHAP. VII.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.         185
'people around us, and conferring on them all the
b::ilsings Christianity is calculated to impart.
CMay our union be uninterrupted and perma7nent! May we ever walk in humble depend-.;ence on the Great Teacher of mankind! May his
Spirit pervade our hearts, and direct our steps,:and our every effort; and his abounding grace
crown our feeble exertions with Divine and
glorious success! I am, dear brethren, very
affectionately, yours in the bonds of the gospel,
" Signed,      WILLIAM ELLIS.
"To the Rev. Messrs. Bingham and Thurston,
Missionaries in the Sandwich Islands."
Rihoriho had previously written an excellent
letter to the American Missionary Society. By
the ship which conveyed the account of Mr.
Ellis's arrival, he addressed a letter to the directors of the London Missionary Society, of
which the following is a literal translation.
"Oahu, March 31, 1823.
Great affection to you dwelling together in
Britain. These are my words to you, which I
now make known to you.
" We have recently learned to read, and have
become acquainted with it. We have respect
unto God, and desire Jehovah for our God.
We also regard Jesus Christ as a Saviour for
us, that our hearts [or thoughts] may be like
yours.
c Ours is a land of dark hearts. Had you
not compassionated us; even now we should be
quite dark. But no; you have compassionated
R2




186        MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. II.
us, and we are enlightened. We are praying
unto God, and we are listening to the word of
our salvation. We, also, keep the sacred day of
Jehovah, the sabbath, which is one good thing
that we have obtained; one good thing that we
have lately known to be a temporal good. Mr.
Ellis is come here to this place; we desired his
coming, we rejoice. He is teaching us, that we
may all be saved.
'"Write you unto me, that I may know what
you write, [or, your writing to me.]  Pray ye,
also, to God for us, that he would give salvation
for us, that our bodies, [ways, actions, walk,
conversation, etc.] may be made good, that our
souls may be saved by Jesus Christ. Great
affection for you all,
Signed,    TAMEHAMEHA,
King of the Sandwich Islands.
"To the Company of Directors of the Missionary Society."
The king further manifested his friendship,
by remitting to the captain of the vessel which
brought Mr. Ellis all harbour dues, as he did
also to the captain who brought the American
missionaries soon afterwards. The state of the
mission was, at this time, such as the king described. Instruction was generally sought and valued, and many of the young people and children
made pleasing progress. The congregation on
the sabbath frequently amounted to one thousand
persons, and numbers attended the service on
the evening of other days. Most of the chiefs
* King Rihoriho had assumed the name of Tamehameha
the Second.




SAP. VII.]    SANDWICH ISLANDS.           187
em ployed all their influence to persuade the peoiple to attend, public instruction, and to this cause,
lindoubtedly, the attention of most was to be?attributed; though there was reason to believe,
i:that not a few were earnestly seeking to know::and to serve the living God. The king's crier,i:,:,lwas sent round the settlement every Saturday:night, to proclaim, in every place, that tomorrow was the sacred day; that they must not::plant or build, make cloth, sell goods, shoot
ibirds, or follow any of the public games, but
go to the place of worship.   In general, the
departments of usefulness opening were such as
fully to engage both the American missionaries
and Mr. Ellis, and the newly arrived native
teachers from the Society Islands.
Ever since the death of Tamehameha, and the
accession of his son to the throne, an annual
celebration of the event, with the most splendid
and imposing pageantry and joyous festivity, had
been observed by the king and chiefs. It had
proved, as seasons of similar excitement frequently do, the occasion of much vice and
misery; and the missionaries, with a view to prevent, to some extent, these evils, and direct the
thoughts of the people in a more suitable direction, proposed to the king to observe the day,
this year, by attending a religious service on
the occasion, and thus publicly recognize the
dominion and supremacy of Jehovah.      The
kirng and chiefs readily agreed to the proposition of the missionaries. The great day of the
festival occurred, this year, on the 24th of April.
At eleven o'clock, accordingly, in the forenoon




188


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. VII.


of that day, the king, queens, and chiefs came to
church in state; the place of worship was
thronged, and vast multitudes collected on the
outside, and at the doors and windows, during
the time of worship. The service was conducted
by Mr. Ellis; and, after the service, the rulers
and people returned in great pomp, but in perfect order, to the village. In the afternoon, the
king gave a splendid entertainment to his friends,
which might have passed off without any unpleasant effects, had not the king fallen a victim
to his love of the intoxicating cup. Some idea
of the state of society, and the taste of the chiefs
and people, may be gathered from the following
account of the entertainment, given in journals
of the missionaries.
" At one end of the table, which was one hundred feet long, was seated the king, and Mr.
Jones, the American consul, at the other. A
considerable number of chiefs, masters of vessels
in port, residents, etc., participated in the dinner, which was dressed and served up much
after the manner of civilized nations. The great
Giver of all mercies was acknowledged on the
occasion, by one of the missionaries, three of
whom were present.   Probably five thousand
natives were spectators of the scene. The table
was spread under a ranai, or temporary screen,
from the rays of the sun, and formed of green
rushes, spread over a frame-work of wood, upwards of one hundred feet long, and forty feet
wide, open on all sides, and lined with canvas.
The king's guards, armed with muskets, and
dressed in uniform, who had attended him to




?ClHAP. VII.]  SAND)WICH ISLANDS.


189


and from the church, surrounded the ranai. A
display was made, as usual on such occasions, of
their fine feathers, tippets, and splendid war
cloaks. In the midst of the dinner the young
princess, Nahienaena, was brought in great pomp
upon a four-wheeled carriage, curiously decorated, drawn by her friends, and attended with
lofty mahiles of imposing appearance. When
the carriage approached the head of the table,
the king rose, and, in homage to the young princess, assisted to draw it. He then carried his sister into the ranai, and introduced her to the whole
company as his sister, the daughter of Tamehameha. She seated herself by the side of Kauikeouli, and was much caressed by the king's
guests.  The wives of the king were richly
dressed; Kamehamaru in black satin, decorated
richly with gold lace, neatly adjusted by her own
hands; she distinguished herself by superintending and ordering the table. But, in the midst
of all the parade, the peals of roaring cannon,
and the social conviviality of the scene, nothing
could remove from   the countenances of the
more intelligent and sober part of the rulers, the
marks of uneasiness on account of the king's
excesses. The intemperance referred to was the
more to be deplored, because promoted in the
king by foreigners who surrounded him, and
who, even at the risk of effecting his own death,
and the ruin of the people, seemed determined
to pander to the habits of indulgence, to which
the king and some of the chiefs had now become
addicted."




190        MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. VIII.
CHAPTER VIII.
Appointment of a reinforcement of missionaries for
the Sandwich Islands-Services connected with
their embarkation-Beneficial effects of their
labours during the voyage-Approach to the
islands-Description of Hawaii-Appointment of
a mission to Maui —Embarkation-Attention of
the king to his mother-First sabbath at Lahaina
-Retrospect of the first week-Refiections of the
missionaries-A deputation from the missionaries
explore the island of Hawaii-State of the people-Character of their idolatry-Amount of
population - Eligible stations for missionary
efforts —llness of Keopuolani-Her baptism and
death- Observances connected with her interment
-Notice of her character and deportment.
IT has been already stated, that, soon after their
peaceable settlement at Oahu, the missionaries
had written to America for additional labourers.
This call was not unheeded by the Society. In
the autumn of 1822, a reinforcement was appointed, and, on the 19th of November, the Rev.
William  Richards, Rev. Charles S. Stewart,
and Rev. Artemas Bishop, missionaries; Dr.
Abraham Blatchley, physician; Messrs. Joseph
Goodrich and James Ely, licensed preachers
and assistant missionaries; Mr. Levy Chamberlin, superintendent of secular concerns and assistant missionary; and three natives of the Sandwich Islands, William  Krummo-oo-lah, Richard Kriouloo, and Cooperee, pious youths,
though not all of them united to the church,




IlAP VIIl.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.           191
ebarked at New Haven, Connecticut, in the;ip Thames, to join the mission at the Sand-?wich Islands. The whole number was eighteen.
tsThe embarkation took place on Tuesday. On;he sabbath evening preceding, a meeting was
held for prayer.   The Rev. Mr. Bardwell,;lformerly missionary to India, addressed the misi:ion  family; and the Rev. President Day
j| addressed the people. Monday evening being::; the time appointed for delivering the instructions
I::of the Prudential Committee to the missionaries,
ii: the church was crowded at an early hour; and:the messengers of the churches, "ready to
t depart on the morrow," united, for the last
'::: time, with their patrons and numerous Christian!j friends, in the public worship of God.  Mr.
I Richards preached an appropriate discourse from
I IIsaiah Ix. 9; "Surely the isles shall wait for
i: me;" after which the corresponding secretary
delivered the instructions of the Prudential Comi?.mittee. It was a season of intense interest, one: which must have deeply affected the hearts of all,
and especially of the professed disciples of the;lLord Jesus then present, who, after the addresses,;:C to the number of six or seven hundred, sat down:to commemorate unitedly around his table his
dying love.
A  collection was made for the mission,
amounting to three hundred and thirty-four dollars. In addition to this, donations were pre* sented from different individuals of the city and
its vicinity, to the amount of one thousand dollars; the inhabitants of all classes uniting their




192


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. VIII.


contributions for the support and comfort of the
mission family, during their long voyage, and
after their arrival.
On Tuesday afternoon, a large concourse of
people assembled on the wharf, to take leave of
the devoted little band, who had, for several
days, occupied nearly all their thoughts.    After
a circle had been formed around the missionaries, a hymn was sung, composed by William
B. Tappan.     No heart could be so insensible as
not to thrill with emotion as the loud Alleluia
ascended to the Most High.
Wake, isles of the South! your redemption is near,
No longer repose in the borders of gloom;
The strength of his chosen in love will appear,
And light shall arise on the verge of his tomb.
Alleluia to the Lamb, who hath purchased our pardon;
We will praise him again when we pass over Jordan.
We will praise him, etc.
The billows that girt ye, the wild waves that roar,
The zephyrs that play where the ocean storms cease,
Shall bear the rich freight to your desolate shore,
Shall waft the glad tidings of pardon and peace.
Alleluia, etc.
On the islands that sit in the regions of night,
The lands of despair, to oblivion a prey;
The morning will open with healing and light,
The young star of Bethlehem will ripen to-day.
Alleluia, etc.
The altar and idol in dust overthrown,
The incense forbade that was hallowed with blood;
The Priest of Melchisedec there shall atone,
And the shrines of Atooi be sacred to God.
Alleluia, etc.




'AP. ViII.]    SANDWICH ISLANDS.              193
'f he heathen will hasten to welcome the time,
T The Day-spring the prophet in vision once saw,
When the beams of Messiah will lumine each clime,
IlAnd the isles of the ocean will wait for his law.
Alleluia, etc.
And thou, Obookiah! now sainted above,
@;: Wilt rejoice as the heralds their mission disclose,
And the prayer will be heard that the land thou didst love
May blossom as Sharon, and bud as the rose!
Alleluia, etc.
The hymn being concluded, the missionaries
were next affectionately commended in prayer,:: by the Rev. Mr. Merwin, to the care and pro-: tection of Him    who   "rides upon the whirlwind and directs the storm."     Notice was then:brought from    the ship, that but a few minutes
remained before the time appointed for their em-;barkation.   These moments were spent in singing,
Blest be the tie that binds
Our hearts in Christian love;
The fellowship of kindred minds
Is like to that above.
When we asunder part,
It gives us inward pain;
But we shall still be joined in heart,
And hope to meet again.
The solemn stillness which had pervaded the
assembly during the religious exercises, was followed by the general murmur occasioned by the
painful necessity of mutual separation; and, in
this stage of the proceedings, one could scarcely
help being reminded of St. Paul's taking leave:;                  s




194        MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. VIII,
of his friends at Miletus, when "he kneeled
down and prayed with them all, and they all
wept sore, and fell on Paul's neck, and kissed
him; sorrowing most of all for the words which
he spake, that they should see his face no more.
And they accompanied him unto the ship."
During the voyage, the missionaries mention,
with gratitude, there appeared to be several
instances in which their influence and instructions had been made the means of benefit to the
minds and characters of their fellow passengers,
and the seamen of the ship. Indeed, so strong
was the bond of sympathy and affection created
between them, that the first sight of land, instead
of inspiring thoughts of exultation and joy, was
regarded as the melancholy sequel of a separation, to which all appeared to look with sorrow.
Referring to the close of the voyage, Mr.
Stewart thus writes:-" Thursday, April 24. It
is even so; the island of Hawaii is before us.
For two or three days we have had many indications of being in the vicinity of land; several
times, yesterday, we imagined we could trace the
outline of a mountainous coast, but afterwards
found that we were deceived by the clouds of the
horizon.  During most of this morning, we
were subject to the same illusions; though the
fixedness of the clouds and mist, directly before
us, seemed to indicate the attraction of high
land; and, at three o'clock this afternoon, as the
thickness began to rise from the face of the
ocean, the broad base of Hawaii, covered with
Egyptian darkness, came peering through the




VP. VIII.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.             195
oom. The reality was too certain to admit of
abi. moment's question, and was accompanied by
siensations never known before.
I"I In my own heart there was a mingling of
pieain; it was the signal for separation from those
'i'n whom I had become deeply interested, and
i m;any of whom were in a state, the issue of which
sl;eemed deeply connected with the destinies of
eternity. Hence the first joyous excitement was
quickly succeeded by feelings of solemnity and
i::solicitude.  Several of the crew, also, were seen
to brush a tear from their eyes; and one turned:to go below, with the expression, ' Land, indeed
'it is; and it is the last and saddest sight I wish:to see!'
" The mist and vapour slowly rose higher:and higher, disclosing just the cultivated land
'along the shore, twenty or thirty miles distant;
and then woodland regions above, with here
and there a projecting cascade. As the scene
increased in interest and beauty, the language of
our hearts was, Hail! and welcome!' and in
the evening, having assembled along the side of:the ship next the land, we almost insensibly
joined in singing the appropriate hymn,
" O'er the gloomy hills of darkness,
Look, my soul, be still and gaze.
"We had scarcely finished the first line,
before we were encircled by the officers and
crew, with a seriousness that bespoke a participation in the sentiments on which we were
dwelling. Some of their bosoms throbbed, I
doubt not, with affections known only to the




196       MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. VIII.
pious mind. The last rays of a glorious sun
were gleaming from the west, and a full orbed
moon rising upon us in the east; just at this
time the haziness on the land suddenly gave
way, without leaving a trace of the gloom,
which an hour before, with the exception of a
light drapery of clouds on the highest points of
the mountains, had overshadowed the whole
island. The change was too sudden and too remarkable not to be noticed, and we could not but
hope and pray, that the greater spiritual gloom,
which we knew filled the land, might as speedily
flee away before the mild light of the gospel of
salvation."
On the 27th of April, the Thames anchored off
Honoruru, in Oahu. It was the sabbath morning when she arrived; and early in the forenoon
the missionaries proceeded to the shore, where
they were met and received with expressions of
goodwill by the queen and the American consul,
and, shortly afterwards, cordially and affectionately welcomed by the members of the mission
family, as well as by all the chiefs and many of
the people. On the following day the missionaries, their wives, and the native teachers, left
the vessel, which for many months had been
their comfortable home, and took up their residence on shore. They entered at once, with
industry and spirit, upon the study of the language, gratified with the aspect of the mission,
and cheered by evident signs that the fields were
white unto the harvest. The circumstances of
the mission were indeed most encouraging.
Many hundreds of the natives had learned to




::HAP. VIII.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.


197


read in their own language. The congregations
were increasing in number, and evidences were
Zfast multiplying of the Divine blessing on the
labours of the brethren. The public worship of
the Most High was also enlivened by the general singing of his praise; a number of hymns in
the native language, to which the scholars and
others were extremely partial, having been prepared chiefly by Mr. Ellis.
Within a month after the arrival of the missionaries in the Thames, Keopuolani, the king's
mother, intimated her intention to proceed to the
island of Maui, and wished one of the missionaries to accompany her, for the purpose of communicating instruction to herself and people.
This communication was received by the mission as an express call in Divine Providence, to
direct their attention to this island; and, after
a season of special prayer, the Rev. Messrs.
Stewart and Richards were appointed to the
responsible and delightful undertaking. Taua,
the Tahitian teacher, and his wife, had resided
with this honoured woman, the mother of
the king, ever since his arrival, and had given
much valuable information on the great truths
of religion, had held worship in her family
morning and evening, and engaged in teaching
many of her people to read. But the queen
now desired that a mission, having the advantage of foreign teachers, might be established at
Maui, under her protection and countenance.
On the 28th of May, Messrs. Stewart and
Richards, and their wives, with Betsy Stockton,
an assistant in the mission, Taua and his wife,
s2




198        MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP,'VIII.
embarked on board the Cleopatra's barge; at ten
o'clock in the forenoon the mission proceeded to
the vessel, where they were accommodated with
a convenient and retired cabin. Karaimoku was
on board, and received them kindly.  Shortly
after, Keopuolani, accompanied by the king, her
son, came on board. It was peculiarly gratifying to witness the kind attentions of Tamehameha to his mother on this occasion. When
she reached the water's edge, he sprang before
her, jumped into the boat, spread the cloaks on
the seat, directed her attendants to stand on one
side, and having given the men in the boat a
strict charge to keep it steady, he very carefully
handed her in, and seated himself by her side.
He was also exceedingly attentive in assisting
her from the boat to the vessel. When they had
all arrived on board, and the hawser was about
to be let go, the king and chiefs, the missionaries
and their wives, assembled on the quarter-deck.
A hymn was sung, after which a short prayer,
in the native language, was offered for the
Divine protection and blessing to accompany
and prosper the brethren and sisters, and their
friends.  The vessel shortly after got under
weigh; and, ere long, the queen, chiefs, and missionaries, reached their destined haven in safety.
The affection of the king for his mother
was also pleasingly manifested, on the occasion of his first visit to Maui after his mother's arrival.  He landed in a small boat,
accompanied by a single chief. After embracing his queen and the princess, he took
one under each arm, and hastened up the




VP. vIII.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.           199
eah. According to their custom, the chiefs
a  assembled, and were formally seated on
Itheir mats, in a large circle, before the tent of
iieopuolani, waiting the approach   of their?:Imonarch. He entered the circle opposite to his!mother, and where Wahine Pio, the sister of
i Krimokoo, was seated. He dropped on one
knee to salute her, on which she burst into tears,; and, springing from her mat, led him to that of
his mother. He knelt before her, gazed silently
on her face for a moment, then pressed her to:,?his bosom, and placing a hand on each cheek,
kissed her twice in the most tender manner.
The whole scene was really affecting; we scarce
ever witnessed an exhibition of natural affection,
where the feelings were apparently more lively
and sincere. The king is a fine looking man, and
very graceful in his manners; while gazing on
him, the old lady's heart seemed to float in her
eyes, and every feature "c told a mother's joy."
Messrs. Stewart and Richards thus describe
the service of the first sabbath spent among the
people  of their future charge: —"June 1.
Early this morning a messenger came, to
inform us that Keopuolani, the princess, and
chiefs, were waiting for us to come and worship
with them. We accordingly hastened to the
beach, to erect an altar to the true God, where
heretofore idols only have been served. Our
temple was the work of the Almighty. Its only
pillars were those that support the foundations of
the eartlh, and its canopy the broad arch of heaven.  But we doubt whether a purerI flame of
devotion would have glowed in our bosoms, had
2




200


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. VIII.


we knelt before the Lord on pavements of marble, or addressed his throne from the midst of
carving and gold. About three hundred and
fifty people had encircled the tent pitched for the
temporary accommodation of the queen, in a
grove of kou trees, near a brick building, the
residence of the late king when he visited Maui.
We have seldom witnessed a more attentive audience.
"A portion of Scripture was first read by
Taua, from the Tahitian version; after which
other appropriate services were performed.
The chiefs desired to have the services repeated
in the afternoon; and the queen requested us
not only to worship God with her on the sabbath, but to attend prayers regularly, with herself and daughter, every morning and every
evening."
Enough appears from the preceding extract to
show the peculiarly favourable circumstances
under which this branch of the mission was
commenced.
On the 7th of June the brethren again thus
write:-"The first week of our residence at
Lahaina is completed, and few missionaries
have been more highly favoured in forming a
station, far from every abode of civilization and
piety, than we have.  The Lord hath dealt
kindly with us, by disposing the hearts of the
queen and chiefs to the most friendly and generous attentions.
" Our table has been constantly and bountifully
spread by our benefactress, and preparations are
already made for the speedy erection of our




cHAP. vIII.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.


201


dwelling; timber is also collecting for a chapel
and school house, all by the liberality of the
queen.
" The natives still continue eagerly desirous
of instruction, and morning, noon, and night,
they may be found in groups from ten to thirty
persons, spelling, and reading, and writing;
and, whether in their houses, or in the grove,
whether strolling on the beach, or, I might
almost add, sporting in the surf, they make
their books and slates inseparable companions.
Many are capable of composing neat and intelligent letters to each other; and now, almost daily,
from island to island, and from district to district,
such correspondence is passing. Such is their
present proficiency in the branches of education
to which they have already attended, we need
not fear to encourage a belief, that, in time, many
may yet engage successfully in the more abstruse
researches of philosophy and science; be made
to partake in all the advantages of letters and
of the arts.
" Nor is there more doubt that they may be
converted to Christianity. They eagerly seek
our religious instructions and prayers; and,
morning and evening, with seriousness and solemnity, surround the altar of the great I AM.
The approach of the sabbath is anxiously
awaited: and so careful are they not to infringe
its sanctity, or defeat its object, by unnecessary
labours, that they prepare their food before its
commencement, with more care than many in
our own country, who are thought to observe it
with superstitious particularity. We do not say




202


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. VIII,


this of the nation, for, alas! gross darkness covers the people, and thousands are every where
perishing in the depths of ignorance and sin;
but of those only, who have received the more
constant and direct influence of the mission. If
it can be said, however, of a few only, (and in
its full extent it can be,) who will not admit that
all are alike capable of receiving and obeying
the precepts of the word of God?
"' We thank God more warmly than ever, that
of his good pleasure he excited within our bosoms, the desire to 'forsake houses, and brethren,
and sisters, and father, and lands, for his sake,
and for that of the gospel;' and that we have the
prospect of living and dying beneath the dark
mountains of Maui. If ignorance of the world
and of our own hearts do not deceive us, we had
rather hear the warm and constant arohaaroha nui-aroha nui roa-maitai, maitai,
Clove to you-great love to you-very great
love to you-good, good,' of the crowds of these
ignorant and degraded immortals, with the
cheering prospect of conferring on them blessings, temporal and eternal, than receive the
loudest applauses of a refined and civilized
people."
The arrival of the reinforcement, that had visited the islands in the month of April, enabled
the missionaries to extend their labours even beyond the island of Maui, and their attention was
soon very earnestly directed to the large island
of Hawaii. In order that the establishment of
a mission there might be made most advantageously, four of the missionaries, Messrs.




:CHAP. VIII.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.


203


Thurston, Bishop, Goodrich, and Ellis, were
selected to visit and explore the island; to investigate the moral and social condition of the
people; unfold to them the objects of the mission; inquire whether they were willing to receive Christian teachers, and select the most
eligible places for permanent missionary stations.
The tour occupied between nine and ten weeks,
during which the missionaries travelled, on foot,
nearly three hundred miles, and preached the
gospel in almost every hamlet or village in the
island. A detailed account of the tour, as furnished by the author of this work, may be seen
in the fourth volume of the " Polynesian.
Researches;" but the general results of the
journey, during the whole course of which the
kind attention of the chiefs and people were
cheerfully and readily afforded, are summarily
given in the following report of the deputation,
presented on their return to their missionary brethren:-" In the prosecution of our design, to
explore and enlighten the long benighted Hawaii,
we commenced our tour at Kairua, on the western
shore of Hawaii; we travelled to the south, the
east, and the north; twice crossing the interior,
in different parts. We have visited all the principal settlements, both on the coast and in the
interior; spent a sabbath in each of the five
large divisions of the islands; and have endeavoured to convince the inhabitants, that the
objects of the mission are benevolent and disinterested; intended to lead them to the enjoyment of the lights of science, and the blessings
of Christianity.




204


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. VIII.


" We have not forgotten the command of our
Saviour, ' As ye go, preach;' and it has been
our comfort, in obedience to that command, to
hold the cup of his salvation to the parched lips
of those who had never tasted the heavenly
draught, and whom we found most emphatically
without hope and without God in the world.
Strengthened by the Divine promise, ' Lo, I am
with you alway,' we have, on our tour, preached
in more than sixty different places, to collections
of people, of from fifty to one thousand in number, and in most cases have been heard with
attention.
"We have also carefully numbered the habitations of the natives, and have estimated the inhabitants of Hawaii to be eighty-five thousand in
number; much greater than the population of all
the other islands of the group; but far less than
the estimate of its celebrated discoverer, and of
respectable subsequent voyagers. To contemplate
the waste of population here indicated, whether we
attribute it to the ravages of war, whose restless
spear is scarcely restrained by the approach of
the cross; to the desolating pestilence which has
more than once swept through these isles; to
the cruel superstition, but recently abolished; to
that most unnatural of all crimes that gain
admittance to the habitations of cruelty, infanticide; or to the prevalence of vice, rendered
doubly destructive by foreign causes; cannot
but be deeply affecting to the feelings of philanthropy.
" Though we found the people generally ignor
rant of Jehovah, and indifferent to his worship,




iCAtP. VIII.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.         205
and many of them    retaining their household
iods, and cherishing a sort of veneration for the
lbones of their chiefs and relatives; yet not a few,
wihen they heard of the love of God in the gift
iof his Son, desired to be more fully instructed,::sand intreated that the word might be spoken to:them.?::i: We are happy to state that, on different parts
of the island, there are eight eligible stations,
Kairua, Kearakekua, Honaunau, Honuapo, Kaima, Waiakea, Waipio, and Towaihai. These
we earnestly recommend for early and permanent occupation, as affording to the missionary
encouraging prospects, not of freedom from privation, but of extensive usefulness. The following may be specially noticed. Kairua, on the
west, doubtless claims our earliest attention; it
contains itself about three thousand inhabitants,
and in the villages immediately around, within a
circuit of twenty miles, there are not fewer than
twenty thousand. Not less than sixty of the
three thousand, including the governor, have
been taught to read and write their own language, and have been made acquainted with the
first principles of Christianity..  Near Kearakekua, memorable for the lamented fall of Captain Cook, we were surprized
and delighted to find a friendly chief, Kamakau,
who espouses with lively interest the cause of the
gospel, and earnestly desires to be taught himself,
and to teach his people the word of God. The
expected residence here of Naihe and Kapiolani,
also friendly and influential chiefs, renders it still
T




206


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. VIII.


more desirable that missionaries should reside
here.
" Honaunau, the frequent residence o; iformer
kings, where a depository of their bones, and
many images of their gods, still remain, has a
dense population waiting for Christian instruction.
"Including these three places, the coast for
twenty miles embraces more than forty villages,
containing a population of perhaps twenty thousand souls, to whom missionaries stationed at
these posts might convey instruction.
" Scarcely inferior also in importance, as a site
for a missionary station, even to Kairua, is Waiakea on the east, well watered, fertile and beautiful, and having a commodious harbour, with an
extensive population.
The whole field is open to spiritual cultivation, and 'he that goeth forth and weepeth, bearing precious seed, shall doubtless come again with
rejoicing, bringing his sheaves with him.' Such
is the general view which we feel it right to lay
before you.  Believing that you will rejoice
with us in the cheering prospect of the early and
ultimate success of missionary operations there,
and encouraged, as we are, with the assured hope
of the complete and glorious triumph of the gospel in every island, permit us affectionately to
invite you to unite with us,  even as also ye
do,' in humble and earnest prayer for this interesting portion of our race; that seed already
sown among them, may be as ' the handful of
corn upon the tops of the mountains, the fruit




[CHAP. VIII.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.


207


wiwhereof shall shake like Lebanon;' that the
promise to the Redeemer of the nations may be: remembered for their good; and that Divine merb:cies may descend from heaven upon them in rich;and joyful profusion, 'as the dew of Hermon,
and as the dew that descended upon the mount ains of Zion, for there the Lord commanded the
blessing, even life for evermore."'
About a week after the return of the missionaries from Hawaii, tidings were received of the
alarming illness of the king's mother.  Most of
the chiefs had proceeded to the place, and as her
profession of the gospel had excited lively interest on her behalf, it was thought desirable that
some of the missionaries acquainted with the
language should proceed to that station. Mr.
and Mrs. Ellis, accompanied by Mr. Ruggles,
accordingly embarked for this purpose on the 13th
of September, 1823, and reached Maui on the
16th. In the forenoon of that day, the missionaries visited her, and found the king, queen, and
most of the ruling chiefs of the island, present,
and in deep distress, under the apprehension that
she had not long to live. The sorrowful assembly requested that prayer might be offered to the
true God; and the king and chiefs united in the
expression of their wishes that she might be baptized before she died; informing them, that they
only made known to them, what she had herself
several times desired within a few days past.
They said, she told them she had given herself
to Jesus Christ, and wished to do it publicly, by
having water sprinkled upon her, in the name of
the Father, Son, and Holy Spirit. They were




208        MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. VIII.
told that it was proper all who believed in
Christ, and hoped to be saved by him, should
be baptized in his name. Keopuolani was then
asleep. The missionaries proposed to wait till
she awoke, and then converse with her on the
subject, which conversation, if satisfactory, it
would afford them pleasure, they said, to comply
with her wishes. They then engaged in prayer
with the disconsolate company around her couch,
in which they particularly commended her to
Jehovah's care and love, either to restore her to
health, or take her to himself. Having also endeavoured to administer consolation to her children and relatives, they left the house, and afterwards conversed some time as to the propriety of
complying with their request, and were unanimous in their opinion, that if they could receive
from herself her confession of faith in Christ, it
would be well to administer baptism.
The annexed account of what followed is
given by Mr. Ellis:-" About half-past two
we went again to the queen's house, and, after
conversing with the king, engaged in prayer
by her bed-side. She had altered considerably
since morning, and her end seemed approaching.
As we sat watching, with almost breathless anxiety, expecting every gasp would be her last,
Hoapiri, her husband, put his face down to hers,
and supposing her breath gone, commenced a
most loud and bitter lamentation. All the chiefs,
and some others in the house, joined simultaneously, and collecting round the sick woman's
bed, commenced the most hideous and deafening
wailing ever heard. Many of the people made




iHtAP. VIi,] SANDWICH ISLANDS.


209:their escape from the house, and ran to hide
themselves, as they expected those riotous acts
of plunder, violence, and unbridled wickedness:would take place, which they had been accustomed to in their idolatrous state. Kekauruohe*
took me by the hand, and led me round to the
place where Karaimoku sat by the head of Keopuolani: he requested me to sit down by him,
assuring me she was not dead. In a little time
Keopuolani revived, and the wailing ceased.
She cast her languid eyes on those around, and
seemed to recognize me. I spoke to her of her
hopes in Jesus Christ, and expectations of heaven. She appeared sensible, and aware of what
I said, but too feeble to make any reply. The
king, Kaahumanu, Kamehamaru, and some
others, now resumed their entreaties that she
might be baptized, saying they only repeated to
us her wish, which she had frequently expressed
to them. I went out, and again conversed with
the brethren on the subject. They had, for some
time, had the most pleasing hopes of her saving
acquaintance with the way of salvation through
Jesus Christ, thought her a proper subject for
baptism, and though we could not then receive
her testimony of faith, yet from her knowledge,
consistent walk, holy conversation, frequent
prayer, and apparent love to the Saviour, and
for the satisfaction of her friends, we deemed it
best to administer that ordinance to her. We
returned, and found her awake, and somewhat
revived; when silence was obtained, I gave a


'* Mother of Kamehamaru, queen of Tamehameha.
T2




210        MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. VIII.
short address on the nature, design, and subjects
of baptism, to which all listened with attention.
I asked the king her proper name; he answered, ' Keopuolani.'  I then proceeded, saying,
Keopuolani, e bapatizo, ahu wau ia oe i roko o
ka inoa o ka Makua, a o he Keiki, a o he Uhane
lemolele —' Keopuolani, I baptize thee in (or
into) the name of the Father, and of the Son,
and of the Holy Spirit;' after which, I concluded the service with prayer. The king, Karaimoku, Kaahumanu, and Kalakua, seemed
pleased that her wishes had been gratified before it was too late. I then spoke to the king
on the impropriety of the customs formerly practised on the death of a principal chief, and mentioned the irregularities we had observed when
it was thought she was dead. He said, that at
Keopuolani's particular request, he had given
orders that there should be nothing of the kind;
and lest there should be any that had not heard
them, he would send out again. He did so.
Several of the other chiefs expressed their wish
that nothing indecent or injurious might take
place; and we left them, feeling satisfied that it
would be as they had said.
"About six o'clock the same evening we were
informed that Keopuolani had expired.  We
went to the house, and found it was indeed so.
Every one seemed overwhelmed with grief, and
their lamentations were loud and unrestrained;
yet the greatest order and decency were observed,
both by those in the house, as well as by the numerous crowds on the outside. At half past
seven we were'sent for by the king. On arriving




i::CIAP V1III.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.        211
lat the house where the corpse lay, we found it: partially illuminated by two dim lamps, and the
children and other relatives weeping around the:bed of the deceased. They said they were over-:whelmed with distress, and wished us to pray with
them. As soon as they had ceased their grief,
we sung three verses of the fourteenth hymn in
the Hawaiian collection, and engaged in prayer.
Hoapiri and the king both expressed their hope
that she was happy; saying, She loved Jesus
Christ very much.' We left the house of mourning
about ten, and returned to our dwelling, amidst
the deep and unceasing lamentations of the
people, which continued through the night. We
perceived the same decency and propriety among
them as we had observed in the earlier part of
the evening, and cannot but rejoice in the public
abolition of the disgraceful customs practised
formerly on similar occasions, as an additional
triumph of Christianity, and an invaluable blessing to this people.
" Soon after daylight, on the 17th, we went down
to morning worship with the chiefs, which they
proposed to hold in a large house, opposite to that
in which the deceased lay. The passing. of the
chiefs from one house to the other, through the
multitudes assembled there, appeared to impart
intensity to their grief; many of the natives fell
down, grasped their legs and feet, and bathed
them with their tears, in token of their keen and
sincere sympathy with them in their common
loss. They were all very attentive during worship; Karaimoku, in particular, seemed deeply
afflicted with the bereaving ldi3sensation. After




212


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. VIII.


it was finished, Boki and Kaiakoiri requested
we would give directions respecting the funeral,
which they wished should be, in every respect, a
Christian burial. They said, they hoped Keopuolani had become a true follower of Jesus
before she died, and they wished her to be interred as his people were. It was truly affecting
to see the different companies that kept continually arriving from various parts of the island, to
weep on account of the death of their benefactress.
Sometimes they consisted of several hundreds,
sometimes not more than fifty. Men, women,
and children had a most abject appearance;
they were not clothed literally in sackcloth, but
in the most humiliating garments they could
find-an old fishing net, a ragged piece of mat,
or dirty piece of coarse tapa, being their only
covering. Three or four of the most aged generally preceded the rest, and on arriving opposite
the house, the crowd opened, and they advanced
till they came opposite the door, when two or
three together occasionally recited songs in honour of the deceased, accompanying them with
the most expressive gestures. After which they
joined in the general lamentations of the surrounding throng, till a fresh party arrived.
"About six P.M., Kuakini, governor of Hawaii, arrived from that island. When he approached the house where the chiefs were assembled, Hoapiri, Kamehamaru, Kauikeouli, Nahienaena, with several others, went out to meet
him. A clear space was formed in front of the
house, in which they first came in sight of each
other.  Here they gave vent to their grief in




ICHAP. VIII.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.


213


loud lamentations and wailings, and after exchanging a few words of sympathy with each
other on their common loss, went silently together
into the house where the deceased lay. At family
worship, in the evening, their grief seemed much
more moderate than in the morning.
At two o'clock in the afternoon of the 18th,
we repaired to the house of the deceased. The
members of the mission family, the foreigners at
Lahaina, together with the king and chiefs, sat
in a circle before the door, under the shade of
some large tou trees. The coffin was brought
out, and placed on a bier in the midst. We then
sang the seventeenth hymn in the Hawaiian collection. I engaged in prayer, and afterwards
preached from Rev. xiv. 13, 'And I heard a
voice from heaven saying unto me, Write,
Blessed are the dead which die in the Lord,' etc.
There were about four thousand present, yet the
most perfect silence pervaded the whole.  We
then sang the nineteenth hymn, after which the
procession formed, and, led by the American
consul, proceeded to the place of interment in
the following order:-First, the foreign visitors
and residents; next the mission family; then the
coffin, borne by six of her attendants, the pall
supported by five queens and the wife of Boki,
governor of Oahu. Immediately after the coffin followed the young prince and princess; then
the king and Hoapiri, husband of the deceased;
after them, Karaimoku and Boki; the other
chiefs followed, two and two; a number of female
mourners, particular attendants on Keopuolani,
with red paus (cloth worn round the loins) and




214


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. VIII.


black upper garments, closed the procession.
There were also four chiefs dressed in red feather
cloaks and helmets, which agreeably diversified
the scene. Minute guns were fired from the
vessels in the roads, and a large bell tolled till
the procession reached a new stone house, belonging to the young princess Nahienaena, in which
the corpse was to be deposited. On reaching it,
the procession halted before the door, a short
prayer was offered up, when the coffin was taken
in, and placed on two bedsteads, encircled by
many sets of thick curtains.  Karaimoku had
ordered a pane of glass to be put into the coffin
lid, immediately over the face, that they might
go and frequently gaze upon it. Most of the
chiefs went in to look at the deceased, after which
they returned sorrowing to their habitations."
The rank which Keopuolani held, being the
highest female in the nation; the respect, bordering upon veneration, in which she was held by
the people; the fact of her being the first of her
race baptized by the missionaries, and the steady
consistency of her deportment as a Christian, rendered her death an important event to the mission and the nation; and the influence of her
advice and example was powerful and salutary.
Among the many pleasing evidences of her piety,
particularly her concern for the spiritual welfare
of her children, the following may be noticed as
affording peculiar encouragement to the friends
of missions.
When she was taken seriously ill, in an
interview with a chief, she said, " Great is my
love to the word of God, by which I hope my




CHAP. VIII.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.


215


mind is enlightened.    The word of God is a true
word, a good word. Jehovah is a good God.
I love him, and I love Jesus Christ. I have no
desire for the former gods of Hawaii. They are
all false. But I love Jesus Christ. I have given
myself to him to be his.     When I die, let none
of the evil customs of this country be practised
at my death. * Let not my body be disturbed.
Let not my bones be separated, and the flesh
* At the death of chiefs, their bodies were always cut to
pieces, their flesh burnt, and the bones preserved. These
were committed to the care of some chief, and during his life
were venerated, or, indeed, worshipped.  When the chief
died who had the charge of the bones, they were secretly
conveyed to some unknown place, and nothing more was
heard of them. In some rare cases, however, they were
preserved for two generations. The prevalence of this practice accounts for Keopuolani's charge respecting her remains.
The common people are buried secretly in the night. This
practice prevails universally through the islands, except
among the few who regard the instructions of the mission.
The " evil customs," of which Keopuolani spoke, were of the
most criminal kind. It had, from time immemorial, been the
practice, at the death of high chiefs, for all the people to
indulge with impunity, and without restraint, in every kind
of wickedness. They threw off the little clothing which they
usually wore: a man might steal from any place with impunity; neighbours, who were at enmity, might take any revenge they could get; it was no crime for a man to burn his
neighbour's house, put out his eyes, take his life, or that of
any one of his family. Knocking out each other's teeth was
a common and almost universal practice during the days of
mourning. But if, by any means, a man was so fortunate as
not to lose any of his teeth by the violence of another, he
would, with a sharp-pointed stone, dig them out himself: for
it was a disgrace to any man not to lose some teeth at the
death of a high chief! In consequence of these customs,
there are few men to be found who have not lost some of:,their fore teeth.




216


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. VIII.


taken off, as in the days of dark hearts, but let
my body be put into a coffin.  Let the teachers
attend.  Let, me be buried in the ground after
the manner of Christ's people."
A few days before her death, she called her
husband, and said to him, " See that you take
good care of Nahienaena," (her daughter.) " See
that she is instructed in reading and writing,
that she may learn to love God and Jesus Christ.
Take care of my people when I am dead.   Be a
friend to them, and watch over their interests
with compassionate regard. After I am dead,
do not cast away the word of God, or the sabbath day. Neglect not prayer, neither cease to
love Jehovah, that he may love you, and that
we two may meet in heaven. I think a great
deal of my sins, and of the love of Jesus Christ.
He is very kind to me.  I hope he will take me
to his right-hand."
The day before her death, she conversed with
Karaimoku respecting her children.  She said,
" I wish much that my two children, Kauikeouli
and Nahienaena,* should know     God, should
serve him, and be instructed in Christianity.  I
wish you to take care of these my two children.
See that they walk in the right way. Let them
not associate with bad companions."  She then
added, " And do you not neglect praying to
a These children are modest and interesting. Kauikeouli
is nine, and Nahienaena is eight years of age. They have
both of them committed to memory an Hawaiian spelling
book, which has been printed; have made some advances in
English; and, considering their advantages, are respectable
scholars.




CHAP. VIII.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.        217:God. Cease not to regard the sabbath. Commit no sin, and love Jesus Christ, that we two
may meet in heaven." In the same interview
she expressed her earnest desire to be baptized.
Soon after this interview she called for the
king, her son, and her two other children, and
all the chiefs, whom she addressed thus:" I am now about to die. I shall leave my
children, my people, and these lands, and I wish
now to give you my last charge." She then
turned to the king, and said, " I wish you, after
my death, to be a friend to all the friends of your
father, and to all my friends. Take care of these
lands which you have received from your father;
exercise a tender care over the people. Protect
the missionaries, and be kind to them. Walk
in the straight path; keep the sabbath; serve
God; love him, and love Jesus Christ. Attend
also to the word of God, that you may be happy,
and that we two may meet in heaven."
She then turned to the chiefs, and said,
"Watch over the king, my son, and over my
two younger children. See that they are brought
up in the right way. Protect the missionaries,
and cease not to keep the commandments of
God."
In the morning of the day on which she died,
her two teachers, Taua and Auna, pressed
through the crowd of chiefs who opposed their
entrance, to her bedside.  Anna said, " How
do you feel, now you are about to leave the
world?"  She answered, " I remember what my
teachers told me. I pray much to Jesus Christ
ito be with me, and take me to himself. I am
U




218


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. IX.


now about to leave my children, my people, and
my teachers.  But it is not dark now; it would
have been had I died before these good times.
You must pray for me; and all the missionaries
must pray for me. I love you; I love them,
and I think I love Jesus Christ, and I trust he
will receive me."
CHAPTER IX.
Recommencement of the mission at Kairua-Population of the station and neighbourhood-Favourable
appearances among the natives-Proposal of lihoriho to visit England and America- Council of
the chiefs-Embarkation of the king and queenTheir attendants- Objects of the voyage- Their
arrival in England-Attentions paid them by the
government and nobility- Visits to places of public
resort-llness of the king and queen-Death of
the queen-Death of the king-Interview of the
survivors with his majesty George IV.-Character of Rihoriho- Character and disposition of the
queen-Affecting circumstances attending her departure for her native islands-Appointment of the
Blonde frigate to convey their bodies to the islands
-First intelligence of their death received by the
natives- Commendable conduct of the regent on the
occasion-Political state of the islands-Arrival
of the Blonde-Landing of the survivors-Interview of Lord Byron and suite with the king and
regent-Landing of the bodies-Funeral ceremonies at Oahu-National council-Departure of
the Blonde.
SHORTLY after the return of the missionaries,
from the services at IMaui, connected with the




CCHAP. Ix.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.         219
illness and death of Keopuolani, the report presented by the brethren who had visited Hawaii
came more fully under consideration, and it was
deemed expedient to renew endeavours for the
instruction of the inhabitants of Hawaii. Messrs.
Thurston, Bishop, and Ely, were appointed to
this important service; but, as circumstances
prevented two of the brethren from proceeding
thither, Mr. and Mrs. Thurston and family,
accompanied by the pious and faithful teacher,
Thomas Hopu, embarked on board the Nio, a
native brig, for Kairua. They were, on this
occasion, kindly favoured with a passage by
Naihe, and his estimable wife Kapiolane, who
were themselves proceeding in the same vessel.
Mr. and Mrs. Thurston spent a week very
pleasantly with the missionaries at Maui, after
which they pursued their voyage, and, on the
25th of November, reached Kairua, the residence of the governor, and the station formerly
occupied by Mr. Thurston. Here, under the
Divine favour, the mission was now resumed
with the most encouraging prospects of comfort
and usefulness. The governor generously furnished the missionary with a comfortable dwelling house, and erected a commodious and substantial chapel, sixty feet by thirty, which was
opened for public worship on the 10th of the following month, December. Divine service was
afterwards regularly held every sabbath, and the
congregation amounted to between six hundred
and a thousand hearers.
Ere long, under the Holy Spirit's influence,
the word dispensed, there is reason to believe,




220


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. IX.
I


became to many a savour of life unto life.
Naihe and Kapiolane, two intelligent chiefs,
with a number of their people, frequently came
from Kaavaroa, a distance of fourteen miles, for
the sake of being present at the religious services on the sabbath; and Kamakau, a chief of
the same station, soon appeared to have received
decisive spiritual benefit. The people generally
abstained from labour on the sabbath, and, in
the houses of many of the chiefs and people,
family worship was regularly observed morning
and evening: a school was also shortly opened,
at which about fifty scholars usually attended.
About the time of Mr. Thurston's arrival at
Kairua, the king visited Kuakini, the governor
of the island, and informed him of his intention to proceed, shortly, on a visit to England and the United States of America. A
council of chiefs had been summoned to assemble at Maui, to deliberate on this proposal;
and, after remaining nearly a week at Hawaii,
the king proceeded thither, for the purpose of
meeting the chiefs. It was their wish, that
in case of the king's concluding to take the
voyage to England, that one of the missionaries should accompany the royal party; and
accordingly, in compliance with this wish,
Messrs. Bingham and Ellis proceeded to Maui
in the early part of November. When the
council was assembled, it was soon perceived
that the king's mind was determinately set on
the voyage, and the consent of the chiefs was
therefore speedily given. It was resolved that
his majesty should embark on board the Eagle,




CHAP. IX.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


221


Captain Starbuck. His objects in visiting England, were to see the country, to acquire a better
knowledge of the nature of commercial transactions, to obtain some acquaintance with the
laws, usages, and institutions of England, and
to make arrangements with the British government for the protection and prosperity of the
Sandwich Islands.
It was the desire of the king, that Mr. Ellis
should accompany him, as his interpreter, to
England; and, in case he should afterwards determine upon visiting the United States, he proposed that Mr. Bingham should accompany him
in the same capacity there. But this arrangement was, unhappily, frustrated by the captain,
and the consequence was, that the king and queen
left their native islands without an interpreter fully
acquainted with the English language.  Their
departure took place on the 27th of November,
1823.
In their visit to England, the king and queen
were accompanied by a suite, which, though
much less numerous than that which invariably
attended their movements in their native islands,
included several individuals of influence and
rank. Among the principal of these was Boki,
the go:ernor of the island of Oahu, and Lilihah,
his wil; Kauruheimarama, a distant relation of
the king; Kakuanaoa and Kapika, two of his
favourite companions; the latter of whom was a
man of an amiable disposition, and, considering
the circumstances under which he had been
brought up, possessed great intelligence. He
had made a voyage to Canton, for the purpose
u2




222         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. IX
of acquiring mercantile information; and, from
the fact of his commanding the finest vessel
belonging to the king, a brig of about ninety
tons burden, he was sometimes called the admiral. On his return to the islands, he died at Valparaiso; but both with him, and with the others
who survived the death of the king, particularly
Boki, the officers of the London Missionary
Society had several interviews, and, during
their stay in this country, received the strongest assurance of their continued patronage and
support of the Christian Mission established
at the Sandwich Islands.  Many benevolent
individuals had also an opportunity of testifying
to them the deep interest they felt in the civil,
moral, and religious improvement of their countrymen.
The king and queen of the Sandwich Islands,
with their suite, landed at Portsmouth on the
21st and 22nd of May; and, a day or two afterwards, arrived at Osborne's Hotel in the Adelphi,
London, where they received great attention and
kindness. His Britannic Majesty's government,
having received information of their arrival from
Messrs. Boulcotts, the owners of the Eagle, immediately deputed a gentleman* to perform the
office of guardian to them, which he discharged
with much kindness.
The first object was to provide dresses suitable
to the climate, and also to the condition of the
wearers, and it was impossible for any persons to
be more tractable, or adapt themselves with more


* The Hon, Frederick Byng.




CHAP. IX.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


223


good temper to the usages of the country, than
the whole party. The decorum of their behaviour, during their residence at the hotel, is spoken
of in high terms of commendation; and it is
alleged, that not a single instance occurred of
their overstepping the bounds of decency and
civility, in their intercourse with the different
persons appointed to wait on them.
Their manners, indeed, are represented to have
been decorous, and indicative of self-possession,
on all occasions. When they were invited to a
large assembly at the late Mr. Secretary Canning's, a considerable number of respectable
looking persons crowded around to look at the
strange king and queen, and nobles, whose behaviour, however, betrayed none of the signs of
awkwardness and embarrassment, which apparently had been anticipated. The chiefs were
much delighted with the politeness of the Duke
and Duchess of Gloucester, who were of the
party.
Tamehameha and his companions were very
desirous to see all the public spectacles of London, and the first place they went to was Westminster Abbey, with which they were much
pleased. The music seemed to affect them a
good deal, and they were impressed with great
veneration for the place where they knew the
remains of so many great men were deposited.
On reaching the steps of Henry the Seventh's
Chapel, and hearing that the ancient kings of
England were buried there, they said it was too
sacred, and no argument could prevail upon the
king to enter it.  From the abbey they went




224


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. IX.


to the park, and could not sufficiently express
their admiration at the number of people and
equipages. It is represented as having been a
sight of no common magnificence.
In the course of the week they went to several other public places, and a pretty general
curiosity was now excited concerning them.
Most of the English nobility then in London
had been to visit them; and many of the ladies
had made useful and valuable presents to the
queen, particularly the Duchess of Northumberland, Mrs. Canning, and Lady Liverpool.
They had likewise, during the first and second
weeks, visited some of the ministers, and other
persons of distinction; and had been to Fulham,
whence they returned by water, and were delighted with the scenery; indeed, they were
remarkably alive to external beauty. One of
the sights that charmed them was the children at
Chelsea Hospital; it was particularly calculated
to interest Tamehameha, who had been now for
some time intent on educating his subjects.
The 10th of June had been fixed for a visit to
Mr. Whitbread's brewery, but Manuia, the
king's purveyor, became extremely ill, and the
king would not permit any one of the party to
go out while their brother chief was so distressed. He had been left in the Eagle to accompany the baggage, etc., to London; and having
landed both at Deptford and Wapping, is supposed to have caught his illness, which proved
to be the measles, while on shore at one of
those places.
Manuia seemed to recover a little the next




CHAP. IX.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.          225
day, and then the king, the admiral, and treasurer, went out to one or two places; but the rest
became heavy and uncomfortable. On the 12th,
Dr. Ley ascertained Manuia's complaint to be the
measles; and, on the 13th, Tamehameha, who
had hitherto been perfectly well, was taken ill in
the room of the exhibition of the Royal Academy, at Somerset House, where his royal highness the Duke of York had gone to meet the
party; between that day and the 20th, the whole
of the Sandwich Island chiefs and their attendants were taken ill. On the 21st, Dr. Holland
was called in; and, by the 24th, Tamehameha,
his queen, and Kapihe, were so much worse,
that it was thought advisable to consult Sir
Henry Halford; and, a few days afterwards,
Mr. M'Gregor, whose residence in hot climates, and consequent knowledge of the disorders prevalent there, it was hoped would be
of service.
Boki and Kakuanaoa, with all the inferior
persons, recovered rapidly, and, according to the:
advice they received, began to go out again;
but no argument could prevail on Lilihah, Boki's wife, to leave her sick friend, even for an
hour. The queen's illness began to take an
unfavourable appearance; her lungs appeared to
be seriously affected, and, in addition to the
medical men already in attendance, Mr. Alexander was called in. Tamehameha's disorder,
though violent, had no very alarming symptoms
at the time; and as Kapika, whose sufferings
had, next to his, been the greatest, had begun
to show evident signs of recovery, hopes were




226        MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. IX.
entertained that he, also, would speedily recover.
This was on the 4th of July. On the 8th, no
hope remaining of the queen's recovery, her hus
band was apprized of her danger. He caused
himself to be immediately placed in his arm
chair, and wheeled to her apartment, when, being
lifted upon her bed, and placed by her side, he
embraced her affectionately, and they both wept
bitterly. He then dismissed the attendants, and
they remained for some time alone together. At
five o'clock, he desired to be conveyed to his own
bed, where he lay without speaking, and the
queen died about an hour after he left her, that
is, about six o'clock in the evening of the 8th
of July, 1824.
Lilihah, whose dutiful and affectionate behaviour to her friend and mistress had been most
exemplary, took charge of her body, and disposed it after the manner of her country, unclothing it to the waist, leaving also the ancles and
feet bare, and carefully dressing the hair, and
adorning it with chaplets of flowers. The king
now desired the body might be brought into his
apartment, and laid on a small bed near him;
that being done, he sat up looking at it, but
neither speaking nor weeping. The medical attendants observed, that the state of Tamehameha
was such as to render it highly improper to keep
the queen's body near him, and it was therefo, e
proposed to him to allow it to be taken away;
but he sat silent, and answered no one, only by
gestures, showing that he forbade its removal.
At length, after much persuasion, and then leaving him to himself for a time, he suddenly made




CHAP. IX.]    SANDWICH ISLANDS.                227
signs that it might be taken away; which was
accordingly done, and the queen was again
placed on her own bed.*
From this day, the king's disorder rapidly
increased; the loss of the queen seemed to decide its issue; his spirits sank, his cough increased, and he himself declared he should not
long survive. To divert his thoughts, and to
lighten the disease, if possible, Mr. Byng caused
the whole family to be removed from     the apartments they had hitherto occupied, into those
belonging to the hotel on the other side of the
street, overlooking the river. On this occasion,
the implicit deference paid by the      Sandwich
Islanders to their king was strikingly displayed.
Kapika, the admiral, the only one of the followers
who had suffered from the disorder in a degree
at all equal to the king and queen, had by some
means incurred the displeasure of Tamehameha,
* Bulletin.-" The queen of the Sandwich Islands departed this life about half-past six this evening, without
much apparent suffering, and in possession of her senses
to a late moment. The king, in the midst of his deep sorrow,
manifested a firmness of mind which has penetrated every
body about him with a feeling of respect. Though very
anxious to express his grief in the manner of his country, and
to show the marks of deference which are usually paid to the
dead there, he submits, with good sense and patience, to
every suggestion which our habits dictate. We have every
reason to believe that his anxiety and depression of mind
have aggravated all the symptoms of his disease, which, but
for this cause, might, ere now, have terminated prosperously;
but we hope, in a day or two, that he will be better.
"Signed,    HENRY HALFORD.
HNRY rHOLLAND.
HEUGH LEY',"
" Thursday Evening, July 8, 1824."




228


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. IX.


who had forbidden him to appear in his presence.  This prohibition he strictly obeyed;
and even on the removal of the family, though
often entreated, he never would consent to venture into the presence, as he had not been called.
However, not long after the change of the
apartments, the disorder of the king assumed so
decided an aspect, that his near approaching
death could neither be concealed from himself
nor his attendants, and Kapika resumed his station among them. Yet still he dared not venture
to present himself too closely or too frequently
to his master. On the day of the king's decease
he was supported by pillows, and said little, but
repeated the'words, " I am dying, I am dying;"
within the curtains of the bed one of the chiefs
sat continually, with his face towards the king,
and his eyes fixed on him, in comformity, as
they said, with their native customs.   Poor
Kapika was invited to take the place, thereby to
prove his innocence of the supposed offence
which had incurred his master's displeasure;
but his respect for the king's orders prevailed
over all other considerations, and he refrained
from  exercising the honourable privilege of
watching the death-bed of his king and friend.
The day of the 13th of July was a very painful one, and the dying agony of the sufferer was
long: it was not until four o'clock in the
morning, of the 14th, Tamehameha I. breathed
his last.*
* Bulletin.-" The king of the Sandwich Islands departed
this life at four o'clock this morning. The alarming symptoms of his disorder rapidly increased within the last few
4




;CHAP. IX.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


229


During the whole of the painful scenes attending the deaths of these young sovereigns, the conduct of their followers was exemplary, especially
that of Lilihah, who displayed all the tenderness
and gentleness of her sex, and kind-heartedness
of her nation, as well as devotedness to her
chiefs.
The day preceding that of Tamehameha's
death, anxiety for the fate of his followers induced him to draw up a memorandum, or will,
which he caused Boki, Kekuanaoa, and M.
Rives to witness, and to which he affixed a
sign, saying, that he was following his beloved
wife to the grave, bequeathing whatever property he left in England to Boki, for the benefit
of his suite generally, and intimating his desire
that his own body, and that of his queen Kamehamaru, should be conveyed to their native
islands.  Tamehameha himself was the most
accomplished writer of the party, hut his exceeding weakness reduced him to the necessity of
simply making a mark to what may be considered as his will-the first written will that was
ever left by a Sandwich Islander.
Until such time as the wish of Tamehameha,
that his remains and those of his queen might be
conveyedr to his native country, could be complied with, it was resolved that their bodies
days, and he, at length, sunk under it without much apparent suffering.
"Signed,  MATTHEW JOHN TIERNEY.
HENRY HOLLAND,
HUGH L EY."
"Adelphi, July 14, 1824."
X




230


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. IX.


should be deposited in a vault under the church
of St. Martin's in the Fields: they were properly cased, and the external coffins were covered
with crimson velvet with gilt ornaments.
The death of the king and queen, so soon
after their arrival in England, was, in many
respects, an event deeply to be deplored. The
officers of the London Missionary Society were
unable to gain access to them until they should
have been introduced to his majesty; and the
king died on the very day on which that introduction was to have taken place. The same circumstance also prevented many Christian friends,
who felt interested in their welfare, from that
intercourse with them, which, under the blessing of God, might have been expected to have
strengthened the religious impressions they had
received from the instructions of the missionaries.
The deaths of Tamehameha and his queen
were the more regretted by King George iv.,
as there had been no opportunity of granting
them the personal interview which was the chief
object of their visit to Britain, and which his
majesty desired as a proof of courtesy to stranger
sovereigns, who, entered so lately within the pale
of civilization, had come so far to throw themselves at his feet, and to acknowledge his superiority. His majesty appointed the 11th of September as the day on which to see the surviving chiefs, at Windsor, whither they were conducted by Mr. Byng.
During the interview, his majesty recommended Boki, on his return to the Sandwich




CHAP. IX.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


231


Islands, both to pay attention to instruction himself, and to endeavour to enlighten and reform the people. The chief, who had kept a
journal during his residence in England, made
very full notes of what passed at this audience.
The time the chiefs passed in England, after
the king's death, was chiefly spent in seeing different manufactories, and short excursions in
London and its neighbourhood. The three superior chiefs had several interviews with Mr. Canning, which pleased them greatly; and, indeed,
his and Mrs. Canningss kindness to them  in
every thing was very great.
All their expenses were paid by the English
government.  His majesty directed that suitable and useful presents should be made to all
the islanders, and others sent to the young king,
and the other chiefs, beside agricultural implements, plants of useful fruits, seeds of vegetables,
and other things that might be of advantage to
the country. The money lodged at the Bank
was delivered, untouched, to Boki, who, with his
companions, purchased with it such things as
they thought agreeable or useful to themselves
or their countrymen.
On the 22nd of September they finally left
London, and went to wait at Portsmouth for the
arrival of the Blonde from Woolwich, where she
had taken on board all the baggage/ together
with the bodies of the king and queen. They
had previously received a visit from Lord Byron,
who commanded the Blonde, and for whom they
afterwards conceived a strong attachment.




. 232


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. IX.


While they were at Portsmouth, the late Rev.
Dr. Bogue, accompanied by several Christian
friends, visited Boki and his companions, and
offered up his prayers that God would preserve
and bless their return to their native islands.*
Rihoriho was born in the year 1795 or 1796.
His character in early life was not such as to
warrant great expectations. His natural disposition was frank and humane, and, except when
under the influence of ardent spirits, he was at
once good natured, dignified, and free.        His
general knowledge of the world was much greater
than could have been expected from one in his
situation, which might be accounted for by his
thirst for knowledge, accompanied by a retentive
memory. His diligence in pursuing his studies,
under the instruction of the missionaries, was
such, that he has often been seen seated at his
desk from nine in the morning till nearly sunset,
during which time his pen or his book have not
* Boki, together with his elder brother Kariamoku, (lately
deceased,) had invariably manifested his friendship towards the missionaries, by countenancing every effort to enlighten the people; and before ie left the islands to accompany his sovereign, there was reason to hope that he had
received favourable impressions of the religion in which he
had been instructed by the missionaries.  Since his return
he has taken a most decided stand in favour of Christianity,
and has given evidence of its influence on his heart, so uniform and satisfactory, that he has been admitted a member
of the Christian church in Oahu; and, in the general tenor of
his conduct, exhibits to his countrymen an example worthy
of their imitation, materially contributing to the advancement of civilization, education, and Christianity throughout
the islands.




CHAP. IX.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.          233
been out of his hand more than three quarters of
an hour.
It could not be said, with certainty, that Christianity exerted any decisive influence on his heart.
But it should be remembered, to his honour,
that he both received the missionaries cordially
on their first arrival, and afterwards treated them
with marked respect, often availing himself of
their knowledge and opinions. During the latter part of his life, he showed himself decidedly
favourable to their object, not only declaring his
conviction of the truth of Christianity, but attending public worship himself on the sabbath,
and recommending the same to his people.
Though not distinguished by the ardour and
strength of character of his father Tamehameha,
he possessed both decision and enterprise: the
abolition of the national idolatry was a striking
instance of the former; and his voyage to England of the latter.
The queen, who accompanied him, and who
died at the same time, was deeply regretted by a
fond mother, and an affectionate people. She
was the daughter of Tamehameha and Kalukua,
was two years younger than Rihoriho, and about
twenty-six years of age when she left the islands.
Distinguished for good nature, she was much
beloved by her subjects. The poor people, when
unable to pay their rent, when under the displeasure of the king or chiefs, or embarrassed on
any other account, frequently repaired to her,
and found a friend whose aid was never refused.
She was also kind to those foreigners who might
be distressed in the islands; and though she
x2




234        MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. IX.
never harboured any, or countenanced their absconding from their ships, she has often fed
them when hungry, and given them native tapa
for clothing.
Kamehamaru was at all times lively and
agreeable in company; but though her application to her studies was equal to that of the king,
her improvement in learning was more gradual,
and her general knowledge less extensive. She
excelled, however, in the management of his
domestic affairs, which were conducted by her
with great judgment and address; and, though
formerly accustomed to use ardent spirits, from
the time she placed herself under Christian instruction, she entirely discontinued that, and
every other practice inconsistent with her profession of Christianity; while her attention to
the duties of religion was maintained with a pleasing regularity. For the instruction and moral
improvement of her people, she manifested no
ordinary concern.  Long before many of the
leading chiefs were favourable to the instruction
of the people, or to their reception of Christianity,
Kamehamaru, on every suitable occasion, reconmmended her own servants to serve Jehovah the
living God, and to embrace every means of improvement within their reach.  At Honoruru
she erected a school, in which upwards of forty
children and young persons, principally connected
with her establishment, were daily taught to
read and write, and instructed in the first principles of religion. The native teacher, also, who
undertook their instruction, she almost entirely
supported. In this school she took a lively in



~~CnJIA.  IX.]  SANDWICH 1SLANDS.


235


Iterest, and marked the progress of the pupils
with evident satisfaction: in order to encourage
ithem, she frequently visited the school during the hours of instruction, accompanied by
a number of chief women. She also attended
the public examinations, and noticed those who
excelled on such occasions, frequently presenting
a favourite scholar with a slate, a copy book,
pencil, pen, or some other token of her approbation.
In her death the missionaries lost a sincere
friend; and her subjects, a queen who always
delighted to alleviate their distresses, and promote their interests.
Prompted by her affectionate disposition, she
sat, day after day, in company with her husband,.
by the couch of Keopuolani during her illness;
and, on these occasions, though there might be
several servants in attendance, she would allow
no individual but her husband or herself to hand
to the patient anything she might want, or even
to fan the flies from her person.
Her departure from the islands was attended
by circumstances deeply affecting to those who
witnessed this interesting scene. The king had
gone on board the Eagle, and the boat was waiting to convey her to the ship: she arose from
the mat on which she had been reclining, embraced her mother and relations most affectionately, and then passed through the crowd towards the boat. The people fell down on their
knees as she walked along, pressing and saluting
her feet, frequently bathing them with tears of
unfeigned sorrow,/and making loud wailing, in




236        MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. IX,
which they were joined by the thousands who
thronged the shore.
On reaching the water side, she turned, and
beckoned to the people to cease their cries. As
soon as they were silent, she said, " I am going
to a distant land, and perhaps we shall not meet
again. Let us pray to Jehovah, that he may
preserve us on the water, and you on the shore."
She then called Auna, a native teacher from the
Society Islands, and requested him to pray.
He did so; at the conclusion, she waved her
hand to the people, and said, " Aroha nui
ouhou;" (Attachment great to you.)  She then
stepped into the boat, evidently much affected.
The multitude followed her, not only to the
beach, but into the sea, where many, wading
into the water, stood waving their hands, exhibiting every attitude of sorrow, and uttering their
loud u-e! u-e! (alas! alas!) till the boat had
pulled far out to sea.
The first rumour of the melancholy event,
which, as with one stroke, deprived the natives
of the Sandwich Islands of both their sovereigns,
was conveyed by the whale ship Almira, which
anchored in the roads off Honoruru, the 9th of
March, 1825. On receiving it, two of the missionaries immediately hastened on board the vessel, to ascertain, if possible, whether it were
founded in truth or not. The letters they found
here awaiting them from the corresponding secretary, conveyed distinct information of the
death of the queen, and further papers received
from the ship Peru, in the course of the day,
fully confirmed the additional report of the de



CHAP. IX.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


237


cease of the king also.  As soon as the sad
tidings were communicated to Karaimoku, prime
minister and regent of the islands, he sent a note
announcing the intelligence to Kaahumanu and
Opiia, at Manoa, who returned him immediately an answer, in which they encouraged him to
pray with the heart to God, that he might show
mercy.
After returning from the ship, Mr. Bingham
went over to Manoa, and preached to the chiefs
and people there from the words of Job; " The
Lord gave, and the Lord hath taken away;
blessed be the name of the Lord."  He then returned and addressed the chiefs and people at
Honoruru. At the close of the service, Karaimoku rose, and of his own accord, proposed, in a.
most serious manner, to the assembly, and to
school teachers especially, to offer morning and
evening, for twelve days successively, the prayer
of contrition to God, that he would pardon them,
if their sins had occasioned the present visitation,
and succour and bless them in their trying emergency. At his request, the chiefs came from
Manoa, and, in a consultation, concluded to send
letters forthwith to the chiefs on the other islands,
apprising them of the sorrowful event, and giving them their official advice.
Pursuant to this resolution, Karaimoku and
Kaahumanu dictated letters to the chiefs, stating
the principal facts, charged them to keep the
people quiet, to direct their prayers and thoughts
to the God of heaven, and to wait for their
orders to assemble in a common council for the
good of the nation.




2;6        MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. IX.
In the afternoon, a number of serious persons
met for the purpose of prayer to the Father of
mercies; thus, showing that they had already
learned where to seek for consolation and support, in the hour of trial. Indeed, it was truly
satisfactory to witness the evidence now presented
of the change which had been taking place
in the character and habits of the people, during
the previous three months. Great and universal
as was the bereavement, it appeared to excite no
other feelings, than those of the most poignant
regret. A few attempts at the customary mode
of wailing, were observed by the missionaries;
but there was no disturbance of the general
tranquillity, or attempt to effect change in the
government of the islands.
"We think it probable," says Mr. Stewart,
in his journal written at this time, ' that our
friends in America will feel some solicitude, lest
the death of the king should prove an occasion
of insurrection or bloodshed in the islands; but
of this we have scarcely had a thought, much less
an apprehension. So long as the prince Kauikeouli lives, the right of succession is indisputable.  Rihoriho, in his council with his chiefs,
previous to his embarkation, formally and publicly appointed him successor, in case he should
never return; and, from the time of his departure,
the boy has been regarded, and officially addressed by the chiefs and the people as their
king. This has been more especially the case of
late; so that the intelligence has produced little
or no change in his standing in the government,
and none in his title, except the assumption of




CHAP. IX.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.


239


the name of Tamehameha inI. as the official
signature of the successor of Rihoriho.
"In every respect, a kind Providence seems
to have been preparing the way, most happily,
for the arrival of the tidings; the chiefs in power
were never, previously, in a state so favourable
to political integrity and peace. Auspicious as
the history of this mission has been ever since
its establishment, still the last months must be
considered as the commencement of a new and
more happy era, in its progress, than had previously been known.
" We have every reason to believe, that the
faithful promulgation of the principles of Scriptural truth, with the solemn sanctions inseparable
from them, which, for nearly five years have
been enforced on the leaders of these people, are
beginning to have their desired effect on their
characters and lives, and that many of the most
powerful of them are, from a real fear of God,
and a sincere love of his righteousness, ceasing
to do evil, and learning to do well.
" The young king, and every chief of any importance, have regular family worship with their
respective households, morning and evening,
never take a meal without thanksgiving, observe the sabbath with becoming    propriety,
attend the stated religious instructions, and studiously avoid every kind of amusement and
pastime not consistent with strict sobriety and
Christian decorum. Their whole minds, and
their whole time, seem given to efforts of selfimprovement; and, so far from becoming weary,
their desire, both of common and religious knowledge, seems to grow with their application."




`240       MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. IX,
Such was the state in which the melancholy
tidings of the death of their king and queen,
first reached the inhabitants of the islands; and,
as this intelligence preceded the return of the
bodies two months, they were, in some measure,
prepared for the solemn and affecting scene
which took place on the arrival of the Blonde
frigate, commanded by Captain Lord Byron, to
whom had been committed the charge of conveying the bodies back to their native shore.
No sooner was it understood that the above
vessel had anchored off Oahu, than Boki, the
principal chief who had accompanied the king
to England, attended by those of his countrymen
who had also returned, approached the shore,
amidst the deafening shouts of the people, some
of whom, forgetting all newly acquired habits
in the overwhelming grief of the occasion, rubbed their faces in the sand at Boki's feet, and
literally wept aloud. On landing, he was met
by his elder brother, Karaimoku, and other
distinguished chiefs, and after the first emotions
of mingled joy at meeting, and grief for the universal loss, had somewhat subsided, the survivors and their friends walked in solemn and
mournful procession to the place of worship,
where thanksgivings were presented to God, for
the merciful preservation of those who were
thus privileged to meet again, and supplications
were presented, that the afflicting dispensation,
which all so deeply felt, might exert a salutary
nfluence on the minds of the surviving chiefs,
aind the sorrowing nation at large.
Karaimoku then rose, and said, " We have lost
our king and queen; they have died in a foreign




CHAP. IX.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.          241
land; we shall see them no more; it is right
that we should weep, but let us not entertain
hard thoughts of God. God has not done wrong;
the evil is with us. Let us bow under his hand;
let all amusements cease; let our daily avocations
be suspended; and let the nation, by prayer, and
a cessation from ordinary pursuits, humble itself
before God fourteen days." Before the assembly
separated, Boki stood up, and, in a brief outline
of the voyage, narrated the most prominent
events that had transpired since his departure
from the islands; calling their attention particularly to the suitable and important advice he
had received from his majesty the king of Great
Britain, in an audience with which he was graciously favoured, namely, to return to his native
country, attend to general and religious instruction himself, and endeavour to enlighten and
reform the people.
By this advice, so well adapted to the newly
awakened feelings of the islanders, a deep and
favourable impression was produced on all present, and a new impulse given to the various
religious means already in operation, from which
it was not long before most advantageous results appeared.  The people were also made acquainted, by Boki and his companions, with
the kind reception, generous treatment, and
marked attentions, which the late king and queen
and their suite had received while in England.
On the 7th of May, 1825, in accordance with
previous arrangements, Lord Byron, and the
officers and scientific gentlemen of the Blonde
frigate, landed in the early part of the day,
Y




242          MISSIONARY RECORDS.      [CHAP. IX,
under a salute, and were presented to the king.
They were introduced by Boki, and the Eng
lish consul, to the regent Karaimoku, to the
young king Kauikeouli, to the young princess
Naheenaena, to the old queen Kaahumanu, and
the other chiefs, all assembled and orderly arranged in a neatly thatched hall, about fifty
feet in length.
At the head sat the young king and his sister
upon a sofa, with several superb kahires * poised
near them. On their right, down the side of
the hall, were seated the chief women; on the
left, in like manner, the chief men of the nation.
A little in front of the centre of this line sat
Karaimoku, with his interpreters and Christian
teachers. All were dressed in European fashion,
and the young princess had the addition of a
splendid feather pau,t made for her in consequence of the anticipated arrival of the king, her
brother, from England.     It consisted of an immense number of very small bright yellow feathers, ingeniously laid upon netting, with silken
lining. She had, however, some scruples of conscience about appearing in the ancient style, with
feather paus aud hahires, lest God should be displeased with her for seeming to sanction their
* A kahire, or kahile, (the r and I in this language being
used indiscriminately,) is made of feathers, much in the
same manner as the plumes used by military officers. They
are, however, of much greater magnitude, some being described as twenty feet in length. Being of divers colours,
they are among the most splendid of objects.-EDIT.
t The pau, as worn by the common people, is a piece of
native cloth, three or four yards long, and about four feet
wide, worn around the loins. —EDIT.
1




HiAP. IX.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.


243


formner heathenish customs; but she was pretVailed on to wrap one end of the long pau round
lher waist, over a black silk gown.
As Lord Byron and the officers of the Blonde,
including several young noblemen, the scientific
gentlemen, and the chaplain, were introduced,
those who were assembled to receive them all
rose respectfully, except the young king and the
young princess. When made acquainted with
the different individuals, Lord Byron delivered
the presents from the king of England;-a gold
watch, and a likeness, in wax, of Rihoriho, to
Karaimoku; a silver tea-pot to Kaahumanu;
and a full suit of royal Windsor uniform, with
hat and sword, to Kauikeouli, which were delivered to him by the hands of two young noblemen.   They were much gratified with these
tokens of respect and kindness from king George
the Fourth, and expressed their thanks. Karaimoku said to Lord Byron, s I am very happy
by your coming to this country, and by your
kindness towards us."  Lord Byron said, he
was very happy to have this service to perform
for his king and country, and that he desired
only to show them kindness.
Karaimoku then proposed, if agreeable to
Lord Byron, that they should now have prayers
together, on account of this interesting interview,
to which his lordship cheerfully consented. One
of the missionaries being called upon, offered a
prayer suited to the occasion, partly in the
English, and partly in the Hawaiian language,
that all present might have opportunity to join
in the thanksgivings, and supplications, and




244


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. IX.


ascriptions of praise, to the living God, by whom
kings reign and princes decree justice.
Suitable refreshments were then served. The
utmost propriety of conduct in both parties
marked the whole interview, and, with no disparagement to any individuals present, it is but just
to say, that the affability and dignified courteousness of Lord Byron, and the civility and Christian sobriety of Karaimoku, reflected honour on
the countries to which they respectively belong,
and must have left a very favourable impression
on every spectator.
Four days afterwards, proper arrangements
having been made, the bodies of the king and
queen were removed from the Blonde, and landed
by his lordship.  The ponderous and elegant
triple coffins, of lead, mahogany, and oak, covered with crimson velvet, and richly studded
with gilt nails and ornaments, and weighing
together about two thousand two hundred
pounds, were placed upon two wagons covered
with black tapa, in the form of a hearse, and
drawn by forty chiefs of the middle and lower
ranks. To guard against every possible interruption of the common people, who flocked together from every quarter, two lines of native
soldiers were formed at a little distance from
each other, extending from the beach to the chapel, a distance of half a mile. The procession
was formed at the landing, in the following order.
First, the lofty and superb national kahires,
eight or ten in number, black, green, and red,
from twenty to twenty-five feet in length; next
the marines of the Blonde, in their uniform;




CHAP. IX.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


245


then the band of music; then the gentlemen of
the mission, and the chaplain and surgeon of the
Blonde; then the corpses, followed by Kauikeouli and Naheenaena, the former supported by
the consul, and the latter by Lord Byron: then
came Kaehumanu, Kaniu, mother of the deceased
queen, then Boki, Adams, Opiia, Hoapiri, the
step-father of Rihoriho, etc. etc.
The procession moved in slow and decent order,
between the two lines of the guard. The gazing
multitude of the natives were, by an order from
the chiefs, prohibited from approaching within
fifty yards. Minute guns were fired from the
fort and ships, and the bell tolled. The procession stopped at the door of the chapel, where a
few appropriate passages, selected from the
church service, were read by the Rev. Mr.
Bloxam, chaplain of the Blonde. A hymn was
read, and a short discourse in the native language, delivered by one of the missionaries, from
the words of Paul, " Since by man came death,
by man came also the resurrection of the dead,"
1 Cor. xv. 21.  The procession then entered
Karaimoku's large inclosure, and moved to his
thatched house, fitted up for the temporary reception of the bodies, by being arched over head,
and completely lined with black tapa, and having a firm platform erected at one end, covered
with mats. At the door, the marines rested on
their arms reversed, and the coffins were removed
from the wagons, placed upon the platform, and
delivered to the particular charge of Karaimoku,
who had remained at the house to receive them.
Part of a funeral hymn was sung to a tune of
~2




246


2MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. IX,


Pleyel's, aided by the band, with solemn effect;
and a prayer in the native language closed the
solemn service.
Towards evening Mr. Bingham called on
Karaimoku, and found him sitting in a thoughtful mood by the cofins, that inclosed the remains of his children, as he called them.
On the morning of the 6th of June, the
chiefs had an interesting council, at which Lord
Byron, the consul, Mr. Bloxam, and the missionaries were present.  The chiefs expressed
their determination to support Kauikeouli's right
of succeeding his brother in the sovereignty, and
their desire that he might have a Christian education under the instruction of the missionaries,
and that the people might learn and obey the word
of God. Lord Byron handed in a paper for
their perusal at their leisure, containing his
friendly advice. He also made some remarks,
in reply to the interrogation of the chiefs, respecting his views of the continued operations of
the American mission. On the part of the missionaries, the assurance was given, that they had
no intention or permission to interfere with the
commercial or political interests of the government, but should confine their attention to the
mental and moral improvement of the nation,
and make it their object to enlighten the people
in the doctrines and duties of the Bible, and to
lead them to the practice and enjoyment of the
Christian religion. Lord Byron assured them,
and the chiefs, of his decided approbation of their
continuing their operations while these principles
were adhered to.




CHAP. IX.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


27


The whole business was transacted in a very
amicable manner, and the council closed with a
prayer, offered partly in English, and partly in
the Hawaiian language.
In the afternoon, his lordship gratified the
chiefs, by showing them the military exercises
of the marines of the Blonde, who came on shore
for that purpose, under the command of Captain
Tailor. Towards evening, his lordship went
with the chiefs to the monthly prayer meeting.
Mr. Bishop addressed the meeting on the predicted universal dominion of Christ, from Psalm
lxxii. 11; "All kings shall fall down before
him: all nations shall serve him." Agreeably to
the wish of Karaimoku, and some other chiefs,
who desired that their young king might become
a disciple of Christ, a special prayer was offered
for his conversion and salvation, and for the
peace and prosperity of his reign.
The Blonde afterwards visited the large island
of Hawaii, and proceeding along the eastern
shore, entered the wide harbour called by the
natives Waiakea, where the Blonde remained
some time at anchor. In honour of its commander, the port has since been called Byron's
Bay.
After returning to Oahu, and renewing his
friendly intercourse with the chiefs and the missionaries, Lord Byron took his leave, and sailed
for the South American station, on the 12th of
July, 1825.




MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. X.


CHAPTER X.
Introduction of the rite of Christian marriage among
the people-Commencement of a station at Byron's
Bay and Kaavaroa-Death of Keeraumoku, the
governor of Maui-Removal of his remains to
Kairua-lllness of Taumarii-His experience of
the supporting influence of the gospel-General
lamentations among the people-Insurrection in
the island of Tauai-Preservation of the mission
family and Karaimoku-Bemoval of the missionaries to Oahu-Fearful out-breaking of immorality-Defeat of the insurgents- Clemency of the
Christian chiefs towards the vanquished-Letter
of Lanui —Murderous treachery of one of the idolatrous warriors-Revival of religion after the
war-Admission of native chieftains to the church
at Oahu and Lahaina-Account ofBuaiti, a blind
man-Progress of education-Letters from   the
regent and the prime minister of the government to
the secretary of the American Missionary Society
-Hostility and violence offoreigners against the
missionaries-Progress of improvement among the
people-Departure of Mr. Loomis and       Dr.
Blatchley for America-Enactment of laws by
the chiefs.
DURING the period, between the departure of the
king and queen and the return of their bodies
in the Blonde, of which the foregoing is a brief
account, several events of importance to 'the mission had occurred among the islands.    In the
month of October, 1823, the rite of Christian
marriage was introduced in the island of Maui,
on occasion of the proposed conjugal union of
Hoapiri and Kalaliua. These were both persons




CHAP. X.]   SANDWICH ISLANDS.          249
of high rank, and both profesed Christians; and
they were publicly united in marriage by the
Rev. W. Richards, in the mission chapel at
Lahaina, in the presence of a large assembly of
natives.  The obligation of the marriage vow
has since been recognized by the rulers and people in all the other islands, and a public religious
ceremony is now universally observed on the
occasion of entering the conjugal state, by all
persons professing Christianity.
In the month of January, 1824, a new
mission was commenced on the eastern side
of Hawaii, at a part of the coast about forty
miles from the great volcano. From the name
of the harbour on the shore of which the station
was fixed, it received the name Waiakea, (wide
or broad water,) though the harbour has since
been called Byron's Bay. Messrs. Ruggles and
Goodrich, by whom the mission was commenced,
reached Waiakea on the 24th of January, and
were cordially received by the people, who yet
seemed but little disposed to attend to the message. Two small schools were, with some difficulty, commenced, as the children manifested
great unwillingness to attend, unless they were
paid for learning. In the middle of the month
of May following, a neat, but not a large chapel,
built with native materials, was finished, and
opened for public worship; and though the
numbers attending at first were but small, the
missionaries were encouraged by beholding a
gradual increase.
Early this year, Mr. Ely, who had accompanied his brethren to Byron's Bay, joined the




250


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. X.


mission at Kairua, and shortly afterwards proceeded to labour at Kearakekua, about fourteen
miles distant, the spot where Captain Cook was
killed, and where Naihe, Kapiolani, and Kamakau, with other favourable chiefs and their people, were residing.
While the Lord was thus extending the usefulness of the mission, the faith of the brethren
was painfully exercised by the sudden removal,
by death, of some of their best and earliest friends.
Amongst the first of these was Keeaumoku,
sometimes called by foreigners, Governor Cox.
This chief was the son of Keeraumoku, the warlike and ambitious chief of Kairua and the
northern part of Hawaii, who was commander
in chief of Tamehameha's forces in all his war
campaigns, and who was the predecessor of
Karaimoku, as prime minister in the government
of the islands. He appears to have been a man
of adventurous, daring, and sanguinary character; was a principal agent in elevating Tamehameha to the throne of Hawaii; and in the
battles which prepared the way for the subjugation of the other islands, he bore a conspicuous part.  His family comprised by far the
most powerful portion of the aristocracy of the
islands.
Under Keopuolani, Keeraumoku was governor
of Maui. In person and disposition he resembled Kaahumanu more than any other member
of the family; and, prior to the frequent attacks
of disease, which he experienced during the last
years of his life, appears to have possessed, in
some degree, the enterprise which marked the




CHAP. X.]   SANDWICH ISLANDS.           251
character of his father. He was among the first
to sanction the residence of the missionaries from
America, and uniformly proved their friend. He
was the first to establish a school for the improvement of the people, and to adopt family
'worship in his own house. The illness which
immediately preceded his dissolution was painful,
and somewhat protracted; at first, some of the
chiefs believed him to be suffering from sorcery,
but afterwards they entertained more rational
notions. During his illness, he was brought to
Oahu, where Mr. Ellis visited him daily. He
sometimes observed the chief engaged in ejaculatory prayer. " Lord, thou knowest my
deeds from  my youth up; thou knowest my
sins; Lord, forgive them; save me by Jesus
Christ, the only Saviour;" were some of the expressions he was once heard to use. He wished
to be baptized when near his end; this, however,
it was thought proper to decline, lest he or the
natives should think there was any saving efficacy connected with this Christian rite, or that
it would secure the soul's acceptance with God,
irrespective of that moral purity, or sanctifying
grace, of which it is the appointed emblem. He
died at Honoruru, on the 22nd of March, while
one of the missionaries was engaged in the act
of prayer by his bedside; and it was hoped, by
those who witnessed his last momients, that his
spirit entered into the abodes of rest and happiness.
Matheson, in his " Narrative of a Visit to
Brazil, Chili, Peru, and the Sandwich Islands,"
in the years 1821 and 1822," gives the following




252        MISSIONARY RECORDS.   [CHAP. X.
account of a visit which he paid to the establishment of this chief:-" August 5. This morning I went to Cox, intendng to purchase some
goats. I expected to find him, as usual, either
sleeping, or smoking, or drinking, or busy trafficking like myself. The door of his hut was half
open, and I was about to enter unceremoniously,
when a scene, too striking ever to be forgotten,
and which would require the hand of a master
painter to do it justice, suddenly arrested my
attention.
" About a dozen natives, of both sexes, were
seated in a circle, on the matted floor of the
apartment, and, in the midst of them, sat John
Honoree, the Hawaiian catechist. All eyes were
bent upon him; and the variously expressive
features of each individual marked the degree
of interest which had been excited in his mind.
So absorbed, indeed, were they in the business
which had assembled them, that my abrupt appearance at the door, created for some time
neither interruption nor remark. The speaker
held in his hand the Gospel of St. John, as published at Tahiti, and was endeavouring, by signs
and familiar illustrations, to render its contents
easy of comprehension. His simple, yet energetic manner added weight to his opinions, and
proved that he spoke, from personal conviction,
the sincere and unpremeditated language of the
heart.
" The chief himself stood in the back ground,
a little apart from the rest, leaning upon the
shoulder of an attendant. A gleam of light
suddenly fell upon his countenance, and disclosed




ICHAP. X.]   SANDWICH ISLANDS.          253
features on which wonder, anxiety, and seriousness, were imprinted in the strongest characters.
-He wore no other dress than the maro round:his waist; but his tall athletic form, and dignified demeanour, marked at one glance his rank
and superiority over all around. One hand was
raised instinctively to his head, in a pensive
attitude; his knitted brows bespoke intense
thought, and his piercing eyes were fixed upon
the speaker, with an inquiring, penetrating look,
as much as to say, ' Can what you say be really
true?' I gazed for some moments with mute
astonishment, turning my regards from one to
the other, and dreading to intrude upon the privacy of persons so usefully employed. At last,
the chief turned round, and motioned with his
hand, in a dignified manner, for me to withdraw.
I did so; but carried away in my heart the remembrance of a scene, to which the place, the
people, and the occasion, united in attaching a
peculiar interest.
" I learned, afterwards, that Cox had promised
to build a school house, and present it to the
missionaries for their use. A donation, which,
considering his acknowledged love of money,
affords no mean proof that his inquiries into the
truth of the new religion had not been altogether fruitless."
As soon after the decease of the chief as suitable arrangements could be made, his body was
conveyed to Kairua, his own hereditary district,
and the place of his father's sepulchre, where
his remains were deposited in a stone building,
prepared to receive them.
z




254        MISSIONARY RECORDS.    [CHAP. X,
The death of the governor of Maui was
speedily followed by another event similar in kind,
but still more afflictive, especially in the effects
it produced. This was the death of Taumuarii,
king of Tauai, which took place on the 26th of
May, 1824. Taumuarii was a warm friend and
steady patron of the mission. A deep interest
attaches to his history, not only from the superior characteristics by which he was distinguished, but from the circumstance of his having
been betrayed, so to speak, into a sort of dignified captivity, under which he remained uttil
his death. He was more civilized, dignified,
and Christianlike, in his general deportment,
than any other chief: and it has been said of him,
by one who had many opportunities of observing
his character, that he was never guilty of a word,
look, or action, unbecoming a prince; or, what
is far more important, inconsistent with the character of a professedly religious man. His high
features, and slightly stooping shoulders, gave
him a patrician and venerable look. His manners were easy and gentlemanlike, and as a
c" royal captive," to those acquainted with his
public and private history, he was a truly interesting object.
His illness was but short. During its continuance, Mr. Ellis visited him daily, and enjoyed
some hours of most delightful conversation with
him. He was never loquacious; and, although
he was abundantly supplied with every article
that could conduce to his comfort, there was not
only an habitual dejection on his countenance,
but, except on topics of unusual interest, an ap



CVtHAP. X.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


255


parent aversion to conversation. When he spoke,
his words were few, but weighty and judicious;
and there is every reason to believe that he was,
in the strictest acceptation of the term, a true
Christian. On every occasion he displayed a distinct apprehension of Divine truth, with a lively
and permanent susceptibility of its influence;
and, after he became acquainted with the gospel,
the life which he maintained was uniformly upright, honourable, and irreproachable. The last
evening of his life, he observed, with visible satisfaction of mind, that he was resting on Christ,
that he thought only and constantly of him, and
that he believed he was not forgotten by him.
His last hours were remarkably tranquil; his
last breath without a struggle.
In strong contrast with this scene was the
loud and general lamentation around the house
in which he died. In pursuance of the native
customs, no sooner was it known that he was in
the very last agony, than Kaahumanu ordered
the door to be fastened, and the window curtains
dropped, and began preparing the corpse for exhibition to the people, who had assembled in
multitudes around. A sofa was spread with a
rich mantle, and on this the lifeless body was
laid, the lower extremities being wrapped in
folds of satin, and the head adorned with a
wreath of feathers, which passed over and concealed the eyes. This adjustment was considered
an important matter, not only connected with
the appearance of the body immediately after
death, but a necessary act in order to the departed




2.56       MISSIONARY RECORDS.    [CHAP. X.
spirit's entering Meru, or joining the society of
happy spirits in the other world.
The crowd without, having in the mean time
received some intimation of the event, now redoubled their lamentations, and rushed from all
directions towards the windows and doors, so
that it was difficult to keep them closed; as soon,
therefore, as the body was thus laid out, the curtains in the windows of the room were again
drawn up, and an indescribable scene of wailing
ensued.
The body was conveyed to Lahaina, in the
island of Maui, to be deposited, at his special
request, in the same sepulchre with Keopuolani;
it having been agreed upon, prior to her decease,
that their bodies should be deposited side by side
in the grave, that they might rise together
on the morning of the resurrection. Through
the aboundings of Divine mercy, there is reason
to believe both closed their earthly career under
the supporting and animating influence of ashope
full of immortality.
At nine o'clock in the morning of the 28th of
May, the members of the mission family, then at
Honoruru, went to the royal residence, to attend
religious services before the embarkation of the
funeral party. Amidst a very large assemblage
of chiefs, foreigners, and common people, the
coffin, covered with a pall of black velvet, was
carried into the open air in front of the house.
The chiefs, dressed in deep mourning, surrounded the coffin, Kaahumanu and Keariiahonui taking their seats near the head. The mis



cHAP. X.]     SANDWICH ISLANDS.


257


siion family and the foreign residents occupied
the verandah, into which the doors and windows
of the second story opened; while Mr. Ellis and
Mr. Stewart stood in the front door below. After
a hymn and prayer, Mr. Ellis preached from the
words,  Be ye also ready," Matt. xxiv. 44. The
solemn services were afterwards closed by singing a suitable hymn in the Hawaiian language.
The corpse was then immediately taken on board
a small vessel, followed by the nearest relatives
and friends of the deceased; Mr. Ellis also accompanied them to Maui; and on the 30th,
which was the sabbath, the interment took place
at Lahaina, in a style somewhat similar, though
less imposing, than that in which Keopuolani's
remains had been conveyed to the tomb. The
misfortunes of Taumuarii had procured for him
a large measure of sympathy, even from the
native chieftains.  His mild, benevolent, and
peaceable disposition, had also very generally
secured for him the affection of the people, who
always regarded him as their friend.  His uniform encouragement of the missionaries, and the
untarnished lustre of his own example as a professed Christian, produced an effect upon all
classes equally powerful and beneficial. His
removal was felt to be a public loss, and the expressions of poignant sorrow were in most instances sincere, and not the observance of a
heartless custom, as was frequently the case on
similar occasions.
A short time previous to the death of Taumuarii, he had, by will, secured his property,
and the island of Tauai, to Karaimoku, in. trust
z2




258         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. X.
for Rihoriho, who was then in England. It is
thought that his son George, or Humehume, as
he was more generally called, was not a party to
this arrangement; or, if his concurrence in it
had been obtained during his father's lifetime,
there were not wanting those who, after the
death of the king, sedulously stirred him up to
dissatisfaction with it, and stimulated him to resentment. When Karaimoku, who had been appointed by Taumuarii, his guardian, went down,
with about forty followers, to fix the future government of the islands, many of the chiefs
brought him presents, thereby paying him homage as their chief. Among others, George
was proceeding down the river from his district,
with a canoe laden with provisions and fruits;
but, while he was yet on the way, Tiaimakani,
who was afterwards an active promoter of war,
with several other warrior chiefs, met him, stopped his canoe, and said, "You shall not pay
him homage, neither will we; come with us; you
shall be our king; the islands are yours, as they
were your father's; you shall be king, and we
are the warriors. Many will fight for you."
George proceeded no farther with his presents,
but, uniting with them, formed a party, and soon
afterwards commenced hostilities, by making an
attack on a principal fort in the island. The
war broke out decisively on the 8th of August.
This day, whether by chance or contrivance, was
a sabbath day; and it was about day-break,
on the morning of it, that George attacked the
fort at Waimea, and was not repelled before
ten of the assailants, and six of the government




CHAP. X.]   SANDWICH ISLANDS.          259
party were killed. The firing continued about
half an hour, when the rebel party retreated.
Karaimoku, immediately after the defeat of the
assailants, sent for the missionaries to return
thanks to God, with him, for his deliverance; to
inform them that a small vessel would sail immediately to Oahu for assistance; and to urge their
departure, with their families, by the opportunity;
assuring them that he would protect them with
his life as long as he lived; but intimating a fear,
that, from the weakness of the party with him,
they might all perish. They reached Oahu on
the 10th of August.
" Our friends,' says Mr. Stewart, in his journal of that day's date, " have suffered much from
the horrors of the scene they witnessed at the
storming of the fort, and on their visit to it after
the battle, while it was yet filled with the bodies
of the slain, and echoing with the groans of the
wounded and dying; much from anxiety for the
safety of Karaimoku; and much from fatigue
and privation, having embarked without taking
any refreshment, or preparing any thing for the
voyage, which has been forty-eight hours long.
They were all completely drenched with the surf,
in getting off in a canoe to the schooner, and
had not the means of changing the clothes,
even of the two infants with them.
" The evening has been one of intense interest,
while we have listened to the narrative of our
friends, and rendered our devout thanksgiving,
that they have been brought safely to us, from
amidst 'the ragings of the people,' and the
scenes of death."
One of the rebel chiefs, a fine looking young




260


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. X,


man, was made captive when his party were repulsed.  He requested to be shot; but was
bound hand and foot, according to the custom of
the country, and carried on board the pilot boat.
Mr. Bingham saw him in the evening, after they
had put to sea, seated against the timbers of the
vessel in the main hold. In the morning, the
prisoner was gone; and, on inquiry, the captain,
without speaking, by very significant gestures,
made known his fate: he had been thrown overboard in the dead of the night, with his cords
upon him, when mid-way between Taui and
Oahu. This was the manner in which, after the
abolition of the tabu, those guilty of high offences
against the government, were generally despatched. During the reign of idolatry, they
were devoted in sacrifices to the gods.
A thousand men were ordered to be in readiness to embark from Honoruru by sun-rise in
the morning, for the relief of Karaimoku; and
scarcely any thing was heard all night, but the
roll of the drum, and the discharge of musketry,
by way of proving their fitness for use. Chiefs
and people entered fully into the spirit of the occasion, no one being abroad without some of the
insignia of war.
Scenes of riot and inebriation, which, in countries more civilized than the Sandwich Islands,
have been the frequent accompaniments of war,
prevailed at Honoruru on this occasion. The
news of the war at Taui, and the absence of the
most powerful of the rulers, excited in the farmers, and the common people throughout the district, a more general spirit of drunkenness than
had been known for some time past. For several




CHAP. X.]   SANDWICH ISLANDS.


261


days the greater portion of the whole population
were in a state of intoxication, and given up
night and day to gambling, riot, fighting,
and every description of revelry. Almost the
whole of the pupils at the mission school were
sent to Taui, or taken off to Hawaii; so that, for
a time, all attention to religion appeared to be
given up by many; and the natives seemed in
a state scarcely less brutalized and revolting
than must have been common under the former
system of idolatrous abominations.
Intoxicating liquors had, about this time,
been imported in large quantities into the islands,
but the principal means of indulgence, among
the inhabitants in general, was a species of rum,
the production of rude distilleries of their own;
and a fermented liquor of inebriating quality,
which they manufactured from the sugar cane,
the sweet potatoe, and the baked root of the
dracoena, an article exceedingly saccharine, and
capable of being made into a very strong beer.
For the art of distillation, and for that of brewing also, the islanders appear to have been early
indebted to the skill and vicious habits of two or
three convicts from Port Jackson, who found it
convenient to exchange the place of their exile,
and secured a passage from Botany Bay to
Hawaii.
It is scarcely possible, for the inhabitants of a
civilized country to imagine the scenes presented
at one of these periods of general inebriation,
when men, women, and children meet every
where under all the wild excitement of liquor;
and the various disgusting relics of heathenism,




262        MISSIONARY RECORDS.    [CHAP. X.
the singing, dancing, shouting, and fighting,
thrust themselves on the observation at every
turn.
In the island of Maui, amongst other subjects
of regret and horror belonging to this season, was
the return of the people, under the almost universal excitement, to many of these familiar habits
and amusements. One of these, called mozu-moku,
a kind of boxing, was very generally revived. It
is a national game, regulated by established
usages; to secure an adherence to which, managers and umpires are appointed, who preside
over it, and determine points of dispute. The:
champions usually belong to different chiefs, and
enter the ring inspirited by the pride of clanship,
as well as by the ambition of personal distinction.  When one has been so prostrated as to
resign the contest, the victor paces the circle
with an air of defiance, challenging any other to
a trial of strength and skill; and thus, in the
course of half an hour, a dozen may successively
lose a prospective triumph, by being compelled
to yield to the superior skill or muscular power
of some succeeding combatant, till at last the
arena is cleared.
A well directed, blood-starting, or levelling
blow, is followed by unbounded applause from the
surrounding multitude, testified in the most appropriate manner, by yells and shouts, which make
the air resound; while the tossing of thousands
of arms into the air, jumping, dancing, and
clapping of hands, prolong the expression of
delight.
" On Wednesday, the 16th," Mr. Stewart writes,




CISHAP. X.]   SANDWICH ISLANDS.


263


Ithc state of things continued to become more and
'more dreadful, until the chief in supreme authority, who had never been very friendly to the object of the mission, felt it necessary to interpose,;ith the arm of power. On Saturday afternoon,
~:.when the boxing matches threatened every moj ment to lead to scenes of unrestrained violence:i and murder, and stones and clubs had began to
be used, an armed band was sent from the fort,
to disperse the people by musket and bayonet;
i and, immediately afterwards, heralds were sent
I through the district, to proclaim a law against:all further drinking of rum or beer, against all
boxing and fighting, and against every breach of
the sabbath, on penalty of the displeasure of the
government, and a fine of a hundred dollars for
' each offence. This had the desired effect, and
the whole settlement remained in perfect order
and quietude."
For some time before this, the chiefs had expressed their wish and purpose to extend instruction in reading and writing to the whole population; and only waited for books, and an increase
in the number of suitably qualified teachers, to
put the resolution, as far as practicable, into effect. A knowledge of this having reached some
of the maka ainana, or farmers of Lahaina, who
had not entered into the recent dissipation, application was made by them to the missionaries, for
books, and slates, and an instructor; and the
first school, consisting of about thirty individuals, ever formed among that class of people, was,
in the course of a few days, established within the
enclosure which surrounded the mission house.




264


MISSIONARY RECORDS.  [CIIAP. X.


This event was regarded as very important,
believing, as the friends of the people did, that
the introduction of books and slates among the
common people would prove, as it had done
among the chiefs, the most effectual means of
withdrawing them from their idle and vicious
habits, and of bringing them more readily under
the influence of the pure and peaceful principles
of the Bible.
The vessel which conveyed the missionaries to
Oahu, had been sent as an express for reinforcements; and a thousand men speedily embarked
at Oahu for the scene of action. A battle was
soon after fought, in which one of the king's
party fell, and thirty or forty of the insurgents.
By the wanton rage of the soldiery, the number
of the slain was soon after increased to a hundred; and, probably, it may hereafter be found,
that in different parts of the island the havoc continued. Several chiefs were among the killed,
and one was taken prisoner.
George evaded his pursuers till the 16th of
September, when he was found on the eastern
part of the island, in a wretched condition. Without clothes, without food, without arms; half
famished, and half intoxicated; his only possession was a joint of bamboo filled with rum, which
he immediately swallowed, and the effect of
which, in his debilitated state, went nearly to the
terminating his life. He was treated by Karaimoku with kindness and humanity; a pleasing
and satisfactory proof of the effect of the humane
principles of Christianity, with which this able
chieftain had been made acquainted by the mis



iHAP. X.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


265


'ionaries. In former times, the death of a revolting chief would have immediately followed his
captivity.
By the middle of September, the authority
of the government was again recognised, and:peace restored; accordingly, on the 19th, Mr.
Whitney, the missionary, returned to his station,
confident that his labours might be resumed
without delay. The war, though it had been
short, was yet long enough to show how fearfully
sanguine and barbarous their conflicts must have
formerly been, and how dreadful a scourge their
frequency must have proved. Among other instances of murderous treachery, the following,
which occurred in the course of the hostility,
may be mentioned.   In attacking the fort at
Waimea, the rebel party were led by Tiaimakani,
and other chiefs; on their approach, Tiaimakani
met Niau, a tall, handsome young chief, belonging to Karaimoku's party. The former hailed
the latter as his friend, and as such the latter in
confidence approached him: they saluted as
friends, by touching noses, and clasping each
other in their arms.  While Tiaimakani thus
held his unsuspecting friend, he made a signal
with his hand to one of his men standing behind
him, who, in obedience to the signal, thrust the
muzzle of his musket under the arm of his chief,
and shot the friend of his master through the
heart, who fell to the ground, and died almost
instantly, while the treacherous chief hurried on
over his body to attack his companions in the
fort. The life of Karaimoku was sought; but,
by the care of the Most High, he was mercifully
2A




266


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. X.


preserved, and returned shortly afterwards to
Oahu, where he was hailed by the people under
the not inappropriate appellation of the " iron
cable" of the country.
For some time prior to the departure of the
king, for England, Mrs. Ellis had been severely
afflicted, and her sufferings now became such as
to preclude all hope of her recovery, except from
a voyage to England.     At length, Captain
Coleman, of the Russel, touched at the islands, in
his way to America, and kindly offered Mr. and
Mrs. Ellis, and their family, a passage. The offer
was gratefully accepted, and Mr. and Mrs. Ellis,
with their children, embarked at Oahu, on the
18th of September, 1824.
The chief events, in the commencement of
1825, affecting the nation and the mission, have
been already noticed, namely, the tidings of the
king's death, and the arrival of the bodies. The
religious state of the people at most of the islands was, at the time these events occurred,
peculiarly encouraging; the Spirit of the Lord
appeared to have accompanied everywhere with
his gracious influences the instructions of the
teachers.  The progress of religious feeling
among the people, especially the chiefs, was
scarcely interrupted by the all-absorbing occurrences already noticed; meetings for prayer and
religious conference at Oahu, Maui, and Hawaii,
were well attended, and many of the chiefs, as
well as others, appeared to have become the
subjects of a Divine and saving change of heart.
At Oahu, about thirty individuals were candidates for baptism; and, on the 5th of June in




CHAP. X.]   SANDWICH ISLANDS.


267


this year, ten, of superior influence in society,
met the members of the church, desiring admission to its communion.   Among these were
Karaimoku, the prime minister of the nation;
Kaahumanu, the regent; Tapule, the ex-queen
of Tauai; Opiia, Kapiolani, and several others,
long distinguished by their intelligence, integrity, virtue, and piety. All were regularly admitted as members of the church, in the December following. The congregation amounted, at
this time, to three thousand persons, and measures were taken to provide accommodation for
six thousand hearers.
At Hawaii, the missionaries were greatly encouraged. Writing, under date of the 5th of
February this year, Mr. Thurston observes:" There are now nearly forty schools in successful operation on this island, and the people of
many villages are waiting for teachers and
books. The only difficulty in extending the
schools, is the want of books and properly qualified teachers. Had we the means of extending
schools, as widely as there are openings for them,
ten thousand persons might this year be taught
to read, with accuracy and ease, the word of
God in their own language."
At Lahaina, in Maui, the Lord appears to
have smiled in a remarkable manner on the
missionaries' labours. A prayer meeting among
the native females was attended with very beneficial effects. In the month of March, the house
of the missionary was visited at all hours of the
day, by persons under deep concern for the salvation of their souls, and anxiously inquiring




268


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. X.


what they must do to be saved. Many would
come, too, proposing, with apparently real solicitude, questions of religious casuistry; " How
shall we know what things are sinful?" " How
ought we to feel when we pray?  Speaking of
some, Mr. Richards observes:-" Many-have no
idea of the necessity of repentance, but for outward sins; but others, who have attained, in some
degree, a correct knowledge of the character of
God, make no such inquiries. In prayer, they
confess the sins of the heart; and it is the heart
which they pray may be cleansed by the blood
of Christ," Shortly afterwards, the missionary
writes:-" As I was walking out this evening, I
heard at the same time the voice of prayer in
six different houses; and there are not fewer
than fifty houses in which the family meets,
morning and evening, to render their sacrifice of
praise to the living God. The extended and
earnest attention given, at this time, did not
speedily subside; and many, now first impressed
with the importance of personal religion, have
ever since walked in the ordinances of the Lord,
blameless."
The attention to the preaching of the gospel
was highly gratifying throughout the year. A
place of worship, ninety feet long, and twentyfour feet wide, was erected at Lahaina, in the
month of July; and five others were also built
in different parts of the island. Education advanced rapidly. Thirty-six schools had been
established, in which about eleven hundred
and eighty scholars were daily instructed.
The missionaries had also issued from the press,




C:HAP. X.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS,          269
between the months of April and October,
more than sixteen thousand copies of their spelling book; they had also printed four thousand
copies of a small Scripture tract, and four thousand copies of a catechism; besides two thousand copies of a hymn book which had been
already printed.  Besides these indications of
good, they had the pleasure of beholding the
spacious place of worship at Lahaina well filled
every sabbath day, and were privileged to receive into the fellowship of the church, in the
month of July, some of the first-fruits unto
Christ from among the people.
Among the earliest of those admitt ed was
Buaiti; called, at his baptism, Bartimeus; a
blind man, who gave uninterrupted and decisive
proofs of a saving knowledge of the truth as it is
in Jesus. No one of the early converts manifested
more childlike simplicity and meekness of heart,
or appeared more uniformly humble, devout,
pious, and upright. As a singer, he formerly
occupied a place in the retinue of a high chief.
When the missionaries arrived, and began to
preach in the language of the country, he requested to be led to the chapel; and ever after,
with the return of the sabbath, groped his way to
the house of God. He soon became deeply interested in the glad tidings which proclaimed sight
to the blind; relinquished his situation as musician; and, from the most indefatigable inquiry
and attention, made himself so familiarly acquainted with the outline of Christian belief and
practice, as to become an instructor to others, and
finally, chaplain to Keoua, governor of Lahaina.
2A2




270


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [GHAP. X.


When admitted as a member of the Christian
church at Lahaina, he was asked by the missionary, " Why do you request to be received
into the church?"
He replied,  Because I love Jesus Christ.
I love you; and I desire to dwell with you in
the fold of Christ, and to join with you in eating
the holy bread, and drinking the holy wine."
" Wat is the holy bread?"
It is the body of Christ, which he gave to
save sinners."
' Do we then eat the body of Christ?"
"No; but we eat the bread, which means his
body: and as we eat bread that our bodies may
not die, so our souls love Jesus Christ, and receive him for their Saviour, that they may not
die."
"What is the holy wine?"
"It is the blood of Christ, which he poured
out on Calvary in Jerusalem, in Judea, to save
us sinners."
Do we then drink the blood of Christ?"
No; but the wine signifies his blood, just
as the holy bread signifies his body; and all
those who go to Christ, and lean on him, will
have their sins washed away by his blood, and
their souls saved for ever in heaven."
A" Why do you think it more suitable that you
should join the church than others?"
Perhaps it is not," (hesitating.) ' c If it is
not proper, you must tell me; but I do greatly
desire to dwell with you in the fold of Christ."
"C Who do you think are the proper persons
to be received into the church?"




CHAP. X.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


271


Those who have repented of their sins, and
have obtained new hearts."
What is a new heart?"
It is one which loves God, and loves the
word of God, and does not love sin or sinful
ways."
" Do you think you have obtained a new
heart?"
"c At one time I think I have, and then again
I think I have not. I do not know; I hope I
have a new heart."
"What makes you hope you have a new
heart?"
C This is the reason why I hope I have a new
heart. The heart I have now is not like the
heart I formerly had. The one I have now is
very bad; it.is unbelieving, and inclined to evil.
But it is not like the one I formerly had.
Yes; I think I have a new heart."
The satisfaction arising from this simple, yet
lucid statement of experience, was increased by
the circumstance, that these answers were not
committed to memory, and merely recited on the
occasion, but that they were the unpremeditated
prompting of the feelings by which he was influenced; he having had no knowledge of the
questions that would be proposed, until the time
when they were publicly asked.
"This man," says Mr. Stewart, in his journal,
"C is always at the house of God when open;
and, when there, always at the preacher's feet. If
he happens to be approaching our habitations at
the time of family worship, which has frequently
been the case, the first note of praise, or word of




272


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP, X.


prayer that meets his ear, produces an immediate and most observable change in his whole
aspect. An expression of deep devotion at once
overspreads his sightless countenance, while he
hastens to prostrate himself, in some corner, in
an attitude of reverence. Indeed, so peculiar has
the expression of his countenance sometimes
been, both in public and domestic worship, especially when he has been joining in a hymn, in
his own language, to the praise of the only true
God and Saviour; so indicative has it been of
peace and elevated enjoyment, that tears have
involuntarily started into our eyes, at the persuasion that, ignorant and degraded as he once
had been, he was then offering the sacrifice of a
contrite heart, and was experiencing a rich foretaste of that joy, which, in the world to come,
shall terminate in C pleasures for evermore.'
About this time, Karaimoku and Kaahumanu, the two highest chieftains in the islands
next to the king and queen, one being regent,
the other prime minister, addressed the following excellent letters, to the secretary of the American Missionary Society.
Letter from Karaimoku.
" Love to you, Mr. Evarts. This is my communication to you. I do affectionately salute
you. Thanks to you for your sending hither the
missionaries and the word of God to us, that we
might know the good word of God. We now
obey the good word of God; we also love Jehovah, the great Lord of heaven. He hath done
good to us here. We are becoming in earnest in




CHAP. X.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


273


the word of Jesus. Do ye compassionate us.
We will persevere in the good word of God.
Our hearts are turning to the right ways of
God, and the young king also of us two.* We
all love the word of God. All the chiefs love
the good word of God. We have just known
the gospel at the present time. We repent of
our former iniquity. Our former evil is ended.
In the time of the late king of us two, that evil
was ended. With that king of us two ended
also our old hearts. We have now a new
king with new hearts, which God has given to
us all. Our late king has died in Britain, and
we still meditate on the great God of you and
us. I served the great God in the time of my
recent prosperity,t and it is of God that my life
still continues. I do indeed love God. Former
sin is the thing on account of which I now repent.  Hear ye all. With love I salute you.
" KARAIMOKU."
Letter from Kaahumanu.
" Here is my love to you, as you have loved me
and my husband. I now give you my thanks for
your having spoken to me the word of the Lord.
I now take heed to the word of the Son of God.
I give to others those thoughts which you gave to
me. I teach my sisters, and brothers, and kindred, all together, with the common people, and
* The pronoun here used is in the dual number.
t His late victory at Tauai is here referred to with deli.
cacy; and his personal preservation, both in the late war
and in his recent sickness, is gratefully ascribed to the God
of heaven.-TRANSLATOR.




274


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. X.


my two children, whom I now take care of.
My heart is much grieved for my two children
who died in Britain, in that our common country. Great is our sorrow for them, that they
two did not pray together with the missionary
directors. We sorrow much on their account.
We give our grief to God, to Jehovah the author of our consolation.
" Jesus is our atonement for the sinful men of
this world. On him we believe. By him our
sins may be forgiven, and our transgressions
cleansed away.
" We return you all our love for your sending
to us the company of missionaries, together with
the good instruction.
" Pray ye to Jehovah, that these islands of
dark minds may quickly turn to God, that ye
and we may have one mind.     Do write to
us, and strengthen us. Give us that which is
right in your letter, that we and our teachers
may hear.
" Great love to you all. May your eyes and
ours greet each other in the presence of Jehovah,
at the great last day of the Lord.
" Of you, sir, and of all the good, I am the
friend,                   " KAAHUMANU.
" P.S. Just let my word be known by all the
missionaries."
While thus favoured in the outward state of
the mission, and cheered by the evident tokens of
Divine favour, which rested on their efforts for
the evangelization of the people, the brethren




CHAI;]. SANDWICH ISLANDS.         '275
had'Tiheir share of severe afflictions and trials.
Several members of the mission families were
called to suffer much from illness, and the health
of Mrs. Stewart, in particular, was for some
months so greatly enfeebled, that a return to her
native land appeared the only remaining means
from which hopes of recovery could be cherished.
No opportunity for returning direct to America
occurred; but Captain Dale, of the English ship
Fawn, touching at Oahu, offered a passage to
London, which was gratefully accepted; and,
with deep sorrow of heart, Mr. and Mrs. Stewart, and their family, departed from the islands,
early in the month of Qctober, 1825. They
were followed by the anxious and prayerful solicitudes of a number of sincerely attached fellow
labourers, and a grateful and affectionate people.
These were not, however, the only, nor the
most painful trials, with which the missionaries
were exercised. In the early periods of their
residence in the islands, their apprehensions of
injury had chiefly been from the untaught, uncivilized natives; but they were now indebted to
the affection and courage of the natives, for their
protection against the violence and cruelty of
professedly Christian men. In the month of
October, an English ship, the Daniel, arrived at
Lahaina. The captain, and officers, and crew
of this ship, despising the laws of the chiefs,
which prohibited females going on board for
purposes of vice, sought to obtain their object by
intimidation; and, supposing the instructions of
the missionary to be the cause of the laws, a
part went on shore armed, with the black flag




276         MISSIONARY RECORDS.   [CHAP. X.
flying, declaring they would have the law abrogated, or the life of the missionary. From their
murderous violence the mission family was only
preserved by the armed natives, who kept watch
night and day around the house, till the ship
had sailed. This was only the beginning of
most alarming dangers from the foreigners visiting the islands. On three successive occasions,
the village of Lahaina was fired upon from the
ships, and the mission family were obliged to
seek safety in the cellar of their house; and
this from the balls, not of one savage nation
fighting against another, but of professedly
Christian men; and men too, in many instances,
who owed their own safety, in venturing near the
shore, to the instructions and influence of those
they were attacking!
Nearly the whole of the year 1826 was, from
this cause, a season of severe trial to the missionaries. Though the work, which had been so
auspiciously begun, continued to advance, the
opposition of the foreigners was carried to such
a length, as greatly to impede all the beneficient
plans in operation, and to threaten the most serious consequences to both the foreigners and
natives.
It is one of the greatest calamities of heathen
nations, that, when they are first visited by the
commerce of Christian countries, men of depraved habits become residents in the newly discovered lands. The noxious influence of these
men is not fully perceived, till efforts are made
by Christian benevolence to ameliorate the moral
condition of the people. When such efforts be



0HMAP. X.]   SANDWICH ISLANDS.


277


gin to be attended with success, a virulent and:determined spirit of opposition is excited, which
rages with only the greater violence, in propor-!tion to the degree of scriptural purity of the reformation.
When the purity of the gospel was so far apprehended by the chiefs, that they wished to restrain and punish gross wickedness, they undertook, from conscientious motives, to adopt some
regular mode of proceeding. But no sooner was
their purpose known, than some of the residents,
possessing the character above described, took
the alarm, rightly judging that the strict enforcement of moral law would greatly interfere with
their own practices. And their decided opposition to any restraint upon vice, greatly embarrassed the chiefs in their attempts at reformation;
for, while depraved foreigners openly and vehemently resisted every particular measure, which
gave any promise of efficiency in the counteraction of vice, the missionaries were restrained from
doing any thing more than urge general principles.
In this state of things a series of events took
place in the islands, which, however great might
be the latitude allowed to mere private habits,
could not with propriety be allowed to escape
public notice and reprehension.
On the 14th of January, 1826, the United
States armed schooner Dolphin, Lieutenant John
Percival, arrived at Honoruru, and remained
there about four months. As this was the first
public vessel from their native land, the missionaries had a right to expect civil treatment, at
2B




278


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. X.


least, if not kind offices, from all on board. In
these expectations, however, they were lamentably disappointed. The whole stay of the Dolphin was decidedly unfavourable to the interests
of religion and morality, exceedingly disreputable to the officers, and injurious to the natives.
So much so, indeed, was it regarded in the eyes
of the common people, as to obtain for the vessel and her commander, interchangeably, the
appellation of " the mischief-making man of
war."
On one occasion, the life of Mr. Bingham was
in imminent danger, from the riotous assault of
six or seven sailors from the Dolphin; and, at
other times, he was pursued by small parties from
the vessel. It was generally understood that his
life was threatened by the commander; and so
unremitting was the audacious persecution carried
on by the whole crew, that the chiefs, at length,
gave way, and permitted the particular law, which
was the occasion of their animosity, to be rescinded. When Karaimoku was informed of this,
he was very indignant; he called before him the
chiefs who had relaxed the authority of the law,
and severely reprimanded them, inquiring of
them what the facts were. The chiefs quailed
at the severe rebuke of this venerable man, and
even wept under his chiding; but the deed was
done, and could not be recalled.
As might have been anticipated, the opposition of foreigners received, from the relaxation of
law, only a fresh impulse; and it continued to
rage against the missionaries, with increasing
violence, till the end of the year. The greater part




;CHIAP. X.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


279


of the visitors and residents were, evidently, not
pleased with the hold which religion appeared to
be taking upon the hearts and lives of the inhabitants. It probably appeared to them, that, if
the truth should advance for a few years to come,
as it had done for two years past, a vicious man
would be an object of disgust and abhorrence.
Now, therefore, appeared the favourable period
for resistance; and it would seem as though the
hope was really entertained, that Mr. Bingham
would be driven from his post, and the progress
of the mission effectually checked. His life was
generally thought to be in danger. As he was
the only ordained missionary at the place, spoke
and preached constantly in the native language,
and had much intercourse with all classes of the
people, it was not strange that he should be the
object of peculiar hostility with those who would
gladly have prolonged the reign of wickedness.
It is not to be understood, however, that all visitors at the islands were enemies to moral improvement, and of the mission. Some wellmeaning men were overawed by the noise and
violence of the profane, and chose to be silent;
others, of a more decided cast, took the part of
the missionaries, and defended them. Amongst
this class, grateful mention ought to be made of
Captain Sayre, of the Marcus, and Captain Page,
of the Dido, who were at the islands at a time
when the disgraceful proceedings of their countrymen were most violent.
When it is considered how virulently and industriously the mission was opposed by foreigners, during the whole of the year; that the port




280


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. X.


of Honoruru was visited by more than one hundred ships, and more than two thousand seamen;
that every species of falsehood was resorted to,
and much vulgar abuse poured forth upon the
mission; and that uncivilized people are, for the
most part, easily made to distrust their benefactors: when these things are considered, it is
truly remarkable, that for many months none of
the chiefs or people appeared to have their confidence in the missionaries shaken in the slightest
degree; all the highest chiefs continued their
decided friends; and so were the people, until
the month of November. At that time, some
chiefs of inferior rank being led into vice by the
foreigners, a number of the people followed, and
the practice of gambling, and habits of intoxication, began again to revive. As the opposers
had predicted that the great attention to religion
would be temporary, they endeavoured to accomplish their own predictions, by openly attacking,
and secretly undermining, the influence of the
missionaries, and by leading the natives as far as
possible into the commission of gross vice. For
this purpose, they took great pains to establish
horse races, in such a manner as to interfere with
the religious services of the first Monday in every
month. They persuaded several chiefs to play
at cards for money, urging, as an inducement,
that this was practised, and deemed honourable,
by men of high standing in Great Britain; and
they induced as many as possible to return to
drinking, and to the songs and dances of former
times. Every device was also used to detach the
young king from the instructions of the mission



CHAP. X.   SANDWICH ISLANDS.


281,


aries, and to prejudice his mind against Mr.
Bingham, who had been his constant instructor.
But the Lord preserved the life of his servant,
and the labours of the mission were continued.
In pleasing contrast with this view of the condition of the islands was the state of the schools,
and the attendance at public worship. Sometimes as many as four thousand persons were
present at Honoruru. During a journey made
by Mr. Bingham, Kaahumanu, and other chiefs,
through Oahu, the gospel was preached to nearly
all the people. They were also faithfully exhorted by the chiefs, and paid uniformly the
most gratifying attention. During this tour, the
schools already commenced were visited, and
new ones instituted, and the effects of the journey were throughout most auspicious.
In January, an examination of all the schools
of the island of Oahu, as far as they could be
collected, was held, and occupied four days. On
this occasion, seven thousand one hundred and
seventy-seven adults and children were assembled. Most of them could read and spell, and
recite portions of hymns and tracts. Twelve
hundred and eighteen could write a neat hand
on a slate.   There were also as many as
eleven hundred and twenty-six receiving instruction, who did not appear at the examination; making the total number of learners, connected with the schools of Oahu, eight thousand
three hundred and three.
At Kairua, the congregation on the sabbath
usually consisted of three thousand souls; and
2 B 2




282        MISSIONARY RECORDS.    [CHAP. X.
this number of individuals being without any
convenient place of meeting, Kuakini, the governor, resolved to undertake the erection of a large
church edifice for the worship and service of
God. On the 27th of September, 1826, this
building was solemnly dedicated. Some idea of
the amount of labour bestowed on this building
may be formed from the following facts. All the
men in the district were called out by the governor, in the February preceding, to cut the timber, and bring it from the mountains by hand.
In this manner four hundred trunks of trees,
from forty to sixty feet long, were collected in a
few weeks. The posts having been raised before
July, the people were again called out to put on
the thatch. About four thousand obeyed, taking
with them the materials, and, in the space of a
month, this part of the work also was accomplished.
The health of Mr. Loomis having been for
some time in a declining state, it was thought
desirable that he should return to America, for
the double purpose of regaining his strength, and
of superintending the publication both of the
Gospel of Matthew, which was nearly ready for
the press,.and of other portions of the Scripture.
Dr. Blatchely, whose health had been impaired
by a protracted attack of fever, had found himself under the necessity of embarking for America, in November of the previous year.  In
compliance with this advice, he sailed for Valparaiso, in the month of January, 1827, and
took passage from thence to Baltimore.
2




CHAP. X.]   SANDWICH ISLANDS.          283
During the autumn of 1826, the chiefs of all
the islands were convened at Honoruru, to consult respecting certain complaints of foreigners;
and, while thus convened, they improved the opportunity by enacting laws against murder, theft,
and adultery, which were adopted unanimously,
and ordered to be printed immediately. Three
other laws, against flagrant immoralities and injurious practices, were also proposed, and ordered
to be published for farther consideration. These
measures were taken in the face of the most violent opposition, on the part of the foreigners; and
in spite of the grossest falsehoods and misrepresentations, with respect both to the character and
motives of the missionaries, and the laws and
usages of Christian countries.
A few captains and others, at the port of Honoruru, showed themselves friendly to the missionaries, and to the cause of morality; and instances
of this kind were always acknowledged with gratitude. But the mass of the seafaring men who
touch here, including the masters, exert a most
deadly influence against every thing which tends
to the true honour and happiness of the people.
It may be questioned, whether there is a place
in the world, where so much flagitious wickedness is concentrated, and where, with so little
restraint of conscience and principle, it is directed
so plainly and openly against the cause of God
and his church, as at this station.




284


MISSIONARY RECORDS. TCHAP. XI.


CHAPTER XI.
Prosperous state of the missionary stations in Hawaii
— Visit of the regent Kaahumanu to KairuaHer tour of part of the island-Recollections of
Tamehameha-Embarkation of missionaries for
the islands, on board the Parthian- The cordial welcome of the king and chiefs on landingVisits to the islands of Ranai, Morokai, and Kahaurawe-State of the schools, and numbers under
instruction-Efforts in favour of temperanceDeath of Mrs.Bishop-Notice ofthe first convert at
Kairua-Attempts of Roman Catholic missionaries
to introduce popery among the people- Visit of the
Rev. C. T. Stewart to the islands-Religious state
of thepeople at Byron's Bay-Native residence of
the king- Communications and presents from the
American government to the king and chiefs-Judicious advice of Captain Finch-Proclamation of
the king, in favour of morals and the observance
of the sabbath-Extent of education-State of the
schools - Meetings fbr religious improvement -
Celebration of the ordinance of the Lord's supper
- The station at Kaavaroa- Operations of the
press- Arrival of additional missionaries- Improved system of education.
THE records of the mission, in the foregoing chapter, relate chiefly to the progress of the work in
Oahu and Maui.     It is gratifying to be able to
add, that, during this time, the accounts transmitted from  Kairua, and the other stations in
Hawaii, were generally cheering. The knowledge
of the word of God increased, schools were multiplied, _nd progress made in the translations.




CHAP. XI.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


A 285


Many anecdotes might be related of persons applying for books; all tending to show the eagerness with which these means of instruction were
sought. Natives of every age, from childhood
to grey hairs, might be seen bringing whatever
they had at command, whether the product of
the earth or of their labour, soliciting a palapala.
One would go with a melon, another with a
bunch of bananas, a sugar cane, a bundle of
ohias, (the apple of the Sandwich Islands;) some
would be seen with potatoes and tares; others
with eggs, fowls, kids, with bundles of sticks for
firewood, or balls of native cord; while others
would beg for some kind of work, that they might
obtain spelling books.
Of the salutary changes which had been effected in the character and habits of many of the
chiefs of greatest authority and influence in the
islands, the visit of Kaahumanu to Hawaii, in
the autumn of 182C, as described in a letter
from Mr. Bishop, will afford a satisfactory idea.
" Until lately, a personal knowledge of her
Christian character was not possessed by me or
others in this island; as she had not before
visited us since her profession of religion. Her
reception by the people was, as usual, cordial,
though unattended with any of those extravagant
excesses, which once were consequent upon the
arrival of a distinguished ruler. On the contrary,
we assembled at her request, and offered to the
throne of grace our thanksgivings for her safe
arrival. Formerly, guns would have been fired,
shouts of joy would have rent the air, and
dances and revelry would have succeeded. But,




286         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. XI.
though not less than ten thousand people assembled soon after it was known she had come, the
utmost order and stillness prevailed. Her condescending and affectionate manner towards all
who approached her, was not less a matter of
surprise than of joy to all her subjects. The
feelings which her presence was accustomed to
inspire were, formerly, feelings of predominant
awe and reverence; now, as she extended her
hand, and gave them her aroha, these emotions
became blended with feelings of the most cordial
attachment.  To see their once comparatively
haughty queen, now going from rank to rank to
salute her people, drew tears from many a hardy,
sunburnt face.  In the course of her visit, she
took occasion to deliver many affectionate and
pious addresses to various classes of the people;
these were listened to with great attention, and
we have reason to think the benefits, resulting
altogether from her Christian labours and deportment, will long be felt by the inhabitants of
the district.
"After spending a few weeks with us, she left,
to undertake a tour through the southern point
of the island. She was absent two weeks, and
at every place where a canoe could land, she assembled the people, and addressed them on
Christian duty; and, as a messenger preceded
her to announce her approach, she was listened
to by immense numbers.
" She afterwards made an excursion from this
place, along the western shore to Kobala, in
which I accompanied her. The same course of
labours was pursued as in the former excursion,




CHAP. XI.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


287


the people every where giving their queen the
most cordial rebeption; but nothing extravagant
or improper was witnessed. The first thing she
did was to assemble with them in the school,
(ranai,) to give them an address; after she had
finished her speech, I usually preached a short
sermon, which was followed by singing and a
prayer. The principal object of Kaahumanu, in
her addresses, was to enforce the observance of
the decalogue, and to recommend a regard to
the precepts and doctrines of Christianity. In
addition to this, she would often make a detailed.
reference to former heathenish customs, as well
as touch on the vices contracted by an intercourse with foreigners, and in the most earnest
manner dissuade from the practice of any of
them.
"Almost every object, as we passed from place
to place, called tender and melancholy recollections of former scenes to her mind. The reflections she would often make upon these were
truly affecting, and evinced the liveliest exercise
of religious feeling. At one place a battle had
been fought; another had been once beautiful
and populous, but was then desolate and without
inhabitants. Among other communications which
she made to us, she corroborated one conviction
which had long dwelt on our minds, that the present population of the island has diminished, at
least three-fourths, since Captain Cook first
landed here.
" When we arrived at Towaihai, she ordered
the canoe to be put on shore about twenty rods
distant from the usual landing place. It was




288


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. XI.


the place of her husband's former residence.
The walls of the houses were standing, while
every thing within and without was going to
decay. She took a melancholy pleasure in contemplating these ruins, and in pointing out to me
the very places where Tamehameha used to sit,
and where he slept. Directing my attention to
the crumbling walls of a large temple on an eminence, she said, 'There is the spot where my
husband used to worship his gods, and where
many a human victim has been sacrificed. Let
us ascend, and see the place.'  But,' said I,
'did you never go there before?'  No,' she
replied; 'it would have been death for any
woman to approach its sacred precincts.' We
then ascended together; and, when we had
reached the top, and had taken a full view of
the whole place, she stopped short, lifted up her
hands, and looking upwards, said, CI thank
God for what my eyes now see; Hawaii's gods
are no more! '"
The hearts of the missionaries were indeed
encouraged, by witnessing the strength of Christian principle evinced by this distinguished individual, and many others her inferiors in rank;
and were not a little enabled, by such " tokens of
good," to bear patiently up under the calumnious
and malignant oppositions to which, as we have
seen, they were subjected from foreigners.
Early in the following year, the nation and
the mission sustained one of the heaviest losses
which has yet been recorded: this was the death
of Karaimoku; which melancholy event took place
at Kairua, on the 8th of February, 1827. This




ICAP. XI.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.          289
distinguished chieftain had possessed great power
and influence at the islands, during a period of
more than thirty years. He was an hereditary
chief, but not of high rank. His capacity for public business recommended him to Tamehameha,
to whom he proved a faithful and most responsible agent. From the death of that king, in May,
1819, till his own death, he shared the principal
authority with Kaahumanu. For the last year
of his life, he was in a constant state of suffering from the dropsy, in hopes of relief from
which he underwent as many as ten or twelve
operations. In January last, he felt so well that
he desired to visit Hawaii, thinking he should
probably die there. He accordingly touched at
Lahaina, witnessed the reception of the young
princess into the church, and proceeded with a
degree of comfort to Hawaii. Here, soon afterwards, under an unsuccessful operation, he
fainted, and died in a few hours. The missionaries learned from Tute, his Tahitian teacher,
that Karaimoku's mind appeared in his last conversation to be stedfast in the faith and hope of
the gospel.
Some months before his death, he had his
parting advice to his people committed to paper.
Just before he left Oahu, it was read to him.
" These are my sentiments still," said he; " and
on whatever day I am taken away, I wish the
people to be assembled, and these words to be
read to them as mine."  Like the other compositions which Karaimoku had penned since
his professed obedience to the gospel, this
document is described as breathing a spirit of
2c




290         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. XI.
piety, and exhibiting evidence of the Christian's
hope.
Before the arrival of the mission at the islands,
this heathen chief had never directed his thoughts
seriously to religious or moral subjects. Though
shrewd and sagacious as a ruler of savages,
and accustomed to transact business with many
sorts of men, he had been habituated to most of
the vices of the heathen state: it was not till
two or three years after the establishment of the
mission, that Christian instruction appeared to
exert much influence upon his mind. About the
time of the insurrection at Tauai, satisfactory
Evidences of Christian excellence began to discover themselves. From this time his conduct
seemed to be uniformly regulated by religious
principle. Mr. Bingham, in a letter, thus expresses his own estimate of his character:-" The
consistency of his life with what he knew of the
requirements of the word of God; his steady and
operative friendship for the missionaries, and his
earnest endeavours to promote the cause of instruction and religious improvement among the
people; his constancy in attending the worship
of God; his firmness in resisting temptation;
his faithfulness in reproving sin; his patience in
suffering; his calm and steady hope of heaven,
through the atonement of Christ, to whom he
had, as he said, given up himself, heart, and
soul, and body; all combine to give him a happy
title, not only to the name of Christian, but to
that most honourable distinction of rulers on
earth, ' a nursing father in Zion.' 'This world,' he
said, is fill of sorrow; but in heaven there is




CHAP. XI.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.


291


no sorrow nor pain; it is good; it is delight; it
is happy. "
It is a subject of gratitude, that the life of so
important a man was preserved during the troubles of the previous year, when his sudden removal might have been followed by most disastrous consequences; anrd, altogether, the closing
portion of his life affords an instructive comment on the influence of grospel principles. The
power of religion was strikingly manifested in
the victory which, in this instance, faith gained
over inveterate habits, pride, the love of sin,
and the love of the world. Nothing but Christian truth ever obtained such a conquest.
On the 3d of November, 1827, the following
persons embarked at Boston, on board the ship
Parthian, Captain Blinn, bound direct to the
Sandwich Islands: namely, Rev. Lorrin Andrews, Rev. Jonathan Smith Green, Rev. Peter
Johnson Gulick, and Rev. Ephraim Weston
Clark, missionaries, with theirwives; Dr. Gerrit
P. Judd, physician, Mrs. Judd, Mr. Stephen
Shepard, printer, Mrs. Shepard, Miss Maria
C. Ogden, Miss Delia Stone, Miss Mary Ward,
and Miss Maria Patten, assistant missionaries,
to reside in the different mission families.
Four natives of the Sandwich Islands, who
had derived some advantages of education in
America, and who had been admitted to the privileges of the Christian church, were also passengers in the vessel.  They were returning
under the care of the missionaries, though they
did not form a part of the reinforcement.
It was supposed that the single females would




-2~92


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. XI.


have it in their power, with the blessing of Heaven upon their well-meant endeavours, to comfort and aid the wives of the missionaries, in
their various cares and domestic duties, and to
improve the condition of the native females.
A printing press, types, and paper, with large
supplies of other articles, were also sent by the
Parthian.
Though the missionaries who left Tauai at the
time of the war had not returned, the work of
education advanced, and there were, in 1827,
fifty schools, in which sixteen hundred scholars
were taught' to read and write.
The reinforcement landed at Honoruru on the
last day of March, 1828. The voyage was, on
many accounts, favourable, but the missionaries
suffered severely, in consequence of the captain of
the ship failing to comply with the contract of
the owners. By this contract many conveniences were to be supplied, with which the missionaries in consequence failed to provide themselves; but no sooner was the ship at sea, than
all the stipulated services were withdrawn, and
they found themselves not only unattended to,
but without necessary furniture for their table.
On their arrival at the islands, however, they
found the circumstances of the mission more encouraging than they had anticipated.  They
were cordially received by their brethren in the
field, and by the chiefs and people of the islands.
The king, and other chiefs, wrote them letters of
congratulation on their arrival; and many thanks
were expressed by the principal persons in authority, for the kindness of the Christian people




CHAP. XI.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.


293


in sending them  new teachers; nor did they
fail to mention, on every suitable occasion,
their wish to have a further increase of their
number.
The four natives who accompanied the reinforcement, were recommended to engage in employments suited to their capacity and skill;
while Mr. Clark, in accordance with the suggestions of the society, and with the advice of his
brethren, directed a part of his labours to the religious instruction of American seamen, so far as
they could be induced to attend his preaching
on the sabbath, or afford him opportunity of appealing to them in other ways.
Although the schools at Honoruru were, for.
reasons already alluded to, not so flourishing as
those in other parts of the Sandwich Islands,
many ch'eering circumstances attended the progress of the mission, and afforded evidence that
the scattered seed had not all fallen on stony
ground. Amongst these circumstances, were the
endeavours made by the chiefs, to administer justice on Christian principles. A case of homicide
occurred in the autumn of 1827, which was followed by a more formal trial than had ever before taken place. Kaahumanu appointed a jury
of twelve men to sit upon the case, at the head
of which she placed Laauni, an intelligent upright
chief.. Malice prepense was clearly proved; but
some difficulty arose as to whether the culprit
intended to kill, or only to wound and maim the
object of his vengeance.
Under the influence of the gospel, several
tribes of men, recently heathen, were at this time
2c2




294


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. XI.


rising into civilization, and establishing a system
of regular jurisprudence. The spectacle was an
interesting one to all accurate observers of human
affairs; but especially to those who looked.to the
gospel as the great source of civil liberty, and
the great safeguard of well regulated society.
For more than a year previously to the reinforcement, the station at Waimea had been of
necessity relinquished. Arrangements were now
made for Mr. Whitney's return; and he was soon
joined by Mr. Gulick, his wife, and Miss Ogden.
The old governor, Kaikioeva, was delighted with
the renewal of direct missionary labour, and
with the arrival of additional teachers. He and
his wife had been most successful in their zealous
endeavours, in the absence of Mr. Whitney, to
preserve good order among the people, and to
give them a favourable inclination towards the
instructions which they were hoping to receive.
During the summer of 1827, a tour of inspection and preaching was made, by the missionaries
and some of the principal chiefs, around Maui
and the smaller islands, Ranai, Morokai, and
Kahulawe, in its immediate vicinity. Messrs.
Richards, Andrews, and Green, accompanied by
the princess, made the circuit of Maui, in the
month of August.    The account which they
transmitted spoke of the natural aspect of the
country, the number and general behaviour of
the people, and their readiness to hear the
gospel. Schools were formed and examined in
almost every place. In one small district, more
than eight hundred scholars were examined; and,
at another place, nearly a thousand. The mis



CHAP. XI.] SANDWICH ISLANDS,


295


sionaries saw much of the misery and. degradation of the people; but much also of their desire
and their capacity for improvement.
Shortly afterwards, Messrs. Andrews and
Green, accompanied by two native chiefs, traversed the island of Morokai, which they supposed to contain about five thousand inhabitants.
Of these they found a thousand to be learners
in schools, nearly all of whom could read. This
island was never before visited by a missionary,
except that Mr. Chamberlain once landed, but
made no stay, and gave no instruction. Yet here
the wonderful spectacle was presented of one-fifth
of the people being actual attendants at school,
under the instruction of native teachers; and
these too persons, who, but a few years ago, knew
not a letter in the alphabet, but had themselves
recently learned from the missionaries in another
island. In this manner, the whole population
of an island became prepared to read the word
of God, as soon as it could be put into their
hands.
The above-mentioned tour of inspection enabled the missionaries to give a more accurate
statement of the number of pupils in the schools
of these islands, and the progress of instruction
in them, than had been practicable at any former
period. They numbered two hundred and twentyfive schools, in which were actually present at
the examinations, five thousand and thirty-nine
males, and five thousand two hundred and four
females, altogether, ten thousand two hundred and
forty-three; of this number more than six thousand
could read, and more than one thousand could




296         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. XI.
write.  There were also absent two thousand
seven hundred and thirteen, who were in the
habit of receiving instruction.  Thus twelve
thousand nine hundred and fifty-six were found
belonging to the schools, out of a population of
about thirty-seven thousand.  This, however,
was their state before the ravages of a destructive
malady, which afterwards spread through the
district, had been felt. The malady referred to
appeared to be the same as the influenza; and,
so strong was the religious impulse it produced
on the minds of the natives, that immediately
five thousand copies of the elementary sheet, or
first book for learners, were demanded for new
scholars; and the missionaries, at that time, computed the number of pupils to be eighteen thousand.  Many of the learners, of course, were
adults; some of them far advanced in life; and
altogether presenting the rare phenomenon of one
half of the population of a country enrolled as
actual attendants at school; either just learning
to read, or having made that valuable acquisition.
The progress of religion at Lahaina was very
encouraging, when Mr. Richards was compelled
to visit Honoruru, in the autumn of 1827. In
consequence of the outrage, by the seamen of
Captain Clarke, on the village in which he was
residing, the people became very anxious respecting him: his life had been so often and so violently threatened, that many were apprehensive
they should never see his face again. On this
account, they held a special meeting for prayer
on his behalf; and smaller meetings were conti4




CHAP. XI.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


297


nued, for the same purpose, till his return. The
first morning after his arrival, it was estimated
that a thousand natives called to express their
friendly salutations, and their joy, that he had
come back in safety. So strong an attachment
to a missionary, speaks much in favour of the
impression which religion had made upon their
minds.
In April, 1827, about a thousand individuals,
at and near the village, attended regular prayer
meetings, and professed to be seeking the salvation of their souls.  It was hoped that many
were truly pious, but it was thought best to
exercise great caution in admitting members to
the church.  In the preceding month, eleven
persons, including some high chiefs, were received to the communion.
The regular solemnization of marriages was a
pleasing evidence of the improvement of morals, already consequent upon the introduction of Christianity; Mr. Richards had married seven hundred and fifty-one couples, previously to April 14,
1828. The nature of the marriage vow was fully
understood by the people, and the chiefs made
strict laws against its violation. Only two cases
of this kind had been discovered; which, considering the former profligacy of the people, was
very remarkable. The punishments inflicted upon
delinquents in these cases, were calculated not
only to terrify others, but to make the law generally known.  One of them was sentenced to
labour on the high-ways till a certain amount of
work should have been performed; and the
other, whose delinquency was attended with




,298


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. XI.


peculiar aggravations, received judgment to be
confined a year in irons.
Strict laws were also in existence against the
sale of ardent spirits, and were rigidly enforced.
A man was tried by the governor, in presence of
the king and other chiefs, for having sold a bottle of rum, which must, of course, have been
smuggled; a-nd, being found guilty, he was fined
two hundred dollars.
In the following year, the station at Kairua,
in Hawaii, suffered a great bereavement by the
death of Mrs. Bishop, which took place on the
21st of February, after a distressing illness of
six months: she was a woman of many excellent
qualities, all of which were consecrated to the
service of her Lord. The circumstances of her
sickness were such as called forth much sympathy from the natives.  Her death was also happily the occasion of much seriousness among
them, and a revival of religion followed. The
thought, that her dying prayers were offered, that
they might meet her in heaven, was more impressive to their minds than any argument or
persuasion.  In the month after this event took
place, the houses of the missionaries were thronged with inquirers from morning till late at night;
and, on every successive day, several presented
themselves for the first time, as having resolved
that they would seek the Lord, and make the
salvation of their souls their chief concern.  In
April, the number of serious inquirers amounted
to not less than two hundred, and the work was
still advancing. A striking trait in this revival,
was the deep sense of sin which seemed to be




;XCHAP. XI.]   SANDWICH ISLANDS.


2998


general. The people were not backward to express the enormity of their conduct in the days
of their ignorance. As the light dawned upon
them, they saw that many things were grossly
wicked, on the moral nature of which they had
formerly never spent a thought.
It was not to be expected that of these inquirers
all would ultimately give proof of genuine piety;
but such was the decisive change effected in the
manners and morals of many, that, to use the
words of Messrs. Thurston and Bishop,   the
furious savage had become the humble follower
of the Lamb; and the dishonest and brutalized
son of earth, the zealous promoter of order, sobriety, and Christian morality."
Amonst other means adopted for the improvement of the people, was the institution of societies
for their mutual religious edification and encouragement. Of these societies, which met weekly,
the members engaged to lead sober and moral
lives; to attend diligently upon the means of
grace; to observe the duty of secret and family
prayer; and to pursue the course of moral and
religious improvement. At these meetings, practical subjects were discussed; and the association
had altogether a powerful effect upon public
sentiment, in raising the standard of Christian
morals.
One of the converts at Kairua, and the very
first-fruit of the mission, was Kakupuohi, an
aged chief woman, and one of the wives of
the king who was reigning when Captain Cook
first visited the islands. Though nearly eighty
years old when the means of instruction first




300


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. XI.


became accessible to her, and though her natural
faculties were then much blunted, she never-i
theless learned to read.  Her perseverance in
this, even after being dissuaded from the attempt
by the missionaries, was truly admirable.
In the autumn of this year, Mr. Ely was compelled to embark for America, in consequence of
the severe and alarming illness both of himself
and his wife. The station which he had occupied was that of Kaavaro, where, for nearly
five years, he had laboured with commendable
diligence and great success. To this station Mr.
Ruggles was removed from his station at Waiakea; and, after an interval of some little time,
during which the natives, according to their own
account, learned the true value of missionary labour, Mr. Goodrich was appointed to occupy
the sphere thus vacated. When it was known
that a mission family was on board a vessel in
the bay, the ship was surrounded with the canoes
of the natives; and, on landing, the family was
thronged and escorted to the mission house by
hundreds of the natives, many of whom wept for
joy; and, for three weeks, the house was crowded
with congratulatory visitors from morning till
ten at night.
Considerable solicitude having been felt by the
society in America, on account of the arrival of
a Roman Catholic mission, in the year 1826, it
may not be uninteresting to offer to the reader a
few facts connected with so singular an undertaking. This mission, consisting of three ecclesiastics and six seculars, sailed from Bourdeaux
for the Pacific, having the Sandwich Islands




HAP. XI.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.


301


articularly in view; and it is but reasonable to
resume, that the enterprise was undertaken with
ithe knowledge and approbation of the French
authorities, ecclesiastical and civil.
It is probable that the attention of the Catholic
church was attracted to the Sandwich Islands,
in the first instance, by accounts respecting them!which had been derived from the statements of
the Protestant missionaries, and which had been
published in France. At the same time, it happened, that John Rives, a Frenchman, of base
character, was on a visit to his native country,
after having resided many years at the islands.
This man gave glowing descriptions of the climate
and soil; pretending that he had received large
possessions from the chiefs; and it was by his
advice, as the delegation afterwards declared,
that their mission was commenced. He, however, deserted them in the end; and his possessions they never were able to find.
They arrived at Honoruru in the summer of
1827, having touched at other places, probably
in South America: they appeared to be poor,
and not to know very well what to do. The
government was very unwilling that they should
remain, but the captain of the vessel in which
they were conveyed, pleaded that he was short
of provisions, and could not give them a passage
back.
The chief ecclesiastic had died on the passage;
two seculars soon left the islands; and two ecclesiastics, a farmer and two mechanics, remained. For some time they kept themselves
much secluded, from an apprehension that they
2 D




302         MISSIONARY RECORDS.   [CHAP. XI.
should be ordered away by the government, but;
the farmer and mechanics after a while engaged
in their several employments, and the ecclesiastics devoted themselves to the acquisition of the
language. They held a meeting on the sabbath,
which was attended by a few foreigners; but the
natives appeared to take little interest in the services, as they were unintelligible to them. On
their proposing to teach their religion to some attendants of the king, a native replied that it was
just like the old worship in the islands. Indeed,
while it was evident that the most profligate part
of the foreigners cordially wished them success,
the friends of human happiness could not be sufficiently thankful that so much light had been
diffused amongst the people previously to their
arrival. There were abundance of materials from
which it might have been expected that a Catholic priesthood would have made proselytes; and
in regard to this danger, as well as all others, the
missionaries saw more and more reason to admire the care of Him, who has declared, that
" lest any hurt his vineyard, he will keep it night
and day."
Though we shall be a little anticipating the
order of events, it may be as well to mention
here, that the mission was ultimately sent away
from the islands by the native authorities. The
removal took place on the 24th of December,
1831, and was effected in a manner the most considerate and humane. At an expense of about
a thousand dollars, the brig Waverley was fitted
out, and despatched to the coast of California,
a country professing the Romish faith, taking




CFAP. XI.]   SANDWICH ISLANDS.           303
ith the Jesuits an exact certificate of all their
Woods, which was committed to the charge of the
captain of the vessel.
In the autumn of 1823, Mr. Stewart, having
accepted the office of chaplain in the navy of the
United States, with the prospect of being assigned to a ship then about to visit the Pacific
Ocean, was appointed by the society special
agent to the Sandwich Islands. Mr. Stewart,
having been for three years a member of this
mission, and feeling a deep interest in the missionaries personally, and in the success of their
labours, possessed great advantages, both for
conveying, in the best manner, the sympathy of
the committee to these distant brethren, and also
for ascertaining their state, and advising them in
regard to their duties. He sailed from the United
States, as chaplain of the frigate Guerriere, in
February, 1829; was transferred to the sloop of
war Vincennes, Captain Finch, while on the western coast of South America; and visited the
Sandwich Islands, in the latter vessel, on his
way home by the Cape of Good Hope.
In passing up the eastern side of Hawaii, the
ship entered the port of Byron's Bay, or Waiakea, where she remained several days.
Mr. Stewart's description of the religious ser*vice, on the first sabbath after his return to the
islands, will perhaps convey the most correct
idea of the change which had taken place, in the
character of the natives, during the period of his
absence.
The chapel at Hido is stated to be an immense
structure, capable of containing many thousands,




304


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. XI.


and every part of it was filled, except a small
area in front of the pulpit. " I can scarce des-1
cribe," says Mr. Stewart, "the emotions experi.
enced, on glancing over the number of persons
seated thickly on the matted floor, so as to seem
literally one mass of heads, covering an area of
more than nine thousand feet. I have gazed," he
adds, Con worshipping assemblies of every variety
of character, from those formed of the high and
the princely, with a splendour and pageantry of
train befitting the cathedrals in which they
bowed, to the humblest two or three who ever
came together at a place where prayer is wont to
be made. I have listened with delighted atten.
tion to some of the highest eloquence which
either the pulpits of America or England in the
present day can furnish, and have watched with
sympathetic excitement the enthusiasm  it produced; but it was left for a worshipping assembly at Hido, the most obscure corner of these
distant islands, to inspire me with the liveliest
emotions ever experienced, and to leave on my
mind the deepest impressions of the extent and
unsearchable riches of the gospel; emotions and
impressions derived simply from an ocular demonstration of the power of the word of God upon
untutored man.
" The depth of the impression arose from the
irresistible conviction that the Spirit of God was
there. With the exception of the inferior chiefs
having charge of the districts, and their dependants, of two or three native members of the
church, and of the mission family, scarcely one
of the whole multitude was in other than the na



MAP. XI.]    SANIDWICH ISLANDS.          305
ive dress, the maro, and the kihei.   In this
rspect, and in the posture of sitting, the assembly: was truly pagan, totally unlike those of the Soliety Islands, and as unlike any thing of the kind
i at home: but the breathless silence, the eager
'attention, the half suppressed sigh, the tear, the
varied feelings-sad, peaceful, or joyous-disco-.::verable in the faces of many, spoke the presence
of the invisible but omnipotent Power, which can
alone melt and renew the heart of man, even as
it alone first brought it into existence.
It was, in a word, a heathen congregation
laying hold on the hopes of eternity: —a heathen
congregation, fully sensible of the darkness and
despair of their original state, and exulting in: the first beams of truth, and in the certain dawning of the Sun of righteousness; thirsting after
the sweet and reviving waters of life, and, by every
look, expressing the heart-felt sentiment, ' How
beautiful upon the mountains are the feet of him
who bringeth good tidings; who bringeth good
tidings of good, who publisheth salvation.'
C The simple appearance and earnest deportment of this obscure congregation, whom, at no
remote period, I had known only as a set of rude,
licentious, and wild pagans, did more to rivet
the conviction of the Divine origin of the Bible,
and of the holy influences by which it is accompanied to the hearts of men, than all the arguments, and apologies, and defences of Christianity I ever read."
Instruction of every kind, it was stated by
Mr. Stewart, was at that time eagerly and universally sought; and, only the week before his
2 i 2




306         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. XI.
arrival, not less than ten thousand people were
assembled at a school examination. The mission house was daily crowded with earnest inquirers after the ways of truth; evil customs and
atrocious vices were abandoned; a strict outward conformity to good morals observed; and
numbers, it was hoped, had yielded, and were
yielding themselves to all the sweet charities
and pure affections of genuine piety.
As a proof of the progress made by the natives
in the arts and customs of civilized life, Mr.
Stewart's account of the king's house at Oahu
affords a striking instance. The whole consisted
of one apartment, spacious, light, lofty, and truly
elegant; all the timbers in sight, the numerous
posts, rafters, and centre pillars, each of substantial size, were of a dark, hard wood, hewn
with the nicest regularity. The lashings of cinnet, made of the fibres of the cocoa-nut bleached
white, were put on with such neatness, and
wrought into so beautiful a pattern, at close and
regular intervals, as to give to the posts and
rafters the appearance of being divided into natural sections; and to produce, by the whiteness
and nice workmanship of the braid, in contrast
with the colours of the wood, an effect striking
and highly ornamental.
The floor was also a novelty, and an experiment: it consisted of a pavement of stone and
mortar, spread with a cement of lime, having all
the smoothness and hardness of marble; this
was in place of the rushes or grass with which
the ground was formerly strown, as a foundation
for the mats. Upon the new floor, beautifully




CHAP. XI.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


307


variegated mats of Tauai were spread, forming
a carpet as delightful and appropriate to the
climate as could have been selected.  Large
windows on either side, and the folding doors of
glass at each end, were hung with draperies of
crimson damask: besides which, and the mats
on the floors, the furniture consisted of handsome
pier tables and large mirrors; of a line of glass
chandeliers suspended through the centre; with
lustres and candelabra of bronze, affixed to the
pillars lining the sides and ends of the apartment; and of portraits in oil of the late king and
queen, taken in London, placed at the upper end,
in carved frames richly gilt.
There were no anterooms; but, on the occasion
of Mr. Stewart's introduction, in company with
Captain Finch and the officers of the Vincennes,
the young monarch was seated in an arm chair,
spread with a splendid cloak of yellow feathers,
and situated in the middle of the apartment,
about sixty feet in front, or two-thirds the length
of the room. His dress was the Windsor uniform of the first rank, with epaulettes of gold,
the present of George iv., and an undress of
white, with silk stockings and thin shoes. On a
sofa, immediately on his right, were Kaahumanu,
the regent; and the two ex-queens, Kinau, then
wife of General Kekuanaoa, and Kekauruhoa.
The whole business of introduction seems to
have been conducted with the utmost order and
propriety; and when all were seated, Captain
Finch, availing himself of the services of Mr.
Bingham as interpreter, requested him to take
a seat by his side; and then rising, read, in




308         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. XI.
a distinct and impressive manner, the letter with
which he had been entrusted from the president
of the United States to the king of the Sandwich
Islands.
This document was such as became the government of a Christian nation. It recommended to the natives " the true religion-the
religion of the Christian's Bible." It recognized
the rapid progress which had been made at the
islands, in letters and religion.  While it asked
protection fbr citizens of the United States,
whose conduct was peaceable; it explicitly assented that others should be subject to the censure
and punishment inflicted by the laws of the place.
It stated, also, that the government had heard,
with pain, of the violation of these laws by
American citizens, and had sought to know and
to punish the guilty; and it closed with bespeaking the favour of the rulers for the missionaries.
The president sent, also, the following articles
to the rulers, as tokens of his regard, and a testimony of the interest felt by the government of
the United States in the prosperity and improvement of the people of the Sandwich Islands;
namely, a pair of globes, and a map of the United
States, to the king; a silver vase to Kaahumanu,
with her name and the arms of the United States
engraved upon it; two silver goblets to Nahienaena, with a similar engraving; a map of the
world to Boki; and another to Kuakini.
Captain Finch presented these presents, and
the letter from the government, in the kindest
and most respectful manner, and accompanied
them by a handsome letter of his own. The in



'CHAP. XI.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.           309
Stercourse of this commander and his officers,
with the young king and chiefs, was of a very
favourable character, and left a most grateful
impression upon their minds.
The expressions in the president's letter were,
on two points, especially valuable: namely, first,
the recommendation of the Bible; and then the
intimation of the declaration, that the rulers
might punish American citizens, and of course all
foreigners, who should violate the laws of the
islands.  On these two points profligate foreigners had laboured hard to mislead the people; they were accustomed to assert, that kings,
and presidents, and other great men in civilized
countries, looked down upon the Christian religion as beneath their notice, and as fitted only
for the lowest of the people; and, in regard to
foreign residents, it was repeatedly and often
stated, in a threatening tone, that the government of the United States would be displeased, if
Americans should be punished for violating the
laws of the chiefs. Though these assertions had
been but partially believed, it was a great satisfaction to the chiefs, to learn, from the president
himself, that they had a right to enforce their
laws upon all persons within their own territory.
The abolition of idolatry, and the adoption of
the Christian religion; the consequent change in
the whole condition of the people, with the dissemination of letters and truth, and the establishment of the press; rendered new and wholesome laws not only desirable, but absolutely necessary for the inhabitants of the Sandwich
Islands. The most intelligent and influential of




310        MISSIONARY RECORDS.    [CHAP. XI.
recent visitors had seen this necessity, and had
urged upon the government the importance of
enacting and enforcing, laws, conformable to the
light and knowledge then disseminated, amongst
the people.
So early as the summer of 1825, Lord Byron,
during his visit in the ship Blonde, at a general
council of the chiefs, convened principally for
the purpose of acknowledging the right of the
present king to the throne, and of appointing a
regency during the minority, took occasion to
submit to them a brief schedule of civil polity
adapted to their new state, and a set of maritime
regulations, in reference to foreign shipping frequenting the port. The last were put into immediate operation, to the abrogation of others,
more unequal and exorbitant, previously existing.
The suggestions of this nobleman, however,
referred rather to the form of government, and
the respective and relative rights of the king,
chiefs, and people, and to the tenure of lands,
etc., than to a criminal or municipal code;
and, towards the close of the same year, an attempt was made, by the regents and their associates, to lay a foundation for laws affecting
these points. This was by a public discussion of
the precepts of the decalogue, at a council then
convened, preparatory to the promulgation of
specific laws founded upon them. At this discussion, some of the missionaries had been invited by the regents, Karaimoku and Kaahumanmu, to be present; but, on information of this
circulating amongst the residents, a. party of
them, comprising some individuals of influence,




:CIHiP. XI.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.          311
iso violently interrupted the council, throwing
out such menaces and threats against the members of the mission, even to the taking of life,
that the chiefs were intimidated, and for the
time relinquished their purpose.
Two years afterwards, however, in December,
1827, notwithstanding that the opposition of the
foreigners had continued rather to increase than
to diminish, the king and chiefs, in the general
council, determined on the promulgation of laws
against murder, theft, and adultery: the first to
be punishable by death, and the other two by imprisonment in irons.
The proclamation of these, with their respective
penalties, was first made by the king, in person,
supported by the regent Kaahumanu, by Governor Boki, and all the high chiefs, in a grove of
cocoa-nut trees, near the sea shore. There were
present an immense throng of the people, and
many foreigners.  The laws were immediately
printed by the authority of the government, and
extensively circulated in hand bills.  Shortly
after, an addition was made to the code, of others
against gambling, drunkenness, prostitution, and
profanation of the sabbath by improper amusements or labour.
So decided a step as the issuing these edicts,
just before the arrival of the Vincennes, argued
well, and was ably supported by the letter from
the president of the United States. It must not
be supposed, however, that it could be an easy
matter to enforce salutary restraints upon bold,
artful, and abandoned foreign residents.  Some
passages from the proclamation of the king, will




312


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. XI.


show the simplicity with which an appeal was
made by these injured people, not only to the
better feelings of their own community, but to
the inhabitants of other countries.
" This, therefore, is my proclamation, which I
make known to you, all people from foreign
countries: the laws of my country prohibit murder, theft, adultery, prostitution, retailing ardent
spirits at houses for selling spirits, amusements
on the sabbath day, gambling and betting on the
sabbath day, and at all times.
" If any man shall transgress any of these
laws, he is liable to the penalty; the same for
every foreigner, and for the people of these
islands: whoever shall violate these laws shall
be punished.
" This also I make known. The love of the
great God of heaven, that is the great thing by
which we shall promote peace; let all men who
remain here obey it."
In another part of the proclamation is an affecting allusion to the dependent state of this unsophisticated people.
" This is our communication to you all, ye parents from the countries whence originate the
winds: have compassion on a nation of little
children, very small and young, and who are yet
in mental darkness; help us to do right, and follow with us that which will be fbr the best good
of this our country."
During the visit of Mr. Stewart, he had many
opportunities of observing the progress of civilization amongst the natives, all which must
have been highly gratifying to one so deeply




CHAP. XI.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


313


interested as he was in their temporal and spiritual welfare.  As a specimen of their improvement in architecture, he particularly mentions the chapel at Lahaina, a building of
stone, ninety-eight feet long, and sixty-two
broad, two stories in height, intended to be furnished with galleries, and calculated to afford
seats for three thousand hearers. Of this building the walls were finished, and the roof nearly
in readiness to be placed upon them at the time of
his visit.  It was pleasantly situated near the
finest grove of cocoa-nut trees in the district, had
been erected exclusively at the expense of the governor and chiefs at Maui, and was expected,
when complete, to be the most substantial and
noble structure in the Polynesian Islands.
While at Lahaina, Mr. Stewart had an opportunity of observing the progress made in the different schools; and although, in company with
Captain Finch, he had been present before at
a quarterly examination of the kind, arrangements were made by Kaahumanu to enable him
to witness a general examination of the schools of
the whole island; early information of which was
circulated through the various districts of Oahu.
It took place in the chapel, a building one
hundred and ninety-eight feet in length, and
seventy-eight in breadth. The scholars included
persons of every age, and the number was very
great, amounting to many thousands.
The morning was appropriated to a review of
the schools most recently established in distant
parts of the island, and to those whose proficiency extended only to reading; the chapel was,
2 E




314        MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. XI.
consequently, two or three times successively
filled with these, arranged by schools in regular
lines along its matted floor. The people were
almost exclusively dressed in native cloth, but all
in new garments, many of which consisted of
imnmense folds arranged around the figure with
taste and beauty. In general, each school was
in uniform; some in mantles and kiheis of black,
some of yellow, some of pink, some of white,
some striped, some spotted, some plain, all
meeting the eye with lively and agreeable effect.
" I never," says Mr. Stewart, " during my
residence in the islands, on any occasion of festivity or amusement, in which a multitude of the
people have been brought together, have seen
evidences of greater interest or pleasure, in the
passing scenes, than were now manifested. All
seemed desirous of giving testimony to the importance and value oft their present attainments,
and of the happiness they find in the new order
of things.
"The schools occupied about two-thirds of
the chapel; the remaining part had been appropriated to the accommodation of the female chiefs,
and kept in reserve for them, until, with all the
ancient paraphernalia of the chieftainship, they
had been borne in procession from their respective residences to the chapel. The display made
by these, as seen from the seats to which we were
conducted, was beautiful and imposing."
The examination consisted, like all others of
a similar kind, of specimens in reading and writing, exercises in arithmetic, etc., etc.; concluding, at the end of an hour or more, with a hymn




:I3EAP. XI.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


315


and a short prayer. The greater portion of the
specimens of writing and composition, which had
been, of course, prepared by the more advanced
only, were letters addressed to Captain Finch,
expressing the happiness occasioned by his visit,
with the views of the different writers on the
subjects of learning and religion. Some hundreds
of these were committed to him by the writers,
after being subjected to the inspection of the
various foreigners present.
Understanding that the females would leave
the chapel in procession, Captain Finch and Mr.
Stewart walked out before them, and took their
stand in the upper verandah of the palace built by
Kairamoku, commanding a fine view of the whole
street, from the chapel to the house where they
were to be set down. The children of Kekuanaoa
went first; but, unaccustomed to this ancient
mode of conveyance, the moment their couch of
state was elevated on the shoulders of their bearers, and moved forward with its complement of
feathered staffs and train, the young nobles began
screamning so loudly, that their attendants were
obliged to lower them fomn their lofty seats, and
allow the pageant to pass on unoccupied.  Next
came the queens, and last the princess, preceded
by the king and suite on foot, and escorted by a
file of the royal guards on either side, to keep
open a passage sufficiently wide for her throne
and its bearers, amidst the immense throng of
gaily dressed thousands around.
'"The scene," says Mr. Stewart, "thus presented, was highly exciting.  This bearing of




316        MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. XI.
some favourite of a nation upon the heads of the
people, has always been associated, in my mind,
with a state of high-wrought enthusiasm,-an enthusiasm springing from a just admiration, and
a sincere love of the object calling it into action;
and the sympathetic influence of which seizes
irresistibly on the heart, even of an uninterested
spectator. I could not free myself from an influence of the kind on this occasion, nor was it
necessary; for, she who was thus borne aloft,
surrounded by all the glory of her rank, and the
gaze of ten thousand eyes, was the joy of the
people, and the delight of the whole nation.
While I gazed in admiration on her as she passed
triumphantly along, beneath a canopy of magnificent kahiles, nodding with grace and stateliness
in the breeze, as cheer after cheer, from the widespread and admiring multitude, greeted her on
her way: I thought, and remarked, that the
pageant, though destitute of the gilding of equipage, and caparison of horse, seen in other
countries, equalled, if it did not surpass, in its
effect upon the eye and the heart, any I had ever
witnessed."
Nor were the religious meetings of the people,
though conducted with much simplicity, less
interesting, or even less striking, than this splendid scene. Mr. Stewart describes a meeting for
religious conversation and prayer, which was
held in a large school house near the residences
of the principal chiefs, as being composed of persons of every rank and condition amongst the
people. As he entered the lowly door, and hum



CHIAP. xl.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.           317
ble but wide apartment, the light of a few tin
lamps at long intervals, placed against the posts
which supported the roof; fell dimly upon the
countenances and figures of at least a thousand
people; all waiting, in profound silence, the arrival of one who should teach them in the things
of eternity.
After a hymn and prayer, and a few remarks
suited to the occasion, any one who felt desirous
of asking a question, or of expressing a sentiment
upon the subjects for which the meeting was
instituted, was requested to speak; upon which
much interesting conversation between the natives
and Mr. Bingham took place. The remarks and
the feelings of many thus unfolded were deeply
touching, and fully demonstrated the efficacy of
the gospel, in enlightening the mind, and melting
the heart of man, in his most uncultivated state.
On the first sabbath of October, Mr. Stewart
saw the church at Oahu crowded with thousands
of worshippers, many of whom appeared to be
deeply interested in the preaching of the gospel,
and all of whom were attentive. After the usual
service on the occasion of the administration of the
Lord's supper, the names of seven individuals were
announced, as those now to be received into the
church. They had been in a state of probation
for some months, and were called upon to present
themselves publicly, to profess their belief in the
articles of the Christian faith, and to take upon
them the vows of the church covenant.  This
they did, standing in front of the pulpit and communion table, surrounded by the members of the
church, occupying two rows of seats in the square
2 J 2




318


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CRAP. XI.


enclosing it. Five of them were men, and two
women, from twenty to forty-five years of age.
After assenting to the articles of faith, and
taking upon them the obligations contained in
the church covenant, they were all baptized; and
then, each for himself, both male and female,
subscribing his name to the roll subjoined to the
preceding documents, all were proclaimed full
members of the church, and commended to the
special love and care of their fellow members.
The ceremony was succeeded by the presentation
for baptism of several infants, neatly dressed like
the children of Europeans.
"It was an occasion," says Mr. Stewart,
"which necessarily called from the pious mind
the most devout thanksgiving unto God, for the
rich displays of his grace here made; while it
elicited the most ardent prayer, that thus, ' He
who is mighty to save,' would 'go forth conquering and to conquer.'  The most unreflecting and incredulous mind could not have looked
upon the scene without admiration, at the decorum and seeming piety which pervaded the whole.
The number of the communicants was near two
hundred, all natives, with the exception of Mr.
Stribling, myself, and the mission family; presenting, in their deportment and whole appearance, as great a degree of intelligence, devotion,
and entire respectability, as any ordinary church. in our country.
" The happiness to me, of thus surrounding the
table of our common Lord with most of my old
associates and missionary friends, and with so
many of the chiefs and people, whose spiritual




'CHAP. XI.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


319


welfare has long been a topic of the deepest interest and prayer, was exceedingly great, and filled
Amy heart with gratitude and praise."
Mr. Stewart visited Kaavaroa, on the 13th of
October, 1829. The principal difference he observed between this and the other stations, as it
respected the appearance of the congregations, was,
that here the place of worship was a small grove
of trees, immediately in front of Naibe's house,
paved with a natural bed of smooth lava. The
chapel which had been built was far from adequate to accommodate the immense congregation,
which usually assembled from the opposite side
of the bay, and from along the coast for many
miles below. On occasion of Mr. Stewart's visit,
not less than five thousand were clustered round
the preacher, and the circle of chieftains in the
centre of the grove, as quiet, orderly, and seemingly as devout an audience, as if each knew and
felt that he was hastening for eternity.
"A more pleasing and impressive scene," observes Mr. Stewart, ' could scarcely be sketched,
than that presented by the dispersion of the audience at the close of the afternoon service. By
far the greater portion of the multitude had arrived by water; and, shortly after the benediction had been pronounced, without a rude, or a
noisy word, or a single act of impropriety, canoes were launched from every part of the rocky
shore, and filled with the light and happy faces
of the recent worshippers, were seen speeding to
their respective homes. I counted the canoes as
we rowed off to the ship; and, though many had
already passed out of sight beyond the southern




320         MISSIONARY RECORDS.    [CHAP. XI.
point, and many were yet unlaunched, I numbered two hundred and ten, each containing from
three to fifteen persons, many of whom were
twelve or fourteen miles, and some even a
greater distance from their homes."
Such was the interest and excitement at this
time, on the subject of religion, along the whole
coast, and even a good portion of the island, that
Mr. and Mrs. Thurston informed Mr. Stewart,
it was literally true, that they were denied the
ordinary hours for sleep and food, by the visits
of persons demanding instruction in the way of
salvation.  Numbers daily crowded their premises for this purpose, not only from their immediate neighbourhood, but from regions at a distance, and many of these travelling on foot.
Often they could remain only for a few hours,
while their simple business was the inquiry,
What shall we do to be saved?"
After visiting several places in this neighbourhood, Mr. Stewart had the pleasure of welcorning a party of the chiefs, including the wife and
daughter of Governor Adams, Kamakau, and
several others, on board the ship. One of the
most interesting of this party, was a tall, venerable, fine-featured old lady, with a benignant expression of countenance, and head white as silver;
she appeared to be eighty years of age, though
probably not so old. She was, in her youth, the
wife of the king of the island, in the time of
Captain Cook. Under any circumstances, the
sight of an individual thus associated with the
discovery of the islands, and the fate of the lamented navigator, would be interesting; but the




CHAP. XI.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.          321
facts we have already detailed, connected with
her later history, rendered it doubly so.  She
had lived not only to see the introduction of the
religion of salvation in her long benighted country, but to share, as was confidently believed, in
its richest blessings herself; she is a member of
the church, and has so diligently applied to study,
as to be able to read a portion of the New Testament in her native language. These facts afford
pleasing evidence of the progress of the gospel,
in the different islands, in the close of the year
1829.
The mission press at the islands had commenced its operations on the first Monday in
January, 1822. From that time, when the language was just beginning to assume a written
form, until March 20, 1830, scarcely ten years
after the mission was commenced, twenty-two
distinct books had been printed in the native language, averaging thirty-seven small pages, and
amounting to three hundred and eighty-seven
thousand copies, and ten million two hundred
and eighty-seven thousand eight hundred pages.
This printing was executed at Honoruru, where
there were two presses. But, besides this, three
million three hundred and forty-five thousand
pages, in the Hawaiian language, were printed in
the United States, containing the Gospels of
Matthew, Mark, and John, which swells the
whole amount of printing at that time, for the
use of the islanders, to thirteen million six hundred and thirty-two thousand eight hundred
pages; reckoning the twenty-two distinct works
in a continuous series, the number of pages in




'2'21       MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. XI.
the series would be three hundred and thirty-two.
Of these forty were elementary, and the rest
either portions of Scripture, or strictly evangelical reading, the best adapted to the condition of
the people which could have been selected under
existing circumstances.
The cheapness with which the system of education was thus far maintained among the Sandwich Islanders was truly astonishing. If all the
books then printed had been distributed gratuitously among the people, the whole cost of instruction for each of the fifty thousand learners
would have been less than one-third of a dollar;
the supply of books having been almost the only
expense.  Each of the nine hundred schools
would have cost only about fifteen dollars, which
is not more than is given as a month's wages for
a schoolmaster in America. These books, however, were not distributed gratuitously; the missionaries thought it best for the natives to pay
for the books which were put into their hands,
and this they were both able and willing to do,
the usual medium of purchase being either labour
or the products of the island.
The printing establishment, indeed, was prevented from wholly supporting itself, only by the
want of a circulating medium among the natives.
It is a fact of considerable importance in the
records of the Sandwich Islands, that, in the year
1830, one-third part of the people had been
brought into schools, and one-half of these had
been taught to read; many were able to write,
and some were versed in the elementary principles of arithmetic.




rCHAP. XI.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.


3323


Nine hundred of the natives were employed as
schoolmasters. The missionaries having felt the
importance of raising the qualifications of persons
thus employed, schools had been instituted for
them in various places, under the immediate in
struction of the missionaries, their wives, or the
single females connected with the mission.  In
these schools were taught reading, writing, and
arithmetic. It was intended soon to add geography, and the first principles of astronomy;
and, as the habits and attainments of pupils
might fit them for it, to open the other depart'ments of science to their pursuit.
The manner in which prayer meetings, and
meetings for religious inquiry, were at this time
attended, has already been described as extremely
encouraging; and the facts are such as can only
be traced to the blessing of God on the establishment of a Christian mission.  But, to guard
against misapprehension, it is necessary to take
another view.  A moment's reflection will be
sufficient to show that, after all, the work of evangelizing and civilizing the islands had but just
commenced; the nation was yet in its infancy;
it was just beginning to understand the advantages of the social state. The elements of individual improvement, and domestic happiness, and
national order and prosperity had been introduced,
and the contrast was thus rendered more striking
between the former and present condition of the
nation; very few, indeed, had done more than
merely cross the threshold of knowledge. Salvation through the Lamb that was slain had been
brought before the minds of thousands, and many




324


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. XI.


had fled to lay hold on the hope set before them;
but still their advantages, both intellectual and
spiritual, were few and scanty, compared with
those of the people of more civilized nations.
The regular preaching of the gospel was enjoyed
by not more than one-fourth of the inhabitants;
the rest saw only a few rays of light. Two small
companies of idolaters had been discovered in
Hawaii, and it was feared that others still retained an attachment to their former superstitions.
For the purpose of assisting the labourers already in the field, a third reinforcement of missionaries for the Sandwich Islands sailed, on the
28th of December, 1830, from New Bedford, in
the ship New England, bound for the Pacific.
The members of the reinforcement -were the Rev.
Messrs. Dwight Baldwin, Reuben Tinker, and
Shelden Dibble, missionaries; and Mr. Andrew
Johnstone, who was to be associated with Mr.
Chamberlain as superintendent of secular concerns, in order that the latter might have more
time for inspecting the schools. These brethren,
who were all accompanied by their wives, reached the islands on the 7th of June, after a very
pleasant passage, and were joyfully received by
the missionaries and natives.
At this time, although the desire for instruction
amongst the natives continued to be very encouraging, the disadvantages arising from the want of
a higher degree of civilization, on the part of the
natives, began soon to make themselves apparent.
The impatience of restraint which the children
discovered at school, and to which they were in
part led by the want of parental discipline at
2




CHAP. XI.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.


325


home, rendered it difficult to carry out the necessary plans of tuition. Many were induced to
enter by the novelty of a book prepared on purpose for them, and given to all who desired to
learn; but, when the novelty was gone, and their
books had become soiled and torn, not a few returned to their old habits of idleness.
This evil was greatly promoted by the incompetency of the teachers: they failed to interest,
because their own stock of knowledge was exhausted, and the children, as well as the adults,
were quick to perceive their deficiency.  The
immorality of many of the teachers was also a
cause of great trouble to the missionaries. Upon
the then existing system, the progress of instruction might be said to have had nearly attained
its ne plus ultra, and was becoming stationary.
It had accomplished all the good, and, indeed,
more than all that could have been expected from
it. Thousands had been taught to read the word
of God, and some in every place had been taught
to write; but now the system was in want of a
radical reform, and one which must begin with
the teachers.
Something had already been done at the several
stations towards the instruction of the teachers;
but, with the numerous pastoral labours of the
missionaries, it was impossible for them adequately to remedy the evil. The missionaries,
therefore, at their general meeting in June, 1831,
resolved to commence a high school at Lahaina,
under the tuition of Mr. Andrews, and the superintendence of five directors, of whom the
principal tutor should be one. The plan of the
2 F




326         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. XI.
school embraced a wider range than the mere
preparation of native school teachers.  Pious
and promising natives were to be prepared to
become assistant teachers of religion, and fellow
labourers with the missionaries in publishing the
gospel of Jesus. It was also the design of the
institution  to  disseminate sound  knowledge
through the islands, embracing literature and
the sciences, and whatever would be likely eventually to elevate the natives from their ignorance,
and render them a thinking, enlightened, and
virtuous people. The number of scholars for the
first year was limited to fifty, exclusive of the
young king and five of his friends; and these
were to be sent from the four principal islands, in
proportion to their number of inhabitants. It
was decided to introduce, as far as possible, the
system of manual labour.




CHAP. XII.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.


327


CHAPTER XII.
Enlarged preparations for printing the Holy Scriptures-Enactments of the chiefs in favour of temperance- Conversion of the priestess of the volcano
-Improvement of the social condition of the people-Laxity of parental discipline among the
people-Progress of temperance-Discontinuance
of the use of tobacco among the native Christians
at Lahaina-Attention to religion among the seamen-Increase of native churches-Death of the
regent Kaahumanu-Sketch of her characterImportant effects of her death upon the nation-.
Establishment of normal schools-Brief mission to
the Marquesas-First newspaper in the Sandwich
Islands- Comprehensive view of the state of the
mission in 1836-Congregations, churches, schools,
and printing.
THE reinforcement, which had sailed;n the close
of the year 1830, took out a fresh press, and the
other necessary materials for a printing establishment in the island of Hawaii. Liberal grants
from the American Bible Society, of five thousand dollars, for printing an edition of twenty
thousand copies of the New Testament; with
another grant from the Tract Society, of five
hundred dollars, for printing religious tracts in
the Hawaiian language; enabled the missionaries
to keep both their presses continually employed.
Such was the state of things in the different
islands, when a number of chiefs and others, approving of the object, assembled at Honoruru,
for the purpose of forming a national Temperance




328        MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. XII.
Society. About a thousand names were immediately subscribed; and it was proposed to circulate copies of the resolutions adopted by the
society throughout the islands, and to obtain as
many signatures as possible.  The resolutions
were in substance-that the subscribers would
neither drink ardent spirits for pleasure, deal in
them for gain, engage in distilling them, offer
them to any one as an act of civility, nor give
them to workmen on account of their labour.
Kuakini, the governor of Oahu, being afterwards
applied to for a license to sell ardent spirits to
foreigners only, not to natives, made this answer,
" To horses, cattle, and hogs, you may sell rum;
but to real men, you must not on these shores."
Another fact, which may be introduced here as
having occurred about this time, and which is
interesting as illustrating the sovereign dispensations of Divine grace, was the hopeful conversion
of some on whom there was, apparently, the least
reason to hope that religious impression would
become effectual. Among these may be particularly specified three of the formerly riotous crew
of the English ship Daniel. One of the number,
who lived on the shore at Lahaina, had been
proposed for admission to the church in the very
place where he had once joined with his comrades
in making the attack upon the mission family;
and two others had become hopefully pious. A
change of character, not less striking and admirable in its circumstances, was that which took place
in the instance of the great priestess of Pele, the
goddess of the volcano. This woman had left
her residence in Hamakua, to take up her abode




CHAP. XII.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.


329


where she could enjoy the preaching of the gospel; being fully convinced of her folly in ofciating as high priestess to that which had once
been regarded as the most teirible of the island
gods.   When questioned by the missionaries
respecting her former belief in the imaginary
goddess, her feelings seemed to revolt from the
subject; but she was induced to confess, that she
once thought it to be a reality. The people, she
said, used to think that her power was irresistible.
They used to pray to her; and also to Pele, to
take care of her, that thereby she might be propitious to them. They were required to prostrate
themselves when she passed, on pain of death;
but now she took her place at the footstool of
sovereign mercy, anxiously inquiring, with hundreds of others, the way of life.
It must not be forgotten, however, in the pleasure excited by the narration of these and similar
occurrences, that the great mass of the natives
were, at this time, necessarily ignorant of the arts
of domestic life in use among civilized nations.
Their life was still little better than a round of
indolence, with barely labour enough to keep
them from starvation. Their houses were small
and filthy, consisting of but one apartment for all
the members of the family, and but one low door
for entrance; the whole often affording but an
imperfect shelter from the rains. Their furniture
consisted of a few mats for beds, spread upon the
ground; a few calabashes for food and water;
and a rude tray, in which they pounded their food
with a stone. Their clothing amounted to little
more than a clIth worn round the loins, and
2 F 2




330


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. XII.


another thrown carelessly over the shoulders; or,
sometimes, it was more scanty even than this: it
being true of them, as of all other inhabitants of
tropical regions living in a state of untutored
nature, that they looked upon clothing rather as
an ornament than a covering. It was the aim
and hope of the missionaries, by setting an example of industry, to excite a desire of improvement
in the people round them; and, though formidable difficulties opposed, they despaired not of a
general revolution in the social condition of the
islanders. Many of the natives had learned the
use of tools, by seeing foreign workmen belonging to the resident traders use them; and their
own ingenuity had enabled them to make many
useful articles, when the pattern was before them.
In this manner they had acquired the ability, to
some extent, to manufacture doors, chairs, chests,
tables, bedsteads, and cupboards. The braiding
and sewing of hats and bonnets, from the cocoanut and palm leaf, and the cutting and making
of garments, had also been taught to a great
number of persons by the females of the mission,
and had come into extensive use.
The native females employed in the mission
families had, of course, acquired an aptitude for
various other useful services and arts. They had
been taught to perform all the branches of domestic labour, according to the usages of civilized
life; and those who were instructed in this manner taught others, so that in many families there
began to be an air of neatness and comfort, to
which they had previously been strangers. Whatever they saw about the persons, or in the fami



:CHAP. XII.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.


331


lies of the missionaries, which it was in their
power to make, they endeavoured to imitate; and
persevered until they had accomplished their
purpose to their own satisfaction. Many built
themselves comfortable houses, having separate
lodging rooms; but, though cotton grows spontaneously in the islands, and might be cultivated to
almost any extent, the natives are still unacquainted with the process of manufacturing cloth.
The habitations and persons of the chiefs, however, formed an exception to the foregoing remarks. All the principal chiefs, the young king
excepted, had become members of the church,
and gave satisfactory evidence of their piety.
The decalogue had become a part of the law of
the land; murder, theft, and adultery, were prohibited by special statutes; and, in Oahu, spirit
shops, gaming houses, and riding on the sabbath
for amusement, had been forbidden by the governor of the island. The prohibition was enforced
by an armed police, and several horses of foreigners were seized, who were found violating the
law.
A fourth reinforcement of the mission arrived
at Honoruru, on the 17th of May, 1832, consisting Jf nineteen individuals, who sailed in the ship
Averick; and, on the 21st of November, in the
same year, a fifth reinforcement embarked from
New London, Connecticut, in the ship Mentor.
In their communications at this time, the missionaries mention the extreme laxity of parental
authority amongst the natives, which prevailed
to such a degree, that when the children arrived
at a suitable age for attending school, they were




332


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. XII.


frequently altogether unmanageable. It was with
difficulty they could be induced to attend either
at school or on the public worship of God, and
without more efficient means of bringing them
under instruction, there appeared great reason to
fear they might grow up as ignorant as their
parents, and more vicious. There was nothing
which the missionaries witnessed with more pain,
than the criminal neglect, and often more criminal conduct of parents towards their children.
We have already mentioned the exemplary
conduct of the most influential persons in the
islands, in discountenancing both the use and
sale of ardent spirits. The progress of this most
important reformation was, in some degree,
retarded at Honoruru, by the opposition of the
foreigners, who persisted in continuing the
trade. But at Lahaina no traffic whatever was
allowed in spirituous liquors; and here foreigners,
as well as natives, have attempted the introduction of it in vain: fines, imprisonment, or banishment followed the violation of this wholesome
law; and from choice on the part of many, and
necessity on the part of others, scarcely any of
this fascinating poison was consumed on an
island containing thirty-five thousand people,
and not long since flooded with intemperance.
There was another kind of pernicious indulgence to which the islanders had also been
addicted, and that was the intemperate use of
tobacco. This habit prevailed to such a degree,
that amongst the men, women, and children
over ten years of age, scarcely one in forty was
exempt from it; and the expense of time and




CHAP. XII.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.


333


health thus consumed was great. The members
of the mission, however, having themselves first
relinquished the use of the herb, a marked diminution soon took place in the prevalence of the
habit; and it is a circumstance which gives a
special interest to this reform, that it thus seemed
to owe its commencement and progress entirely
to other causes than the authority of the chiefs.
At Lahaina, it commenced amongst the females,
while Mr. Richards was absent at Honoruru, in
consequence of addresses from Mrs. Richards
and Miss Ogden, on the evils of tobacco. A
number of females gave in their names in pledge
of their entire abstinence: these prevailed on
their husbands to relinquish smoking, and for
successive days the people came in companies to
the house of Mr. Richards, bringing their store
of tobacco and pipes with them. Not only was
Mr. Richards absent, but the chiefs also, and
no other means were employed, except the persuasion of the two females just mentioned.
There cail   1 no doubt, that many of the natives
acted from principle; and the influence of ardent
spirits having been entirely banished from the
place some time before, this other kindred evil
was the less able to maintain its ground. More
than two thousand five hundred natives, at Lahaina, thus pledged themselves to entire abstinence from the use of tobacco.
An unusual number of vessels resorted to
Lahaina during the same year, probably in consequence of the greater absence of temptation to
their crews which was found there than at Honoruru. Fourteen captains, and one hundred




334


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. XII.


and fifty seamen, were at one time seen at the'
house of God; and there was among them a
very promising spirit of serious inquiry, far
greater than had ever been witnessed at the
islands among this class of people before. This
pleasing attention to religion occurred at the
time, when the churches of America were preparing to send a missionary to the islands, for
the especial benefit of seamen. One of the ship
masters, whose attention had been awakened to
the importance of seeking for salvation at a previous visit, had come to the resolution to refrain
from the occupation of taking whales on the sabbath; and had performed a successful cruise, in
the strict observance of this commendable resolution.
The number of natives admitted to the mission
churches, during the year ending June, 1832, was
two hundred and thirty-five; making the whole
number admitted, since the commencement of the
mission, six hundred and seventy-seven. Of
these, about six individuals had been excommunicated; and about twenty-five had died, as it
was believed, in the faith of the gospel. The
names of Keopuolani, Taumuarii, Karaimoku,
and Naihe, will long be held in affectionate remembrance by the church of Christ at the
Sandwich Islands. And now it was their painful duty to place another name on the list of departed worthies-the name of one more distinguished than any of the others, as a religious
reformer and benefactor of the nation. The
queen regent, Kaahumanu, was removed by
death, on the 5th of June, 1832. The here



OIHAP. XII.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.


335


dlitary chiefs of the Sandwich and other islands
ton the Pacific Ocean, are of a higher order than
the common people, in their physical structure,
and in the character of their minds; and the
queen, for native energy of character, was preeminent among the chiefs.
Naturally, Kaahumanu had been haughty and
cruel; but when, at length, the gospel took hold
upon her mind, it appeared to imbue her with its
influence, and, through the power of the Holy
Spirit, wrought a great, permanent, and most salutary change upon her disposition and character.
While considered as the prop of the nation, she
was the kind friend and benefactress of the missionaries, the firm supporter of their cause, and
the faithful guardian of the infant churches
which had been formed in the several islands.
When the large reinforcement arrived in the
Averick, she kindly sent them her salutations
while yet on board ship, almost as soon as they
entered the port. Being too ill to meet them,
when they were publicly introduced to the government, she received them at her house, took
each of them by the hand, expressed her satisfaction at their arrival, and was affected to
tears. Being assured that they had come to
seek the good of her people, she replied, " This
is the single object of us all." Her deportment
during her illness was most exemplary and instructive. Evidences of her Christian character
seemed to multiply, as she approached the confines of earth, and drew near the ineffable glory
of heaven; and some of the foreign residents,




336        MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. XII.
who before spoke lightly of Christianity, now declared their conviction that it was genuine. She
had always appeared grateful on receiving portions of the Holy Scriptures, as they came successively from the press, and, until her strength
was too much reduced, she spent much time in
reading them. The last sheet of the New Testament was completed during her sickness, and
an entire copy of the sacred volume was presented to her when she was no longer able to
read. After surveying it attentively, both inside and out, she emphatically pronounced it,
"Mlaitai," (excellent,) then wrapped it carefully
in her handkerchief, laid it upon her bosom,
gently clasped her hands over it, and looked upwards, as if it were a passport to that immortal
life, with which it had made her joyfully acquainted. She died in the full possession of her
reason, which she employed to the last in supplicating and adoring thoughts of the Lord Jesus; and one of her last expressions was, "I
will go to Him, and shall be comforted." She
died at the age of fifty-eight years.
In the religious history of the Sandwich Islands, the death of Kaahumanu formed a crisis
of no inconsiderable importance.  Endowed
with a rare capacity to govern, this chief ruler
of the people threw the whole weight of her
influence and authority into the scale of Christian morals and piety. None of the pious chiefs
had influence enough to succeed to the high
place which she occupied.   On her dying
bed, she did indeed name Kinau as her suc



LHAP. XII.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.            337
Lcessor; and the young king, then arrived at
I:maturity, publicly recognised her as his agent
Ifor transacting the business of the kingdom;
i;but, in January, 1833, in consequence of a refusal of Kinau and other chiefs to gratify his
'Y wishes, he took counsel with ~" the young men
which were brought up with him," and by his.example virtually abrogated some of the most
salutary laws which he had previously enacted.
I:oapiri, a near relative, immediately came up
ifrom Maui, to dissuade him from measures so; injurious to himself and the people.  Upon the
arrival of that pious chieftain, however, the king
assembled the chiefs and people, and publicly
declared that he took the reins of government
into his own hands, and that with him was the
i power of making laws, and the power of life and
I death. He then published laws prohibiting only
murder, adultery, and theft, from which the inference was drawn that these were the principal
laws of the land. Yet he still recognised Kinau
as his agent in transacting business, and it was
hoped that the visit of Hoapiri could not be
without a favourable influence upon his mind.
His conduct towards the missionaries was never
otherwise than of the most friendly character,
and he cheerfully assented, even at this time, to
an enlargement of their number, to meet the evident and urgent necessities of the people.
It soon became known that the highest chief
had relaxed the reins of moral duty, and everywhere the effect was such as might have been; expected. There was a falling off in the schools,
and in the congregations; the sabbath began;                2G




338


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. XII,


to be profaned by sinful recreations; not a few
resumed their old habits of intemperance; some
of the members of the church fell, and the love
of others waxed cold: in short, it became painfully obvious, that there had been a lamentable
change in the moral influences which had for
years been operating upon the nation. As it regards the mission, the events that have been referred to were, in their ultimate influence, in
many respects favourable: they were so, especially, in promoting a more simple spirit of dependance upon God, in the missionaries and
their patrons, and in counteracting the strong
tendency to hypocrisy, which is found to prevail
amongst the common people.
It should be remembered, that these changes
took place precisely at the moment when the
schools had nearly exhausted their power, for
want of better educated teachers: even if Kaahumanu had lived, not all her zeal and power
could have sustained the popularity and influence of the schools. That they were sustained
so well, and so long, and exerted so much influence under such circumstances, cannot be satisfactorily accounted for by a reference to second
causes alone.
The fifth reinforcement of the mission, consisting of Messrs. Smith and Parker, missionaries,
and Mr. Fuller, printer, arrived at Honoruru on
the 1st of May, 1833. Mr. Fuller's health was
such, on his arrival, that he was incapacitated
for performing his duties as a printer, and found
it necessary to return to his native land. Mr.
and Mrs. Ruggles were also under the same




CHAP. xII.]  SANDWICH ISLANDS.          339
painful necessity, in consequence of the protracted illness of the former.
In order to obviate some of the evils alluded
to, normal or station schools, for the better instructing of the teachers, were formed at most of
the islands. These were taught by the missionaries themselves. The wives of the missionaries
had also female schools; and both bestowed unwonted attention upon the children and youth,
who, though wild and wayward, because ungoverned by their parents, were not wholly intractable. Miss Ogden had a flourishing school
at Lahaina, in November, containing one hundred and sixty children.
In consideration of the state of the nation, a
public fast was proclaimed by Kinau, on the 3rd
of March, 1833; on which occasion about two
thousand attended public worship at Honoruru,
both morning and afternoon. It was believed,
that a large proportion of these, not only abstained from servile labour and amusements during that day, but literally fasted. It is pleasing
also to state, that at the monthly meetings for
prayer, which were held at Honoruru, in March,
April, and May, previous to the sending of a
mission to the Washington Islands, nearly one
hundred dollars were contributed by the natives
alone for sending the gospel abroad.
The instructions forwarded by the committee
to the mission at the Sandwich Islands, to take
no farther steps in relation to the Washington
Islands, did not arrive in time. At the general
meeting, in June, 1833, the mission deputed




340


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. XII.


Messrs. Alexander, Armstrong, and Parker, to
commence the mission.   They were especially
induced to this measure by some flattering reports of ship masters who had been at Nuuhioa,
but which afterwards proved delusive.   The
three brethren, with their families, sailed from
Honoruru, on board the brigantine Dhaulle,
on the 2nd of July.
They found the inhabitants of the Washington group few in number, and divided and subdivided into small settlements, which were much
scattered, and separated from each other by high
ridges and mountains, difficult and dangerous to
pass. The tribes, also, were perpetually at war.
These facts, viewed in connexion with the great
expense at which the mission would necessarily
have to be maintained, and the equal need of,
and far greater facilities for, missionary labour in
several unoccupied districts of the Sandwich Islands, satisfied the three brethren.that it was
best, on the whole, to break up the mission at
once, and return to the former scene of their labours. All the circumstances of the case considered, the committee approved of this relinquishment of the mission; and it is but justice to gay,
that the courage, enterprise, and self-denying
zeal, with which these brethren and their wives
prosecuted their mission for eight months, in
circumstances the most unfavourable, entitled
them to the unabated confidence and affectionate
sympathy of the churches of Christ.
In a general letter from the missionaries,
dated Honoruru, July 15, 1834, a more encon



CHAP. XII.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.          341:raging account is given, of the transactions of
government, than the events of the former year
had led them to expect. The king, in conjunction with other chiefs, had published a pamphlet:of laws against murder, manslaughter, theft,
perjury, and adultery; making the first punishable by death, and the others by fine and imprisonment. A law was also added against drunkenness, or rather against any outrages upon persons and property which might be committed
under its influence. The former laws against
vending ardent spirits were no longer in force
at Honoruru. Any one might sell it by paying
a few dollars to government for a licence; and
some was manufactured in Oahu, though happily little had found its way to the other islands
of the group. The laws, also, formerly enacted
for the protection of the sabbath at Honoruru,
were no longer enforced.   Foreigners, and
others who were so disposed, could ride out for
pleasure on that day; but it is worthy of remark that, though the same liberty was allowed
as before the law was made, the custom was
much less prevalent, while the number of foreign
residents was greatly on the increase; and, altogether, there was a comparative stillness and sacredness on the sabbath, which showed the
Christian visitor that he was not in a land under
the full power of heathen darkness.
As a means of disseminating knowledge, the
missionaries, about this time, established a religious newspaper for the islands, appointing one
of their number to take charge of it. This plan,
which seemed to be called for, and had been
2G2




342        MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. XtI.
suggested from various quarters, was regarded
in the light of an experiment; and was undertaken both under a deep sense of responsibility,
and with earnest prayer to God that he would
render it a means of breaking down the bulwarks
of Satan, which were still strong in these islands
of the sea; in this respect it has been useful.
The general meeting of the mission commenced
this year on the 2nd of June, and continued until
the 16th of July. It was an unusually long and
solemn season. Never before had the members
of this church been so loudly admonished, by the
providence of God, to be up and doing with all
their might. While most of their number were
entering the harbour at Honoruru, they were
informed that a beloved sister, who, for ought
they knew, was actively engaged for the cause of
Christ on the earth, had lain just one week in
the grave; and, in the midst of their meeting in
July, they were called to commit another of their
number, a dear brother, to the dust.
It was a severe loss which the members of the
mission family were called to suffer in the death
of Mrs. Rogers. For four or five days she sustained, with Christian fortitude, a painful sickness; and then rested from her labours to join,
it was believed, the company of the blessed who
die in the Lord. She breathed her last on the
23rd of May, and was buried in the same grave
with her two infant children.
Mr. Shepard, who had often been spoken of,
in the letters of the missionaries, as one near the
grave, continued for the space of twelve months
ready to depart, and at times apparently on the




CHAP. XII.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.          8343
point of going, and then reviving again so as
to give some attention to the reading of proof
sheets, and to other business of the printing department; labours to which he was ardently
devoted even to the last: it was his heart's desire
to supply the islands with the word of life. During the present meeting of the brethren, he frequently attended the general conferences, and
was even able to take some part in the deliberations, until the 30th, when he was again so unwell
as to be confined to his room; but, happily, in
the assurance, that for him to live was Christ,
and to die gain. On Saturday evening he became worse, and on the morning of the sabbath,
July 6th, the families of the mission were called
to his bedside, to witness his departure: his end
was peace. His remains were committed to the
grave the next day, to rest there until the resurrection of the just.
On the 6th of June, 1836, the Hellespont,
with Messrs. Coan, Dimond, and Hall, with
their wives, and Miss Brown and Miss Hitchcock, on board, arrived at Honoruru. Doctor
and Mrs. Chapin had returned to America, on
account of the confirmed illness of the latter, who
had been confined to her couch from the time of
her arrival at the islands. Mr. and Mrs. Goodrich had also returned, with their five children.
According to the Report of the American
Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions,
for 1836, there were then in the islands, sixteen stations, twenty-three missionaries, one physician, one superintendent of secular afairs,




344


344     MISSIONARY REICORDS. [CHAP. X1i.


two printers, one bookbinder, and three female
assistant missionaries.  These were located as
follows -
ISLAND~ OF HAWAII.
Kairua.-Asa Thurston and Artemas Bishop,
and their wives.
Kaawaloa.-Cockran Forbes and wife.
W~aimea.~-Lorenzo Lyons and wife.
IHilo.-iDavid B. Lyman and Titus Coan, and
their wives.
ISLAND OF MAUI.
JLahaina. -William. Richards and Ephraim
Spaulding, and their wives; and Miss Maria
C. Ogyden,) teacher.
Lahainaluna.-Lorrin Andrews, Ephraim' W.
Clarke, and Sheldon Dibble, and their wives;,
and Edward H. Rogers, printer.
TVaialuku.-Jonathan S. Green and Richard
Armstrongy, and their wives; and Miss Lydia
BrownI teacher.
ISLAND OF MOROKAI.
Jtaluaaha.-Henry R. Hitchcock and wife;
and Miss Elizabeth M. Hitchcock, t~eacher.
ISLAND OF OAHUJ.
IHonoruru.-Hiram Bingyliam and Reuben Tink.
er; Garret P. Judd, physiician;' Levi Chanmberlain, sprntendent of secular affairs
Henry Dimond, bookbinder; Edwin 0. Hall,
prnter;- and their wives.
B2.Ea. —Lowell Smith and his wife.




CHAP. XII.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.          345
WTialua.-John S. Emerson and his wife.
Kaneohe.-Benjamin W. Parker and his wife.
ISLAND OF RAUAI, OR TAUAI.
TVaimea.- Samuel Whitney and his wife.
Koloa.-Peter J. Gulick and his wife.
Kapaa. —William P. Alexander and his wife;
Dwight Baldwin and his wife.
The extent to which printing was employed
by the missionaries, at this time, will appear
from the fact of their issuing in one year, twenty
publications, chiefly quarto or duodecimo, the
total number of their pages being nine hundred
and twenty-five; and the total of copies, one hundred and eighteen thousand seven hundred and
twenty-eight; making the total number of copies
of different books since the establishment of the
press, nine hundred and seventy-eight thousand
five hundred and twenty-eight, amounting to
forty-two million five hundred and thirty-two
thousand and fifty-six pages; and, at this time,
a new edition of ten thousand copies of the New
Testament was required. During the same year,
fifteen hundred and forty-six marriages were
solemnized. The twelve Christian churches contained seven hundred and forty-nine members,
of whom ninety-four had been received into fellowship during the year. The introduction of
the art of spinning, and weaving cotton cloth
was, at this time, introduced, with pleasing prospects of extensive good, in promoting industry
among the people.




346


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. XII.


The state of the mission, in the year 1835, will
appear from the following answer, sent by the
missionaries to the American Society. In reply
to the question, ("What are the decisive evidences of progress in your work, comparing the
present state and character of the people with
what they were at the commencement of the
mission?" they sent an answer of nearly fifty
pages; some extracts from which will present a
more clear and correct summary than it would
be easy otherwise to obtain, of the real state of
the mission.
These statements were made with deliberation,
had the sanction of the whole mission, were in
answer to an official call for accurate information
that might be entirely relied on, and were not made
by a few men, but by upwards of twenty well educated ministers of the gospel, and a number of
pious and intelligent laymen, scattered through the
group, mingling constantly with the people, most
of them having done so for years, some for fifteen
years; and, as a body, having the best possible
means of knowing the truth of what they affirmed.
After remarking on the wickedness and ignorance of the people when the missionaries first
arrived among them, and also on their destitution
of all the ordinary means of intellectual improvement, even of a written language, the brethren
proceed to notice the means resorted to, to improve the character and condition of the islanders.
To meet the wants of the nation in such circumstances, an alphabet of their language was




CHAP. XII.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.


347


formed, and the language reduced to writing;
schools opened in every district; school books
prepared, and brought into extensive use; religious tracts published and circulated; the New
Testament and other portions of the Bible translated, and made accessible to thousands. Three
printing presses are kept in operation, to supply
the means of light, and a thousand pages of new
matter are now on an average added yearly to
the amount already published. The preaching of
the gospel is further constantly maintained by
preachers acquainted with the language, at fourteen different stations in the islands, and also
with tolerable regularity at several out stations;
it is likewise occasionally extended through very
remote districts, where no missionary is located.
The congregations, where public worship is
maintained, behave with decorum, always giving a respectful, and often an interested attention
to the preachers.
" The attention of the missionaries has, from the
first, been more or less directed to schools. Within
about five months after the arrival of the pioneers,
a quarterly examination of the first school at
Honoruru was held, which was so far satisfactory, as it showed the facility with which the
natives could be taught to read and write. A
similar impulse was also early given at the other
islands, and has not yet ceased to be felt. The
missionaries, and their wives and helpers, have,
up to the present time, endeavoured to cherish
the schools as a primary means of reforming the
nation. They have had classes under their own
2




348        MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. X:
immediate instruction, amounting sometimes to
not less than a thousand individuals of different
ages. But the mass of those who have attempted
to learn, embracing those numerous collections
of the people in different parts of the islands'
called schools, have been under the instruction:
of incompetent native teachers. The aggregate:
of learners in the islands, has, at some periods,
amounted to fifty thousand.  Probably more
than four-fifths of these were advanced to years
of maturity, and not a few beyond middle age.
Most of them had the ordinary occupations of
life to attend to, as though no school existed.
" The plan of a high school is, at length, in a
good degree matured, and put in successful operation; and three of our number, as instructors,
devoted almost exclusively to its interests. The
number of pupils is one hundred and eighteen.
Their studies, at present, are geography, including
that of the Bible, arithmetic, trigonometry, composition in their own language, with the rudiments of the Greek language to a select class.
A system of Christian ethics here also is, and
must be, a prominent object of pursuit; and, it is
hoped, that some will attain to a thorough acquaintance with theology, natural and revealed,
and be prepared to preach the gospel with acceptance and success.
" Of the mental acquirements of the best
pupils, both of those in the high school, and
others who have enjoyed particular personal instruction from the missionaries, we are disposed
to speak with reserve. It is supposed that fifty
4




CHAP. XII.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.           349
or sixty may be found, who could now sustain
as good an examination, in mental arithmetic and
topographical geography, as a majority of the
students in the common academies of the United
States, or as ordinary men of business. A much
greater number may be found among the pupils
of the high school, the best teachers who have
the charge of common schools, and the foremost
members of our churches, who are able to give
an exhortation, or offer a prayer in public, with
much propriety. Respectable specimens of composition have been produced by them. Among
these are several interesting and useful pieces of
evangelical poetry; some by men of middle age,
and some by females past middle age, who learned to read and write by the aid of spectacles. A
considerable number also contribute to a paper.
" We are happy to say, that, among those who
have received our instructions, there are many
fair fruits of our labour, who are valuable assistants to the missionaries, and who are rendering
important services to their countrymen.
" Common schools, under the instruction of native teachers, owing to various causes mentioned
in previous reports, are not so numerous, nor so
vigorously sustained at present, as they were
formerly; and cannot be revived and rendered
highly useful, until the high school, and the
school for teachers at the several stations, shall
train up an adequate number of well qualified instructors to take charge of them.  Still these
common schools, notwithstanding the unskilfulness of their teachers, have not been altogether a
2 H




350         MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. XII.
failure, even with reference to the ordinary purposes of schools. They at one period embraced as
many as one-third of the whole population of the
islands."  The results are thus stated by the
missionaries:
" It is supposed, that the number of readers
in the nation now is not less than twenty-three
thousand; and that the whole number who have
been taught to read, so as to be able to derive
benefit from the perusal of tracts and portions of
Scripture, may be from seven thousand to ten
thousand above that number, that is, from thirty
thousand to thirty-three thousand.
" Our school system, then, imperfect as it has
been in all its incipient arrangements, has, in our
view, been well adapted to the condition and
wants of the people, in its time'; has filled a place
which nothing else could have filled; and, to some
extent, given order and form to society, which
must otherwise have been a chaos, or a mass
of human materials dissolving and crumbling
into ruins."
Respecting the operations of the press, the missionaries remark:" During the last year, in consideration of the
wants of the people, a religious newspaper has
been undertaken, designed both to encourage a
taste for reading, and to afford a variety of useful
instruction. \It is issued semi-monthly, and afforded to subscribers at a dollar a year. At first
fifteen hundred copies were circulated, but as
soon as its character was known, three thousand
copies were required.




CHAP. XII.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.          851
" One large edition of the New Testament has
already been circulated among the people; and
another of ten thousand is demanded, which is in
the press, and it is expected will be issued in a few
months; it will probably be disposed of as fast as
it can possibly be bound. In some cases, payment in advance has been offered.
The number of pages of matter prepared and
printed for the high school, counted in a continued series, amounts to about two thousand
duodecimo, and two thousand octodecimo, including half the sacred volume. The printing
done at Honoruru, during the last five years,
amounts to about thirty million pages, or six
million a year. The aggregate of printing done,
by and for the mission, for the whole period,
amounts to about forty-three million pages."
On the introduction of Christian knowledge
among the people, and the results of such labours,
the missionaries remark:" Great numbers of the people, during the
period of our labours, have in some way expressed a desire to be taught the word of God,
and guided by its precepts. Multitudes have
said, ' We repent; we believe: we wish to be the
servants of the Son of God.' Among thousands
of these, eight hundred and sixty-four have been
selected and admitted to the fellowship and ordinances of the church, as having, at the period
of their admission, given, in the judgment of
charity, evidence of a radical change of heart,
and of true subjection to Christ. But this number is by no means a satisfactory criterion of the




352


MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. XII.


extent to which the gospel has been blessed to
the nation. The field has been so wide over
which the seed has been scattered, the missionary
labourers so few, and their personal acquaintance, even with the more immediate people of
their charge, of necessity so very limited, that no
tolerably satisfactory estimate can be formed of
the number of true believers from the commencement of our work up to the present time. There
is reason to believe, that unsound members have
been admitted to the church. From among the
eight hundred and sixty-four members admitted,
thirteen have been excommunicated, and others
suspended for gross offences; so that the number
of church members is not a criterion at any time,
or in any place, by which the extent of the saving influence of the gospel can be correctly measured. None can tell how much of Divine truth
must be present to the minds of these children of
pagans; how clear must be their perception of
it; or how strong their conviction of sin, or their
desire of heavenly things be, in order to their
being united to Christ by faith. We know they
must believe, and be disposed to obey the truth,
and call on the name of the Lord with a sincere/)
humble, penitent heart, in order to their becoiming heirs of the promise. To those who have
offered themselves as candidates for admission to
the church, we have, in a majority of cases, given
no intimation that they could be admitted, for
want of acquaintance with them, or for want of
some decisive mark of Christian character, which
would render a long probation or familiar per



CHAP. XII.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.          353
sonal acquaintance less necessary. A probation
even of seven years has not been uncommon.
In connexion with these facts, it may be
proper to advert to a cause which has cut
short, or apparently obliterated, a portion of our
labours.  From the bills of mortality, which
have been only partially kept in some districts,
it appears probable that there have not been
less than one hundred thousand deaths in the
Sandwich Islands, of every period from infancy
to old age, since the arrival of the mission, fifteen
years ago.  Among these, thousands of our
readers, aged, middle aged, and young; and
thousands, who in some way professed more or
less regard to the gospel, have gone down to the
grave. Whatever, therefore, of blossom or of
fruit once appeared among them, the fatal blast
of death has swept over them, and they have
vanished from our schools and our congregations,
to be seen no more-to be instructed no more by
us; and the effects of our labours in that numerous class are placed for ever beyond the observation of the world. Even while the present
generation has been travelling though the wilderness, such have been the ravages of death,
that the pillars of the nation have been shaken
and removed. Seventy-eight members of our
infant churches have fallen by its strokes, embracing some of the active and distinguished;
and the whole community have appeared to be
passing away like a flood. Yet a goodly number
of the instructed have escaped these ravages, and
have been benefited, more or less, by the means




3954       MISSIONARY RECORDS. [CHAP. XII;
employed for their improvement; while the
number of our readers, and the number of those
who can be relied on as substantial friends to
our cause, has, in the midst of all opposing
causes, been gradually increasing.
"As evidences of the influence and progress
of our work, and the triumphs of the cross, we
could point to the great changes and radical reform in the characters of Keopuolani, Opiia, Karaimoku, Kaahumanu, Naihe, and others of high
rank, who have left the church below, and gone,
we trust, to join the assembly of the blest above.
Of the steady efforts of Governor Hoapili and his
wife, in the cause of reformation; of Kapiolani,
Kekauloi, and Kinau, who in their habitations,
dress, and intercourse, appear with Christian
dignity and politeness, and exert a good influence in their sphere, we could also speak with
pleasure. Others of rank deserve to be reckoned, as holding an important place as helpers, on
our side. But the evidences of unfeigned piety
are no less obvious in the poor."
In concluding the document from which the
foregoing extracts have been taken, adverting to
the extent of the work entrusted to them, and
the progress made, the missionaries add:" We are required to give the people the Bible,
with an ability to read it. This has been done
in part, and is in good progress. It has been
said, by one not much in favour of our puritanism, in reference to what is required and
expected of us, ' You have filled the land with
schools and churches; but with pleasant dwell



CHAP. XII.] SANDWICH ISLANDS.


355


ings and fruitful fields you have not.' Neither
the one nor the other, we admit, have yet been
fully accomplished; at the same time we would
humbly, yet confidently ask, whether the introduction of the light of the sabbath, of Christian marriage, of the press, and, above all, of
the Bible, with its doctrines of temperance, industry, purity, and righteousness, are not important steps towards a result so desirable.
" We have taken what we suppose to be indispensable incipient measures to raise the people
to a state of elevated civilization and Christianity; and though a great proportion of the inhabitants of the Sandwich Islands are low, in
respect to their habitations, dress, mode of living,
'manners and pursuits, thought, taste, intelligence, etc.; yet the immediate effect of the measures employed has been such as to comfort the
labourers in their toil, and stimulate to farther
exertion. Considering what all were, in a state
of gross idolatry and pollution; and considering,
too, what all would probably have been now,
without the gospel; and then taking into view
what we see Christianity is doing for those who
embrace it; the missionaries in the field, even
those who have had fifteen years' acquaintance
with the nation, feel as much encouragement to
preach the gospel to them now, and labour for
their conversion, as at any period, and as for any
people.
" For all the good that has been achieved or
undertaken here, to God alone all praise is due;
and for all that is expected to be accomplished,




356      MISSIONARY RtECORDS. [cHAP. XII.
or hoped, for, his Almigxhty favour must be relied on by every sincere frienid of the Sandwvich
Islands.' To Him may more fervent prayer/
arise, that the period may he hastened when
they shall be numbered among the nations that
shall be blessed in him, and unite to call him
blessed."
THE END.


J. Hill, Printer, Black Horse Court, Fleet Street, London.




L44l l~l                             I i
in  uts  i?,  4 u0  h $11O  )O /  V   Q
h<I K4 4 w;94A(,Q44$9444<9ja7
44
1                                               1
i~, Bi 1
~44
ur 7
I    I  Q0
Y I ki
44 br~k~                            44' ~1iP6
44 r 4




~j444.444 T4444)4  4
'44Z
44444,  4 4  4. 44  4  ' 44  44 14 4  4444  4




6,                   J6
F,         ~v:   r:IT                       i
4 ~ i: ~j~:    n:r?:::: 5~::sr. ~j~: ~
3'
46'~i*?1r
4
N;:-::  1"::::.*.'II
iQ,~"~'""
V:
4                   r  ~ 14 T1111 P
1I'  '   ';   TON
A:                            Ak:
is~l;;~~i c:~~:~::~i;   ~  ~r;::~!:~~j:
''Ac.
" ~:(?:' ~iJi
~~  1:~ ~~-I;~(:I:;,,,,"1A
-i~lf~;:::i::.!il i:~:::r~l,.:;; y:::"`~::i~ llc~!~:~r?::~: ~~:": l~!;?; ~iY
~:'::: T:  j::I '~) "
Rip..::: i
4         ~:,AX  I
WU,        z::I:::1:11
IIN;::;:.j.:.::::;1I1:I1:::~-l a~ll~~:
lf "~;s: ~  ~~:::'r:;~`:,% ~ ~ ~,~: 1?::B"~
'T l;; i,3,....l.l ~l::;~~"Qi"'':, r':~~::;:e~i  ~'' ~ r':~~?I:3:::




j
1,MN,              ' "'
A, I,'4  O
"J4




,
I
II,,,
I,